Home

TMS-3000 Controller

1. a non redundant system or the redundant pair of ESCCs in a redundant system stops all data traffic on the node and isolates the node NOTE from the Controller Removing the in service ESCC in a redundant system causes the node to reini tialize As a result all data and communications traffic is interrupted for ap proximately 2 to 5 minutes Therefore before removing the in service ESCC use the Controller to switch it to the standby mode When replacing a defective ESCC with a spare remember that software must be downloaded from the Controller at the master site ESCC Replacement Installation To reinsert an ESCC in the TMS 3000 shelf proceed as fol lows 1 Select the ESCC options 2 Place the ESCC front panel Enable Disable switch in the Disable position GDC 036R303 000 Maintenance 7 3 3 Position the ESCC in the receptacle guides top and bottom of the slot shown in Figure 4 3 and carefully slide the ESCC into the receptacle until it stops Tilt the top ejector knob up and the bottom ejector knob down and gently push the ESCC into the rear connector The knobs automatically assume their normal positions 4 Place the ESCC front panel Enable Disable switch in the Enable position Redundancy Control Card Removal of the Redundancy Control Card in a redundant system causes the primary module in each pair of redundant modules the right hand module of the pair to become in service except the ESCC in which the
2. Item Specifications Multiplexing Technique Bit interleaved time division Multiplexing Efficiency Up to 99 essentially unaffected by speed or mix of channels Microcell Backplane Internal Bit mode 16 896 Mbps Nibble mode 45 Mbps Packet mode 270 Mbps Data throughput Channel Capacity Up to 512 channels of voice or data per node Aggregate Interfaces EIA TIA 232 E ITU T V 28 ITU T V 35 EIA RS 422 ITU T V 11 EIA RS 423 ITU T V 10 MIL STD 188 114 T1 D4 1 544 Mbps T1 1 544 Mbps non AT amp T ITU T G 703 64 Kbps Codirectional ITU T G 703 64 Kbps Contradirectional ITU T G 703 256 Kbps ITU T G 703 2 048 Mbps ITU T G 704 2 048 Mbps Fiber Optic 1 544 Mbps or 2 048 Mbps Aggregate Capacity Up to 8 redundant or 16 non redundant aggregate trunks per node Aggregate Rates From 2400 bps to 2 048 Mbps see Table 1 2 for listing of all standard rates Environmental Operating Temperature 32 F to 124 F 0 C to 50 C for equipment mounted in EP 2T EP 2M and EP 4 Nonoperating 4 F to 186 F 40 C to 85 C Humidity 95 relative humidity with no condensation Altitude Operating 10 000 ft 3048 m Nonoperating 40 000 ft 12 192 m Enterprise System Control Card Internal Clock Accuracy 25 ppm Timing Specifications Meets ATT Pub 62411 specification Stratum 4 Enhanced Input Output Ports TMS Controller Port sync at 19 2 Kbps async up to 9600 bps Maintenance Port front and rear async up
3. 1 0 1000 ronly Leave the BOOT NI floppy in the drive Z 9 During the loading procedure using a 3 5 inch floppy drive and loading XENIX version GT you may be asked to install the disk labelled FILE SYSTEM At that NOTE time remove the N disk and install the N2 disk 6 After XENIX is loaded in memory the system displays information concerning memory allocation along with other system information The system now performs a self check to determine if there are any problems with the hardware GDC 036R303 000 System Initialization 5 19 The letters A Z appear in succession Note that the letters overwrite each other as they appear 7 After the letter Z is displayed the following message appears No single user login present Entering System Maintenance Mode If the letters stop appearing before the letter Z is reached run hardware diagnostics as explained in your computer manual correct any identified problems and start the installation procedure again from the beginning If the letters stop again call the Support Center listed on the information card and be prepared to tell them at what letter the display ended The self check using letters A Z occurs every time you bring up your XENIX system 8 the system begins to run the following menu appears Keyboard Selection 1 American 2 British 3 French 4 German 5 Italian 6 Spanish Use the Numeric Keypad if present using lt NUM L
4. 4X Data Clock X11 4XDATA This selection should be made whenever the data clock for the voice channel select ed through the supervisory port interface in the Configuration routine is less than 32 kHz When the data clock is 32 kHz either position is acceptable GDC 036R303 000 Channel Card Installation 3 31 Table 3 37 Voice II CVSD Channel Input Level Adjustment Option Input 52 1 52 2 52 3 52 4 Application 1 dB 2 dB 4 dB 0 5 dB sation ON OFF OFF ON 1 54 Switches S2 1 through S2 4 select at ON OFF OFF OFF 1 0dB tenuation or amplification for the voice input level This compensates OFF OEF ON 0 3 dB for cable losses or improper OFF 0 dB levels from connected telephone ON ON OFF ON 0 5dB equipment The switch selects a level ON ON OFF OFF _10 Of compensation from 15 dB to 6 0 dB in 0 5 dB steps Each segment of OFF ON OFF ON L5dB switch S2 selects a level of attenua OFF ON OFF OFF 2 0 dB tion or amplification the individual ON OFF ON ON 2 5dB stepsareaddedto produce a particular ON OFF ON OFF 3 0 dB level A level is selected to compen i sate for some measured deviation of OFF OFF ON ON 3 5dB the output level of equipment con OFF OFF ON OFF 0dB nected to the channel The deviation ON ON ON ON _45 dB 15 the difference between the actual level and the nominal
5. ON ON OFF OFF 74 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 103 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 75 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 104 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 76 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 105 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 77 OFF ON OFF ON OFF 106 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 78 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 107 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 79 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 108 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 80 ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 109 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 81 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON J OFF 110 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 82 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 111 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 83 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 112 JON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 84 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON J OFF 113 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 85 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 114 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 86 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 115 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 87 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 16 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 88 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 117 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 89 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 118 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 90 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 119 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 91 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 120 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 92 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 121 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 93 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 122 ON OFF ON
6. TMS 3000 Redundant Expansion Shelf 036M302 002 2 2 TMS 3000 Ribbon Cable Configuration 2 43 TMS 3000 Shelf Channel Interface Ribbon Connectors And Associated Slot Numbers 2 41 TMS 3000 Shelf With Non redundant Common Logic 036M56 001 2 1 TMS 3000 Shelf With Redundant 036M56 002 2 2 Training 7 8 Troubleshooting Procedures 7 4 Typical Hooded Cable Grounding Arrangement 1 7 UDC Module with EIA TIA 232 E Interface 036M078 001 3 3 UDC Module with RS 422 Interface 036M078 002 3 3 UDC Module with RS 423 Interface 036M078 003 3 3 UDC Module with V 35 Interface 036M078 004 3 3 Universal Data Channel Module Front Panel 4 22 Universal Voice Card Channel Options 3 39 Universal Voice Card E And M Signaling Option Selec tions 3 44 Universal Voice Card Input Level Adjustment Options Switch S2 3 43 Universal Voice Card Input Output Level Option Selections Switch S2 3 43 Universal Voice Card Voice Encoding Option Selections 3 42 Universal Voice Card Option Switch And Jumper Locations 3 41 Unpacking and Inspection 1 2 Upgradable Equipment List 3 23 Upgrading Operating Software 6 6 Using Large Hard Drives 5 2 Using Other PCs 5 2 Using your Ethernet Connection to run GTS Remotely A 13 UVC ASP Channel Module Front Panel 4 24 V 35 Aggregate Interface Piggyback Card 2 18 Variable Rate ASP Piggyback Card 3 47 VCH C 4 VEQ C 5 VLBRV Voice Channel Module Front Panel 4 29 Voice Channel Configuration Se
7. 50 PIN P2 CONNECTOR tae ees eae ee ss TO LOWER ee te ee Re ni EXPANSION ooo oo OOD pa SHELF 7 UJ FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW COMPONENT SIDE Figure 2 23 Flex Card Front and Rear View 036P091 001 GDC 036R303 000 Common Card Installation 2 47 To install flex cards the expansion shelf must be Revision F or later A kit is NOTE available that allows modification of older expansion shelves Flex Card Installation A maximum of four expansion shelves can be connected to the TMS 3000 main shelf using Flex Card assemblies Refer to Figure 2 24 to determine the Flex Card assembly number needed for the application In this drawing note that each area has four shaded portions corresponding to four ex pansion shelves The middle column labeled Main Shelf Cabinet shows the following When connecting between the main shelf and two expansion shelves use Flex Card assemblies GDC Part Nos 036P090 001 and 036P091 001 When connecting between the main shelf and three expansion shelves use Flex Card assemblies GDC Part Nos 036P092 001 and 036P093 001 When connecting between the main shelf and four expansion shelves use Flex Card assemblies GDC Part Nos 036P094 001 and 036P095 001 The Flex Card assemblies mount where the ribbon cables were previously attached between expan slon shelves Th
8. Y CABLE 027H316 IS REQUIRED TO ACCESS 1 ODD AGGREGATE INTERFACE FOR NON REDUNDANT MODULES IN ADJACENT SLOTS SECONDARY DB 25 PRIMARY SLOTS 1 15 ODD UPPER CONNECTOR J1 SLOTS 2 16 EVEN Port A CDA Module DB 25 CDA Module LOWER CONNECTOR J2 Port B CDA MODULES CONFIGURED AS A REDUNDANT PAIR OR ONE NON REDUNDANT CDA MODULE WITH THE ADJACENT SLOT EMPTY Figure 2 12 DB25 Backplane Connections for CDA Module GDC 036R303 000 2 30 Common Card Installation Table 2 20 CDA Aggregate Cable Connections Configuration Connector Pins Y Cable CDA Port Redundant Upper DB 25 2 14 3 16 Not Used Even or Odd Slot Port A Lower DB 25 2 14 3 16 Not Used Even or Odd Slot Port B Non redundant Upper DB 25 2 14 3 16 P2 Even Slot Port A Odd number 4 25 8 18 P3 Odd Slot Port B Lower DB 25 2 3 14 16 P2 Even Slot Port B Even number 4 25 8 18 P3 Odd Slot Port A NOTE Generally Port A of either CDA Module in a redundant pair comes out on the upper DB 25 connector and Port B comes out on the lower DB 25 connector When non redundant modules are used in adjacent slots Port A and Port B of the even numbered slot come out on the upper and lower connectors as before but Port A and Port B of the odd numbered slot come out on alternate pins of these connections The different ports are then split externally using a special Y cable GDC 027H316 This connector is located on the backplane of the main shelf If a Y c
9. Figure 3 14 M Lead Signaling Interfaces Sheet 2 of 4 GDC 036R303 000 3 34 Channel Card Installation P1 VOICE CHANNEL TERMINATING EQUIPMENT M BUSY IDLE E Type 5 12 TO 48V N C VOICE CHANNEL VOICE CHANNEL CABLE 2 lt SB 4 IDLE J M BUSY GND SG F Type 2 Back to Back AAMA BATT 12 V LE BATT BATT N C N C A AAA GND VLA BATT SG SB Figure 3 14 M Lead Signaling Interfaces Sheet 3 of 4 GDC 036R303 000 M LEAD M LEAD SENSOR ISOLATED X2 X6 AND X10 ON EAM 1 PIGGYBACK BOARD IN U S POSITION X4 AND X9 ON UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD IN U S POSITION X1 ON VOICE CHANNEL MODULE AND UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD X4 ON VOICE Il CVSD CHANNEL MODULE X4 ON VOICE amp ADPCM CHANNEL MODULES X2 ON VOICE CHANNEL MODULE AND UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD X5 ON VOICE Il CVSD CHANNEL MODULE ON VOICE amp ADPCM CHANNEL MODULES ON VOICE CHANNEL MODULE AND UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD X6 ON VOICE Il CVSD CHANNEL MODULE X5 ON VOICE amp ADPCM CHANNEL MODULES M LEAD M LEAD OUT SENSOR ISOLATED NOTE X2 X6 AND X10 ON EAM 1 PIGGYBACK BOARD IN U S POSITION X4 AND X9 ON UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD IN U S POSITION X1 ON VOICE CHANNEL MODULE AND UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD X4 ON VOICE II CVSD CHANNEL MODULE X4 ON VOICE amp ADPCM CHANNEL MODULE X2
10. Formatted Screen Displays GDC 036R303 000 Operation 4 9 The first step in entering TMS 3000 operating procedures is password entry you must enter a Login Name and a Password to gain access to the system The display then presents the TMS 3000 Main Menu The tasks required to initialize configure and maintain a TMS 3000 system are represented by the entries in the main menu MAIN MENU FUNCTIONS describes each item in the TMS 3000 Main Menu To select an entry from the main menu move the cursor to the desired entry and press the Enter key Another menu appears listing the operating routines that perform specific functions Select an entry from this menu in the same manner Depending on the particular task that you wish to perform you may encounter another level of menus or enter the operating routine that performs the task As you step through menus to initiate a routine you may need to specify a node or other device that the operating routine is directed toward For example to select a status display for a node you must enter the symbolic name of that node At these points the system prompts you to enter the symbolic name or other information required and highlights a field where the entered charac ters appear A typical prompt is Enter Node Name You answer this prompt by typing in an already configured symbolic name for the node and pressing the Enter key If you make a mistake such as mistyping the node name
11. Z 9 You should only select Slot 1 or Slot 3 the Aggregate Interface Cards for the TMS Compact node Selecting other Slots 2 4 or 5 can cause the NOTE configurations for these slots to be corrupted If you need to know the currently running node configuration before using the AGR command type VEQ and press Return The current node configuration is displayed Once you know the configuration you want to set up input each category on the menu as follows 1 Enter the slot number of the local aggregate that you are configuring and press Return 2 Use Table C 2 to enter the aggregate rate Press Return 9 If you are using a TIDSO interface the aggregate index rate must be followed by a T For example 140T NOTE If you are using a G704 interface the aggregate index rate must be followed by G For example 122G 3 select the transmit clock source Tx Clk Source external clock source Ext Clk Source and 1 or NTT refer to Table C 3 After entering these parameters press lt Re turn gt 4 select a redundant aggregate Red Agg enter Y and press RETURN To select a non redundant aggregate enter N and press RETURN 5 To select 1s density enter Y After entering the correct letter press lt Return gt Z If T1DSO interface and Nx56k DSOs answer Yes Y to the 1 s density prompt NOTE If TIDSO interface and Nx64k DSOs answer No N to the I s density prompt When the new aggreg
12. therefore it may be difficult to determine frequency lock with an oscilloscope NOTE Aggregate Control Card Check for the following conditions RCV CLK and XMT CLK should be frequency locked with some jitter Placing oscilloscope leads on RCV data and XMT data shows whether data 1s being received and transmitted Placing oscilloscope leads on RCV sync and XMT sync shows whether the TDM is in sync It also shows the size of frame being run ACM or CDA Modules Check for the following conditions l Place the leads of a dual trace oscilloscope on the XMT CLK A and RCV CLK A test points Both patterns displayed should be frequency locked with some jitter Place the leads of a dual trace oscilloscope on the XMT CLK B and RCV CLK B test points Both patterns displayed should be frequency locked with some jitter GDC 036R303 000 Maintenance 7 7 Data ll Ill IV Channel or UDC Modules Check for the following conditions If the channel is active data should be present on the DATA In and DATA Out test points Receive data should be synchronized no phase slippage to the internal INT channel clock If the channel is in the synchronous mode the clock frequency is the same as the channel data rate if the channel is in any other mode the clock frequency is 16 times the channel data rate except for Data Channel or UDC Modules If channel is in synchronous mode and using external timing Internal INT and
13. Initiate a mastership switchover if the user is a primary user Controlling Propagating Data Base Changes To provide redundancy against failure each controller in the on line network shall keep its local version of configuration including IAR data up to date This ensures that ifone controller fails all relevant network data is still available in other controllers The master is responsible for synchronizing the data as mentioned previously to all subordi nates This ensures that data remains current for all controllers in the network Whenever a change is made to the data on the master either through an IAR or by modifying configuration data through the menu the master controller tries to get the changes shipped across the network to subordinates For recovery purposes the master can save a large number of changes on the hard disk limited by the amount of available free disk space In the event that a subordinate is missing the last few changes the master can load only the missing changes instead of the entire on line network da ta The subordinate is not allowed to select a network other than the Current Control Network CCN as the on line network once the subordinate comes on line When connecting a subordinate controller make sure the files in the Modify SW Revision screen reflect the network and what s in the master controller Ifa subordinate is connected reconnected to the network and the master finds a discrepancy bet
14. MIL STD 188 114 Unbalanced Data and Timing Interface Signal Characteristics DTE Data Terminal Equipment or DCE Data Communications Equipment may be chosen TID III Data Channel Interface Conforms to EIA RS 422 balanced differential interface for data and clock Special application specific interfaces supported through interface piggyback Data Rates Modes 1 4 Channel rates 1 2 2 4 4 4 8 8 9 6 16 32 56 64 72 96 128 192 256 512 1024 Kbps Corresponding TDM Rates 1 2 2 4 3 2 4 8 6 4 9 6 12 19 2 38 4 72 76 8 100 112 153 6 224 228 576 1152 Kbps Data Rates Mode 5 Any rate below pre set maximum standard channel rates above Input Distortion Up to 25 maximum includes Clock Data Skew and Clock Asymmetry Output Distortion Less than 2 5 includes Clock Data Skew Other rates available Consult GDC regarding availability of any specific desired rate not listed For rates 2 Kbps and above the lower limit is 850 Hz For the 1 Kbps rate the lower limit is 150 Hz GDC 036R303 000 Technical Characteristics B 3 Table B 1 Technical Characteristics Cont Item Specifications TID III Data Channel Cont Input Rate Offset Dependent on input rate and mode selected From 0 001 to 2 Output Rate Accuracy Dependent on input rate and mode selected From 0 001 to 2 Output Clock Jitter Rate Dependent From 20 ns 42 bit to bit jitter at 1024 Kbps to 0 03 Mode
15. OFF ON ON OFF 1 5 6 0 dB in 0 5 dB steps Each OFF OFF ONB OFF 2 0 segment of Switch S2 selects a ON ON OFF ON 2 5 level of attenuation or amplifi ON OFF OFF ON 3 0 cation the individual steps are added to produce a particular OFF ON OFF ON 3 5 level A level is selected to OFF OFF OFF ON 0 compensate for some measured ON ON ON ON 4 5 deviation of the output level of equipment connected to the ON OEE oN 32 channel The deviation is the OFF ON ON ON 5 5 difference between the actual OFF OFF ON ON 6 0 level and the nominal level se lected on Switch S2 1 GDC 036R303 000 3 46 Channel Card Installation Table 3 52 Universal Voice Card E And M Signaling Option Selections Signaling Jumper Positions Signaling States Type X1 X2 X3 X4 X9 IDLE BUSY 1 GND M GND US 0 V dc 12 to 48 V dc 2 GND M BATT U S OPEN 12 to 48 V dc 3 GND M BATT US 0 V dc 12 to 48 V dc 4 M BATT GND US OPEN 0 V dc 5 M BATT GND US OPEN 0 V dc U K M BATT INT GND U K OPEN 0 V dc SSDC5 2 M INT INT US OPEN 0 V dc For back to back signaling with no external battery NOTE Headers X1 X2 X3 X4 and X9 are located on the Universal Voice Card Table 3 53 Idle Busy E Lead And Voltage Polarity Option Selections Jumper Jumper Position Application X5 BUSY When the E Lead is used for signaling loss of TMS 3000 power X6 BUSY results in a BUSY E Lead X5 IDL
16. 09 5 001 03 6P09 2 001 03 6P09 2 001 029 H61 5 005 03 6P09 3 001 03 6P09 3 001 029 H61 1 005 029 H61 7 009 03 6P09 0 001 02 6P09 2 001 03 6P09 3 001 03 6P09 4 001 03 6P09 4 001 03 6P09 0 001 036P09 4 001 036P09 5 001 036P09 5 001 03 6PO9 1 001 026P09 5 001 Expansion Shelf Expansion Shelf Main Shelf Expansion Shelf Expansion Shelf Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet The above diagram is a front view of five TMS 3000 cabinets The center cabinet or main shelf cabinet houses the common cards The other four are independent expansion shelf cabinets To connect expansion shelves in the main cabinet Find the expansion shelf in the diagram that corresponds to the one that you are installing The two numbers in the top box are GDC cable numbers Appropriate pairs of flat ribbon cables are still required to connect the main shelf to the first expansion shelf The numbers below the first expansion shelf are the flex card part numbers When connecting two shelves use GDC 036P090 001 and 036P091 001 When connecting three expansion shelves use GDC 036P092 001 and 036P093 001 When connecting four expansion shelves use GDC 036P094 001 and 036P095 001 To connect expansion shelves in an independent cabinet From the front of the cabinets find the cabinet and expansion shelf that corresponds to the one you are installing A flat ribbon cable is required to connect the first expansion shelf to the main shelf The number below the fir
17. 2 7 ESCC Node Address Option 2 Sheets 2 6 2 7 ESCC Option Description 2 5 ESCC Option Selection 2 3 ESCC Option Switch Locations 2 4 ESCC 2 3 ESCC Front Panel 4 14 Establishing the Time Zone 5 27 Ethernet Device Configuration A 10 Ethernet Software A 8 Expansion II Module Front Panel 4 18 Expansion Module Option Locations 2 46 Expansion Module Options 2 45 Expansion Module 2 45 Expansion Shelf Backplane 50 Pin Ribbon Cable Connectors Rear View 2 40 Expansion Shelf 2 46 External Alarm Relay 8 1 External Clock Connector J18 TMS 3000 Rear Backplane View 1 8 External Clock Input J18 Function 1 8 External Modem Port J42 25 Pin Connector Pin Assignments 8 7 External Modem 8 1 External Timing Connector J18 Pin Assignments 8 7 External Timing 8 1 F1 Special 4 3 F10 Abort 4 4 F12 Shut Audible 4 4 F2 Help 4 3 F3 Back Display 4 3 F4 Next Display 4 3 F5 Backup Page 4 3 F6 Advance Page 4 4 F7 Test Function 4 4 F8 Help Screen 4 4 F9 Del Read Status 4 4 Filter Clock 3 25 Fixed Or Variable Rate ASP Piggyback Card Option Switch S1 Location 3 47 Fixed Or Variable Rate ASP Piggyback Card Option Switch S1 Selection 3 47 Flex Card Configuration 2 49 Flex Card Front And Rear View 036P091 001 2 47 Flex Card Installation 2 48 Flex Cards Connecting Three TMS 3000 Expansion Shelves 2 50 Flex Cards 2 47 Flow Control Control S 4 7 Front Panel Components 4 13 Function Keys 4 3 F1 Special
18. 4 3 F2 Help 4 3 F3 Back Display 4 3 F4 Next Display 4 3 F5 Backup Page 4 3 F6 Advance Page 4 4 F7 Test Function 4 4 F8 Help Screen 4 4 F9 Del Read Status 4 4 F10 Abort 4 4 F12 Shut Audible 4 4 Fused Links 1 5 G 703 Data Channel Card 3 10 G 704 Aggregate Interface Buffer Size 2 27 G 704 Aggregate Interface Piggyback Card Connector Pin Assignments XP1 8 11 8 12 G 704 Aggregate Interface Piggyback Card Option Selections 2 26 G 704 Aggregate Interface Piggyback Card 2 21 2 25 8 2 General Operating Procedures 4 9 Hardware and Software Options A 1 Hardware Checkout Using ROM Monitor Program 16 MHz Zenith 5 10 Help Menu C 3 AGR C 15 CFM C 15 DIA C 12 HEL C 4 MFP C 13 MNT C 11 VCH C 4 VEQ C 5 VPT C 11 Home 4 5 Hyper Plug In Card Upgrade Kit 3 23 Hyper Plug In Card 3 21 3 23 Hyper UDC Module Parts List 3 21 IDE Floppy Controller Board Mass Storage Device 5 14 Idle Busy E Lead And Voltage Polarity Option Selections 3 44 Idle Busy E Lead Option Selection EAM 1 Board 3 36 Initial Loading of Software 5 1 Initial Setup 5 1 Input and Output Signal Level 3 25 3 36 3 40 Insert 4 4 GDC 036R303 000 Index Installation Procedures 3 21 Installation 1 2 Installing Informix in a Controller Containing a Previous Version 5 35 Installing the XENIX Distribution 5 29 Installing Your Packages and Applications 5 29 Intel 486 66 Setup Configuration Program 5 8 Interface Options
19. C 15 Alarm Relay Connections 1 9 Alarm Relay Connections Rear Panel Connector J17 1 9 8 8 Alarms 7 5 Alphanumeric ASCII Keys 4 6 Control Keys 4 6 Enter Key 4 6 Flow Control Control S 4 7 Refresh Screen Control W 4 7 Restore Field Control X 4 7 Screen Print Control P 4 7 Application 4 12 Asynchronous 1 10 Automatic Tracking Mode Mode 5 3 18 CDA Aggregate Cable Connections 2 33 CDA Base Card Option Locations 2 31 CDA Base Card Options 2 30 CDA Module DB25 Output 25 Pin Connector Pin Assignments 8 9 CDA Module DB25 Output 25 Pin 8 2 CDA Module 2 27 CDA Module Front Panel 4 26 CDA Option Selections 2 28 CDA E1 G 732 I O Plug In Card Options 2 33 CDA E1 I O Plug In Card Option Locations 2 34 CDA E1 Module 036M328 002 2 28 CDA T1 I O Plug In Card 036P310 001 Option Selections 2 30 CDA T1 I O Plug In Card Option Locations 2 29 CDA T1 Module 036M309 003 2 28 CDA TI El Aggregate Interface Cable Connections 2 28 CELP Voice Channel Module Front Panel 4 30 CFM C 15 Changing a Network 6 6 Channel Card Installation 3 1 Channel Interface Card Options 2 44 Channel Interface Card to Expansion Shelf Ribbon Cabling 2 39 Channel Interface Card 2 39 Channel Interface Card Digital Bridging Card Front Panel 4 17 GDC 036R303 000 Index Channel Module Installation 2 45 Choosing Packages to Install 5 29 CIC Expansion Ribbon Cabling For TMS 3000 Using Flex Card Assemblies 2 51 CIC Expansion
20. DBC CIC or TPP ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC CIC or TPP z ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC CIC or TPP ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC CIC or TPP ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC CIC or TPP 7 m Q v e Q v 2 34 56 78 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pair Figure 2 3 5 3000 Main Shelf Slot Locations Redundancy Control Card Install the RCC in the slot shown in Figure 2 3 The RCC is software controlled and therefore has no option selections Aggregate Control Card This section covers Aggregate Interface part numbers connections connector functions options and optional plug in cards as well as associated tables and drawings to provide detailed installation information Part Numbers This section provides information to be used to procure replacement assemblies and pc boards 7a ble 2 7 breaks down assemblies into sub assemblies that form the component GDC 036R303 000 Common Card Installation Table 2 7 Aggregate Control Card Assembly 036M3 13 006 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No PCB Assembly Aggregate Control II ACC IT 036P3 13 003 PCB Assembly Aggregate Plug In TMS 3000 036P3 14 001 Aggregate Interface plug in cards EIA TIA 232 E ITU T V 28 Aggregate Interface EIF E 036P041 001 ITU T V 35 Aggregate Interface EIF V 036P042 001 EIA RS 422 423 MIL STD 188 ITU T V 10 V 11 EIF P 036P043 001 Aggregate Interface T1 D4 1 544 Mbps Aggregate Interface T1 D4 036P315 002 T1 D4 1 544 Mbps Aggregate Interface T1 D4 036P315 003 ITU
21. MIL STD 188 OPEN OPEN NORM RS 232 RS 232 RCV S1 1 selects either a MIL 188C XMT 331 331 002 006 STD 188C or a normal inter 001 006 face EIA RS NORM OPEN OPEN NORM RS 423 RS 423 RCV S1 2 and S1 3 select 100 423 MIL XMT 331 331 002 004 ohm cable termination for STD 188 114 001 005 the Transmit Data and Unbalanced Transmit External Timing signals respectively in an RS 422 interface arrange ment EIA RS NORM OPEN OPEN 422 RS 422 RS 422 RCV The RS 422 arrangement is 422 MIL XMT 331 331 002 005 used with or without cable STD 188 001 004 termination as required by 114 Balanced data equipment connected to No cable ter the channel Selection of mination termination provides in creased noise immunity EIA RS NORM 422 422 422 RS 422 RS 422 RCV Only one device can be con 422 MIL TER TER XMT 331 331 001 005 nected to the terminated in STD 188 001 004 terface Up to ten devices 114 Balanced can be connected to the un With cable terminated interface Jumper termination plug X21 selects the RS 422 interface with or without ca ble termination V 35 Bal NORM OPEN OPEN NORM Dual V 35 Dual V 35 For each type of interface anced Double XMT RCV resistor networks RN7 and Current 331 002 002 331 002 003 RN8 provide the voltage lev els required by the associ ated interface standard You must set all switches and jumpers as shown for each interface
22. MODEM PORT J42 Figure 1 1 TMS 3000 Shelf Rear Panel GDC 036R303 000 1 2 Shelf Installation Unpacking and Inspection These steps detail the unpacking and inspection requirements for the TMS 3000 1 2s Remove any extra packing material from the unit Place the TMS 3000 unit so that you can easily access the front and back of the unit Remove each spare module from its individual carton Do not discard carton or packing ma terial save it for transporting or reshipping if necessary Inspect the components for visible signs of damage If you see any damage notify the shipper immediately Check the packing list to see if you have all components module types quantities etc Verify that the components of the unit and factory settings on the various modules are prop erly configured for your TMS 3000 applications The documentation package which comes with your system determines proper set up and card ar rangements for your system In particular ensure that 1 Installation Each card is in its proper slot in the TMS 3000 shelf Correct locations are given in your Net work Documentation Package Module locations for a completely filled redundant node are illustrated in Figure 1 2 In a no
23. Node External Timing Connections 1 7 Node Startup Procedures C 2 Non redundant Expansion Shelf 036M302 001 2 2 Operation 4 1 Option Selection Devices 2 2 Option Switches And Jumpers 2 3 Options A 1 Other Cards 2 51 Other Channel Cards 3 48 GDC 036R303 000 Page Up 4 5 Part Numbers 2 1 2 8 2 27 2 34 3 1 3 21 3 24 PCM Voice Encoding 3 39 Pentium 100 Setup Procedures 5 3 Pentium 90 Setup Procedures 5 6 Phone Jack Internal Modem Connector Pin Assignments 8 7 Port 4 12 Power Supply Connectors On TMS 3000 Expansion Harness Card 1 5 Power Supply Harness Color Codes 1 4 Power Supply to TMS 3000 Alarm Connections 1 7 Preliminary Checks 7 4 Preparing the Hard Disk 5 19 Primary User vs the Master Subordinate Controller 6 2 Printer Options 4 13 Program Plugs 2 2 3 10 Redundancy Control Card 2 8 Redundancy Control Card Front Panel 4 15 Redundant Controllers 6 1 Redundant Expansion Shelf 036M302 002 2 2 Refresh Screen Control W 4 7 Resistor Networks 2 3 Restore Field Control X 4 7 Ribbon Cable Configuration 2 43 Routine Maintenance 7 1 RS 422 423 Aggregate Interface Piggyback Option Locations 2 16 RS 422 423 Aggregate Interface Piggyback Option Selections 2 17 RS 422 423 Channel Adapter Options 3 17 RS 422 423 Channel Interface Adapter Option Locations 3 17 RS 422 423 MIL 188 114 Interface To Aggregate Line Transceiver 25 Pin Connector Pin Assignment
24. Please record the exact model number of your prospective PC and contact General DataComm Service to ensure it is supported by SCO XENIX There are some models that require special XENIX boot disks n1 and special GDC GTS kernel disks GDC 036R303 000 System Initialization 5 3 The best approach is to try loading the XENIX software If you encounter problems with the loading procedure contact technical support In general most 486 or Pentium PCs should be compatible The main points to follow are 1 Avoid using SCSI hard drive adapters as they are troublesome to SCO XENIX 2 Ensure that the number of hard drive cylinders are less than 1024 and the number of heads does not exceed 16 Pentium 100 Setup Procedures For the Intel 100 MHz Pentium to function properly the BIOS must be configured as follows 1 Re boot the machine 2 Press F1 when message Press F1 key appears on the screen 3 Select the top menu line item Main with the left or right arrows System Date date System Time time Floppy Options Press Enter here for sub menu gt Select your floppy configuration if different from display Primary IDE Master Press Enter here for sub menu gt IDE device configuration Select either User Definable or Auto Configure 9 This setting depends on the hard drive installed If the drive has less than 1024 A cyinders you may select Auto Configure Ifit does not then the drive settin
25. Test point isolated through a 10K ohm resistor Test point for bridged measurement of Voice Channel VF output level Test point isolated through a 10K ohm resistor Ground for VF input and VF output measurement Figure 4 15 Voice Channel Module Front Panel GDC 036R303 000 4 26 Operation Stand By A Rmt A LocalO B Rmt Test A Local B Local A Test B Test Dsbl CDA Fail In Svce XMT CLK RCV CLK GND XMT CLK RCV CLK MAINT ro 23 Status LED Status LED Maint LED Maint LED Maint LED Maint LED Maint LED Maint LED Maint Switch Maint LED LED Test Point Test Point Test Point Test Point Test Point Jack Description Red LED lights during the initialization sequence The board cannot oper4 ate during this time Green LED lights when the CDA module is in the standby mode Mode is entered in the following ways Module is inserted and used as a redundant mate to an already in service module or the module is forced from in ser vice to standby via a software command from the TMS Controller Amber LED lights if Port A link detects the DS1 remote alarm signal on its receive data stream Amber LED lights if Port B link detects the DS1 remote alarm signal on its receive data stream Red LED lights if Port A link has lost DS1 sync on its receive data stream Red LED lights if Port B link
26. The following six entries are grayed out PCI IDE interface Enabled Floppy Interface Enabled Serial port 1 Address COMI 3F8 IRQ4 Serial port 2 Address COM2 2F8 IRQ3 I Serial port 2 IR MODE Disabled Parallel Port Address LPT1 378 IRQ Parallel port mode Compatible Press lt ESC gt to return to ADVANCED main menu Advanced Chip set configuration Press enter here for sub menu gt GDC 036R303 000 System Initialization 5 5 Base memory size 640KB ISA LFB size Disabled Video Palette snoop Disabled Latency timer 66 PCI burst Enabled Press lt ESC gt to return to ADVANCED main menu Check the following entries Power management cnfg lt Press enter here for sub menu gt Advanced power management Disabled Press lt ESC gt to return to ADVANCED main menu Plug and Play lt Press enter here for sub menu gt Configuration Mode Use setup Utility ISA shared memory size 64KB ISA shared memory base address D0000h IRQ5 Used by ISA card all others Available Press lt ESC gt Save changes re boot 9 In certain pentium platforms if a DIGIBOARD card is installed when exiting the BIOS configuraiton you see this Digiboard error when booting XENIX NOTE CMDMAX CMDSTART Afier XENIX restarts log in as root and at the type etc shutdown 0 Press enter to re boot the
27. When the file system is made the message is displayed Hard disk initialization procedure completed The system then shuts down and displays instructions on booting the newly initialized hard disk Make note of these instructions You then see Normal System Shutdown Safe to Power Off EK or KX Hit Any Key to Reboot ae Starting XENIX on the Hard Disk The following steps explain how to start the XENIX system using the hard disk 1l Remove the BOOT NI disk Next press any key to continue 2 At the Boot prompt press Enter 3 Follow the screen prompts 4 Next you see some copyright information and information about the memory configuration of your system As before the system performs a self check to determine where any problems exist with the hardware The letters A Z appear successively on screen Ifthe letters appearing stop before the letter Z is reached run hardware diagnostics as explained in your computer manual Correct any identified problems and start the XENIX installation procedure If the letters stop again call the Support Center listed on the support information card and be prepared to tell them the last letter displayed 5 Now the installation program checks the root file system on your hard disk In this case it checks only the root file system 6 Atthis point you are prompted to insert the Operating System Basic Utilities volume B1 floppy diskette 7 Follow any additional sc
28. all this information from the keyboard instead of setting switches and installing jumpers like on earlier computers Once you use the Setup Configuration Program to configure your computer the only time you need to use it again is if you change the configuration for your computer or if you replace the bat tery on the backplane board Accessing the Program To access the Setup Configuration Program l Boot prompt press and hold the Ctrl control and Alt alternate keys down then press the Insert key After a short delay you see the Monitor prompt on the screen 2 Type Setup and press Enter The reverse video images you see on the display are the factory selections in each field or group of options Directions for proceeding through the program are located at the bottom of the display These directions change as you go through the program Time and Date When you enter the time and date use The number keys to type in the time and date The Enter key to lock in the selection The Backspace key to return to a position if you make a mistake GDC 036R303 000 5 12 System Initialization The time is entered in a 24 hour format as shown below It is not necessary to type the colons they are entered automatically XX XX XX hour 01 24 minutes past the hour 00 59 seconds into the minute 00 59 The date is entered in the following format It is not necessary to type the slashes they are entere
29. dev fd0135ds18 mnt The drive that you mount to perform the mninstall procedure is set as the default drive and all further floppy disk drive access through the TMS software uses the default drive cp mnt mninstall and press Enter Type mninstall and press Enter 10 Follow the directions appearing on the scre py disks 11 to reboot the system A S When the superuser prompt appears again When instructed to do so remove the last diskette from the disk drive Then press 1 type en concerning the loading and removing of flop Enter You may have to perform Steps 13 through 15 when a TMS software upgrade is made without reinstalling XENIX O S or when a shutdown with the Autologin feature disabled is performed Otherwise the system goes through the complete NOTE Autologin function automatically boots itself without operator interaction Af ter several minutes the first screen appearing is the GDC logo screen Follow Steps 1 and 2 on the next page to c 12 Press X ENIX System V Boot Press Enter The following appears hd 40 xenix z Press Enter Another prompt appears 13 14 Enter the correct time if necessary Press 1 cleaning print queue done appears If the optional Digiboard multiport card is message No Board found at port 0000nnn 15 Atthe Xenix386 login prompt type gts GDC 036R303 000 ontinue Enter again and
30. increasing administrative flexibility in assigning man agement tasks Universal Trouble Ticket You can deploy MEGAVIEW Universal Trouble Ticket option to track TMS related problems or problems relating to any other component service facility in the network for that matter You benefit by being able to create modify escalate and close trouble tickets for TMS components something that was previously unavailable within the TMS 3000 Reports Application Y ou can deploy MEGAVIEW Reports application to provide an integrat edreporting mechanism for TMS data You benefit by being able to create custom reports on the alarms trouble tickets and configuration data resident in the MEGAVIEW data base The cus tomizing capabilities of this application allow you to specify the information required to meet management objectives rather than being restricted to a set of fixed report types Terminal Emulation A UNIX based terminal emulation capability allows you to create win dows to control other CRT managed products in the network Y ou benefit by being able to dis play multiple controller windows at the same time thereby providing simultaneous visibility of multiple product consoles Alarm Summary Window In addition the MEGAVIEW graphics display and the TMS alarm displays an Alarm Summary window provides you with the necessary alarm detail required for proper analysis of the problem You benefit by having a complete complement of i
31. the system reports the problem through a message such as Node Does Not Exist Continue Default YES Y N To enter another node answer Yes or simply Y Entering No or N returns you to the previous level of menus If you press the Enter key without entering an answer the default response shown is selected in this case pressing the Ent er key is interpreted as a Yes response These prompts and messages always appear on line 22 of the screen Whenever any event or problem occurs that should be reported messages and prompts appear on that line When you reach an operating routine a display related to that routine is presented Depending on the exact nature of the routine you probably must supply some information as you use the rou tine The information is located in labeled fields in each display For example the configuration routines require the entry of much specific information that de fines equipment operation and desired modes of operation for the equipment at a node Several types of entries are used to supply information to the system They are Cursor Position Entry String Entry and Limited Range Entry For detailed descriptions of these entry types refer to Entry Types After completing all entries or having finished with an operating routine press F3 to exit from the routine You may have to respond to a prompt such as Do you wish to save your configuration Default Continue Y N C Repeatedl
32. track table enter q and press Enter 15 Youare next prompted for the number of tracks to allocate as replacements for those tracks that are flawed You should allocate at least as many as the recommended number The default number of replacement tracks is based on the number of bad tracks currently in the table plus an allowance for tracks that may go bad in the future If you ever exceed the number of allocated bad tracks you must reinstall XENIX The following appears Enter the number of bad tracks to allocate space for or press Enter to use the recommended value of n Accept the default by pressing Enter 16 Next the installation program allocates portions of your partitioned disk for the root and swap areas It also allocates a small portion of the disk for a recover area that is used during autoboot First you are prompted for the swap space allocation There are nnnnn blocks in the XENIX area Between xxxx and yyyy blocks should be reserved for the swap area Pleas nter the swap space allocation or press Enter to get the default allocation of zzzz blocks The actual numbers we recommend for swap space vary depending upon the size of your disk If your hard disk is between 80 and 100 megabytes enter 8000 and press Enter If your disk is between 120 and 200 megabytes enter 16000 and press Enter If your disk is over 200 megabytes enter 30000 and press Enter If you have enough disk space fo
33. 0 dB 1 8 dB 0 5 dB X 0 3 dB from nominal 40 dBm 42 5 dBm 70 dBm 5 V dc 5 230 mA max 12 V dc 10 10 mA max 12 V dc 10 30 mA max Universal Voice Card 600 ohms resistive 10 20 dB minimum 300 to 3400 Hz 56 dB minimum 300 to 3400 Hz 300 to 3400 Hz gt 26 3 dB gt 33 9 dB gt 32 2 dB gt 27 6 dB 12 6 dB 27 dB 34 dB 32 dB 28 dB 13 dB 3 dB at 50 to 55 dBm0 relative to channel level at 10 dBm Unspecified at less than 55 dBm0 3 dB at 50 to 55 dBm0 relative to channel level at 10 dBm Technical Characteristics Table B 1 Technical Characteristics Cont Item Specifications Universal Voice Card Cont Level Stability Frequency Response 300 Hz to 3000 Hz 3000 Hz to 3400 Hz Channel Gain at 800 Hz Power Requirements PCM ADPCM 10 minutes 0 2 dB 0 dB 0 5 dB 0 dB 1 8 dB 0 5 dB 0 3 dB from nominal 5 V dc 83 mA max 12 V dc 8 mA max 12 V dc 20 mA max 5 V dc 107 mA max 12 V dc 8 mA max 12 V dc 20 mA max Echo Canceller Card Power Requirements Using TMS32030 Digital Signal Processor Using TMS320C25 Digital Signal Processor Power Consumption Using TMS 3000 32020 Digital Signal Processor Using TMS320C25 Digital Signal Processor 5 V dc 5 330 mA typical 12 V dc 10 1 2 mA typical 5 V dc 5 100 mA typical 12 V dc 10 1 2 mA typical 1 6 Watts 0 5 Watts T
34. 036R303 000 Connector Pin Assignments 8 7 Table 8 13 External Modem Port 142 25 Pin Connector Pin Assignments Pin Number Description 1 Protected Ground 2 Send Data TD 3 Receive Data RD 4 Request to Send RTS 5 Clear to Send CTS 6 Data Set Ready DSR 7 Ground 8 Data Carrier Detect DCD 12 Speed Mode Indicate SPD IND 20 Data Terminal Ready DTR 22 Ring Indicator RD Table 8 14 Alarm Relay Connections Rear Panel Connector J17 Pin Number Function Relay State 1 Minor Alarm 2 Common CO 2 Major Alarm 2 Common CO 3 Spare 4 Spare 5 Major Alarm 2 Deenergized NO 6 Major Alarm 1 Deenergized NO 7 Minor Alarm 2 Deenergized NO 8 Minor Alarm 1 Deenergized NO 9 Major Alarm 1 Common CO 10 Spare 11 Minor Alarm 1 Common CO 12 Major Alarm 2 Energized NC 13 Major Alarm 1 Energized NC 14 Minor Alarm 2 Energized NC 15 Minor Alarm 1 Energized NC GDC 036R303 000 8 8 Connector Pin Assignments Table 8 15 Echo Canceller Card Pin Assignments XAPI Pin Number Signal Name Description 1 45V 5 V dc Supply 2 TEST Disables the Echo Canceller during diagnostics 3 PCMDAT Near end speech signal 4 RESET Power on reset pulse 5 PCMCK Clock signals for RX64KDAT PCMDAT ECHOUT 6 FRASYN Byte timing for RX64KDATA PCMDAT ECHOUT 7 MULAW Indicates Universal Voice Card or MU LAW Codec 8 RX64KDATA Far end speech signal 9 EHOUT Echo Canceller outpu
35. 10 Connector Pin Assignments Table 8 18 G 704 Aggregate Interface Piggyback Card Connector Pin Assignments XP 1 Pin No Description Function 1 CHASSIS GND Chassis ground Connects to system chassis ground through Aggregate Control Card 2 XMT DATA Transmit data from Aggregate Control Card Data changes on falling edge of the Transmit Clock XMT CLK Transmit Clock to Aggregate Control Card N x 64 kHz 4 RCV DATA Receive data to Aggregate Control Card Data is sampled on ris ing edge of RCV CLK 5 RLB Receive Remote Loopback Causes a remote loopback condition on the G 704 Aggregate Interface Piggyback card 6 RCV CLK Receive Clock to Aggregate Control Card N x 64 kHz 8 ROOS L Indicates that the remote end is out of G 704 frame sync Multi plexers is out of sync also Signal low for ROOS 9 SIG GND Signal Ground 13 EXT TMG External Transmit Input from TMS 3000 clock circuitry 2 048 MHz code clock for transmit timing 18 45V Positive 5 volt dc supply 19 SIG GND Signal Ground 20 LOOS L Indicates that the local end is out of G 704 frame sync Multi plexers is of sync also Signal low for LOOS 24 CDET Carrier Detect output Goes low when receive data is lost High indicates carrier is present 31 RCLK Receive 2 048 MHz clock for node clocking 35 B Balanced Receive Data B from one side of T1 line input Grounded by the UNB switch 36 RCVDATA A Balan
36. 24 Table 2 15 G 704 Aggregate Interface Buffer Size Common Card Installation Mode Value of N Plesiochronous Satellite Plesiochronous Terrestrial Synchronous 1 Synchronous 2 3 Synchronous 4 7 Synchronous 8 31 Buffer Size bits 2048 256 16 32 48 80 Max Delay Bit times 4096 512 32 96 160 Combined Digital Aggregate CDA Module The following paragraphs apply to both CDA T1 CDA E1 unless otherwise specified Max Delay usec 2000 250 16 31 47 78 Insert the CDA Module into the shelf by pressing it in firmly To remove the CDA Module first press the Dsbl disable switch on the front panel once All front panel LEDs should go off The module is now in a low power mode and may be removed from the shelf in the usual manner If the module is not removed pressing the Dsbl switch once more reactivates the module and the INIT LED lights Part Numbers The CDA Module consists of four cards the CDA base card the CDA T1 or CDA E1 micropro cessor plug in card and two CDA T1 or CDA E1 I O cards The CDA T1 I O card is the interface between the CDA base card and a T1 line while the CDA E1 I O card provides the interface with CEPT G 732 and G 704 transmission formats Each I O plug in card is a 6 25 X 6 75 inch printed circuit board and contains three connectors that mate with the base card Refer to Tables 2 16 and 2 17 GDC 036R303
37. 5 dB 0 dB 0 5 dB 0 dB 1 8 dB 0 5 dB 0 3 dB from nominal 65 dB minimum 1 5 dB channel gain The absolute envelope delay at the frequency of minimum envelope delay is less than 600 microseconds The minimum value is taken as reference for the enve lope delay distortion 1 5 ms 0 75 ms 0 25 ms 1 5 ms 220 dB at 40 dBm0 Input gt 25 dB from 30 dBm0 to 0 dBm0 Input 67 dBm0P ITU T Weighted 23 dBrnC0 C Message Weighted 65 dB minimum 0 dB channel gain GDC 036R303 000 Table B 1 Technical Characteristics Technical Characteristics Cont Item Specifications Voice Channel Module Cont Variation of Gain with Input Level 802 Hz ref Level Stability Frequency Response 300 Hz to 2400 Hz 2400 Hz to 3400 Hz Channel Gain at 800 Hz 5 kHz to 9 kHz 10 kHz 50 kHz to 500 kHz Power Requirements Interface Characteristics Impedance Return Loss Longitudinal Balance Usable Bandwidth Input level 3 dB 6 dB 34 dB 40 dB 55 dB ADPCM Voice Channel Input level 3 dB 6 dB 34 dB 40 dB 55 dB PCM Voice Channel ADPCM Voice Channel GDC 036R303 000 Output Power Spectral Density Signal to Total distortion Ratio PCM Voice Channel and all PCM T mode options noise signal in accordance with ITU T 0 131 0 5 dB from 40 dBm0 to 2 5 dBm0 relative to level at 10 dBmO 10 minutes 0 2 dB 1 year 0 5 dB 0 dB 0 5 dB
38. 8 17 lists the pin assignments for the TID HI Data Channel Module G 704 Aggregate Interface Piggyback Card Tables 8 18 and 8 19 list the pin assignments for the G 704 Aggregate Interface piggyback card ACM Module DB25 Output 25 Pin Table 8 20 lists the pin assignments for the ADPCM Compression Module Table 8 1 ITU T G 703 256 KBPS Interface To Aggregate Line Transceiver 25 Pin Con nector Pin Assignments Pin No Signal Name Description 1 Gnd Chassis Ground 2 XMT DATA A The A side of the transmit data pair 3 RCV DATA A The A side of the receive data pair 14 XMT DATA B The side of the transmit data pair 16 RCV DATA B The side of the receive data pair Table 8 2 ITU T G 703 64 KBPS Codirectional Interface To Aggregate Line Transceiver 25 Pin Connector Pin Assignments Pin No Signal Name Description 1 Gnd Chassis Ground 2 XMT DATA A The A side of the transmit data pair 3 RCV DATA A The A side of the receive data pair 14 XMT DATA B The B side of the transmit data pair 16 RCV DATA B The B side of the receive data pair Table 8 3 1 04 1 544 MBPS Interface To Aggregate Line Transceiver 25 Pin Connector Pin Assignments Pin No Signal Name Description 1 Gnd Chassis Ground 2 XMT DATA A The A side of the transmit data pair 3 RCV DATA A The A side of the receive data pair 14 XMT DATA B The B side of the transmit data pair 16 RCV
39. Boot Device Diskette or hard drive Post memory test prompt Disable Post setup prompt Disable Scan flash user area Disable Speaker Enable On board mouse Disable Keyboard Installed Numlock on at boot No Password Not installed Hit Page Down key for next page Base memory 640Kb may vary Extended Memory 7168Kb may vary Base memory above 512K Enable Parallel port Address 378H Output only Serial Portl Address 3F8H Serial Port2 Address 2F8H Video Type VGA EGA Video Horizontal refresh 3014 5 37 8 HZ VGA mode refresh rate 60 Hz On board BIOS mapping To E0000H Hit Page Down key for next page CPU Speed Fast Cache Memory only Refresh mode Synchronous Shadow disable all ranges Power save mode None Screen blank Disabled Hard drive spin down Disabled Continue with the procedures Starting XENIX From The Boot Floppy Set GDC 036R303 000 5 10 System Initialization Hardware Checkout Using ROM Monitor Program 16MHz Zenith A special test program the monitor program is contained ina ROM on the CPU card The CPU card is located in the system unit The ROM monitor program provides the following advantages Automatically tests various circuits every time you turn the computer on Allows you to select tests from the keyboard to check various functions of the computer Lets you enter configuration data from the keyboard Displays a color bar pattern used to adjust the video d
40. Bus connector to TMS 3000 main shelf connector XA10A Pin A14 Secondary power supply Alarm Bus connector to TMS 3000 main shelf connector XA10A Pin A2 In most cases TMS 3000 shelves are shipped from the factory already connected TMS 3000 Node External Timing Connections GTS software is used to set each TMS 3000 node to receive a master timing reference signal from an external source or to be the master timing source for the network In most cases a reference timing signal is received from an aggregate and requires no special ca bling If timing is obtained from channel equipment a special Y cable splits timing from the other signals entering the channel interface and transports the timing signal to external timing connector J18 on the TMS 3000 main shelf backplane Two cables are available for this purpose 028H504 001 for unbalanced signals and 028H505 001 for balanced signals EIA 422 adapter required The 9 pin connector of the cable connects to J18 the 25 pin connectors mate to a TMS 3000 chan nel interface connector and to a 25 pin crossover cable which connects to the data service unit or modem that supplies the reference timing signal Select External as the timing source for the node when using this arrangement Any other external timing source connects directly to J18 GDC 036R303 000 Shelf Installation On the TMS 3000 9 pin connector J18 located on the rear backplane of the main shelf lets you use a balanced or
41. Data Channel Modules The TID II Emulation Mode gives you three sub modes so that you can optimize communications depending upon channel rate and the characteristics of the channel input clock These three operation modes are Accuracy Tracking Mode 1 This mode gives you extremely accurate input clock rates and when you want to track and output the clock rate with lowest possible offset In this mode the TID III Data Channel Module tracks an input clock with accuracies as high as 0 006 depending upon the input rate Program Tracking Mode 2 This mode allows you to program the TID III Data Channel Module to control signal input and output rate offsets and data delays within specified ranges thereby optimizing communications for variable external clock characteristics Input Tracking Mode 3 This mode is similar to the ECH 11 emulation mode described below This mode allows you to support communications where the input frequencies may vary 1 5 from the reference frequency due to external clock inaccuracies When input clock inaccuracies are expected to exceed this threshold select operation in Mode 4 TID I Emulation Mode TID I ECH 11 Emulation Mode Mode 4 This mode is applicable when you require TID I performance characteristics over a communications link between two TID III Data Channel Modules Select Mode 4 when the channel input rate offsets are expected to be in the excess of 1 5 from the reference f
42. OFF ON ON 59 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 26 ON OFF OFF ON ON 60 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 27 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 61 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 28 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 62 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 29 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 63 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 30 ON OFF OFF ON ON 64 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF 31 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 65 OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF 32 ON ON ON OFF ON 66 ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 33 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON 67 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 34 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 68 ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF GDC 036R303 000 Common Card Installation 2 7 Table 2 6 ESCC Node Address Option Cont Node Switch Settings Node Switch Settings Address 52 1 S2 2 52 3 52 4 52 5 52 6 82 7 Address s2 1 52 2 S2 3 52 4 S2 5 S2 6 52 7 69 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 98 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 70 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 99 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 71 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 100 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 72 ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 101 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 73 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 102 ON
43. ON VOICE CHANNEL MODULE AND UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD X5 ON VOICE IIICVSD CHANNEL MODULE ON VOICE II PCM amp ADPCM CHANNEL MODULE ON VOICE CHANNEL MODULE AND UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD X6 ON VOICE II CVSD CHANNEL MODULE X5 ON VOICE II PCM amp ADPCM CHANNEL MODULE Channel Card Installation 3 35 TERMINATING EQUIPMENT IDLE BUSY SG N C VOICE CHANNEL A 15 P1 P2 NOTES 1 X4 AND X5 MUST BE IN THE U K POSITION ON THE UVC AND VOICE IN ASP CHANNEL MODULE ONLY 2 X2 X6 AND X10 ON EAM 1 PIGGYBACK BOARD IN U K POSITION G U K OPERATION SSDC5 M LEAD X1 ON UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD X1 ON VOICE II ASP CHANNEL MODULE X4 ON VOICE II PCM AND ADPCM CHANNEL MODULES X2 ON UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD X2 ON VOICE CHANNEL MODULE ON VOICE II PCM AND ADPCM CHANNEL MODULES X3 ON UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD ON VOICE CHANNEL MODULE X5 ON VOICE AND ADPCM CHANNEL MODULES Figure 3 14 M Lead Signaling Interfaces Sheet 4 of 4 GDC 036R303 000 3 36 Channel Card Installation Table 3 39 Voice II CVSD Channel E Lead Relay State Option Selection Feature X7 Position X8 Position X9 Position Application ing State Loss of Power E Lead Signal Busy Idle Idle With these three jumpers set in the position shown the E Lead pin 24 on the DB 25 EIA connector is in an Idle state during loss of power The F
44. Redundant Expansion Shelf 036M302 002 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Assembly Expansion Shelf 036B 301 001 PCB Assembly Expansion Card TMS 3000 036P307 002 Option Selection Devices You can implement optional configurations on a module with program plugs switches jumper plugs or resistor networks Each item is described below Program Plugs Program plugs select different interface configurations on the Data Channel module and on the RS 422 423 Channel Adapter if used Program plugs may also provide nonstandard clock rates on the Clock Generator module These plugs are factory installed in accordance with intended system usage but may be altered on site to change the operating configuration ofthe TMS 3000 A program plug is designated with the letters PP and a number for example PP1 The plug fits into a socket identified with the letters XPP and a number for example XPP1 To remove a program plug 1 Gently lift the plug from the socket with the extractor tongs provided with the TMS 3000 To install a program plug 1 Determine the correct pin alignment 2 Carefully insert the program plug into the socket GDC 036R303 000 Common Card Installation 2 3 Switches Switches are used to select various options on most modules Option tables for each module pro vide information on the features obtained by each selection Switches are designated by the letter S and a number e
45. Ribbon Cabling 2 42 CIC Option 2 44 CIC Options 2 44 CIC to Expansion Shelf Ribbon Cabling 2 39 CIC 2 39 CIC DBC Front Panel 4 17 Combined Digital Aggregate CDA Module 2 27 Common Card Installation 2 1 Communication Mode 4 12 Compliance with Subpart J Part 15 of FCC Rules 1 6 Connecting Flex Cards in an Independent Cabinet 2 51 Connector Pin Assignments 8 1 Control Keys 4 6 Controller 4 2 5 1 Controller and Network Configuration 6 1 Controller Editing and Cursor Position Keys 4 6 Controller Function Keys 4 3 Controller Hookup To TMS 3000 Node And Maintenance Console 1 11 Controller Initialization 1 5 Controller Interface Connections 1 10 Controller Operation 4 1 Controlling Propagating Data Base Changes 6 2 Controls 3 10 Corrective Maintenance 7 1 CRT Link 4 11 Cursor Down 4 5 Cursor Left 4 5 Cursor Position Entry 4 10 Cursor Position Keys 4 5 Cursor Down 4 5 Cursor Left 4 5 Cursor Right 4 6 Cursor Up 4 5 Cursor Right 4 6 Cursor Up 4 5 Data And Voice II Channel 8 1 Data Channel Connector Pin Assignments V 54 8 6 Data Channel Connector Pin Assignments 8 5 Data Channel Control Program Plugs PP2 5 Sheets 3 12 3 16 Data Channel DCE DTE Interface Option Selection 3 6 Data Channel Interface Cables 3 4 Data Channel Interface Options 3 5 Data Channel Module Option Locations 3 9 3 10 Data Channel Module Options 3 8 Data Channel Module with Hyper Plug In Card Mounted 3 22
46. SYNC etc are rate indexes The corresponding rates can be found in Table C 2 The following list shows the different types of channel cards and how they appear on the console 1 Async Asynchronous 2 Syne Synchronous 3 Isoc Isochronous 4 Pcm Pulse Coded Modulation 5 Adpcm Adaptive Differential Pulse Coded Modulation 6 Pcm t Pulse Coded Modulation with reduced overhead also used for Acm Pcm channel type 7 Uadpem Universal Adaptive Differential Pulse Coded Modulation with reduced over head also used for Acm UVC channel type 8 Advanced Speech Processing 9 Cvsd Continuously Variable Slope Delta Modulation 10 Cadm Compressed Adaptive Differential Modulation 11 Thinned Out Residual 12 T enc Transition Encoded 13 Tid Time Independent Data 14 Vibrv Very low bit rate voice 15 Celp Codebook Excited Linear Predictable Coding GDC 036R303 000 TMS 3000 Maintenance Console C 5 VEQ To View Equipment This command is used to view the currently running common modules on the TMS Main Shelf If you select VEQ a screen similar to the following is displayed T1 D4 dts Slot 4 Index f Tx Ext NTT Red Den Adr Status Clk C1k 01 64 I A Y Y Y 5 In_alarm 02 UNDEF 03 63 I A Y Y N 6 15 In alarm 16 CIC P scc In serv 3 C scc Out serv 3 Slot indicates the number of each specific slot in the equipment shelf Slot numbers range from 1 to 16 Index indicates wha
47. Since the ports are separate they do not provide a diverse backup to each other Refer to Table 2 20 XP3 XP 1 D D Figure 2 10 CDA T1 I O Plug In Card Option Locations GDC 036R303 000 Common Card Installation 2 27 Table 2 18 CDA TI VO Plug In Card 036P310 001 Option Selections Switch Switch Application Number Position Function 51 1 Off Enables B8ZS Bit 8 Zero Suppression B8ZS is a technique de B8ZS Dis line coding signed to meet the spectral density specification This technique creates an intentional double Bipolar violation at the transmitting end when 8 consecutive On Disables B8ZS zeros are detected Bipolar return to zero is the mod line coding ulation technique used in T1 which requires subse quent marks of polarity opposite to the previous marks The bipolar violation is detected and re moved at the receive end of the network 51 2 Off Bit 7 Substitution In B7 substitution ones density is implied This Bit 7 Trans Enabled means that bit 7 for select DSO frames is set to one When B7 is enabled the bandwidth available for type subaggregates varies with each DSO slot select On Transparent ing Trans bypasses this technique on the DSO frame format S1 3 Off Selects ESF Two methods of framing exist in a DS1 data stream ESF DA Framing A D4 frame consists of twelve 193 bit frames called a Superframe An ESF retains the structure of D4 but consists of twenty four 193 bit
48. To remove the ACM first press the Dsbl disable switch on the front panel once All front panel LEDs should go off The module is now deactivated and may be removed from the shelf in the usual manner If the module is not removed toggling the Dsbl switch once more reactivates the module and the INIT LED lights Channel Interface Card Removal of the Channel Interface Module in a non redundant system or the redundant pair of modules in a redundant system stops data traffic on any channel that communicates through that module or pair of modules Removal of any other channel module disrupts data flow for that channel and causes minimal dis ruption of system data flow GDC 036R303 000 7 4 Maintenance Module Removal To remove a module from its assigned receptacle in the TMS 3000 grasp the ejector knobs on the top and bottom of the module front panel Tilt the top knob up and the bottom knob down to unhook the module then guide it straight out from the receptacle Module Installation To reinsert a module in the TMS 3000 shelf proceed as follows 1 2 Verify correct module location by referring to your Network Documentation Package Select all options required on the module according to your Network Documentation Pack age unless some problem with option configuration is found reproduce the option selec tions made on the module being replaced Make sure that any required program plugs or resistor networks are mounted o
49. Turn on the color monitor by pushing the ON OFF button located at the bottom of the monitor to ON A green LED indicates that the power is on TMS 3000 Controller In most cases SCO XENIX and GTS software is loaded at General DataComm before your sys tem is shipped Refer to the Operation Manual for TMS 3000 Controller GDC 036R603 Vnnn for procedures to follow when using the Controller Initial Loading of Software Circumstances may occur when you need to initialize a system that does not already have proper software GDC 036R303 000 5 2 System Initialization The procedures needed to install SCO XENIX SYSTEM V for use with the Controller follow To install the XENIX operating system approximately seven disks are loaded onto the hard disk This procedure may take up to several hours to complete When responding to prompts from the computer use all lowercase letters A 7 except where uppercase letters are specifically required e g Serial and activation key numbers NOTE What You Need To install the XENIX System you need A Model 486 or better computer containing a minimum of 5 Megabytes of RAM 8 megabytes recommended One hard disk with a minimum of 80 megabytes of storage is required 200 megabytes recommended If not using an ESDI IDE Intelligent Drive Electronics computer a copy of the list of bad tracks located on top of the hard disk drive if your disk supplies such a list One double
50. V 54 Modem Figure 3 7 Data Channel Control Program Plugs PP2 Sheet 5 of 5 GDC 036R303 000 3 18 Channel Card Installation RS 422 423 Channel Adapter Options If you use the RS 422 423 channel adapter Figure 3 8 to obtain full RS 422 or RS 423 controls you must select the 422 or 423 interface Configure the interface to DTE or DCE devices See Figure 3 1 and Table 3 21 For the RS 422 423 channel adapters DTE DCE component board designations always refer to the equipment to which the adapter is connected If you are NOTE connecting data terminal equipment CRTs printers etc to the adapter place switches and program plugs in the DTE position If you are connecting data communication equipment modems multiplexers etc to the adapter place switches and program plugs in the DCE position 12V 12V 5V GND DS2 DCE S 036C002 001 S 036C001 001 DTE DCE Option Figure 3 8 RS 422 423 Channel Interface Adapter Option Locations GDC 036R303 000 Channel Card Installation 3 19 TID III Time Independent Data III Module Before attempting to set up or operate the TID III Data Channel Module you must first select a system application mode number Five application modes dependent upon your system requirements are available to you TID II ECH 2 Emulation Mode Modes 1 3 These modes are applicable when you need TID II performance characteristics over a communications link between two TID III
51. a basis of knowledge for informed troubleshooting Routine Maintenance Performance of the following routine maintenance tasks considerably reduces down time due to equipment failure Check alarm display on the Controller at least once a day to identify alarm conditions as soon as possible Leave the Controller in the alarm screen display mode when otherwise inactive so that newly reported alarms are observed immediately Observe front panel indicators for signs of equipment failures When checking indicator conditions remember that green LEDs indicate normal operation when lit red LEDs indicate an alarm condition when lit Inspect cable connections for looseness bent or missing pins or damage to cable Corrective Maintenance Corrective maintenance consists of troubleshooting a suspected fault to a system component module cable etc removal of the malfunctioning item and repair or replacement to restore normal operation The next paragraphs describe the removing and installing TMS 3000 modules and discuss various troubleshooting features for spotting failures within the TMS 3000 system Module Replacement In many instances removing and replacing TMS 3000 modules corrects a problem When replacing modules follow the instructions below to avoid unnecessary disruption of the system and possible module damage GDC 036R303 000 7 2 Maintenance Z 9 GDC recommends periodically testing the out of service module
52. a specific configuration selected through the de vices described below In most cases the settings need not be changed during installation Use the information provided here to check for correct settings and to determine necessary changes in the hardware configuration If you are unsure of the correct setting for any device contact GDC for technical assistance Part Numbers This section provides information to be used to procure replacement assemblies and pc boards Tables 2 1 through 2 4 break down assemblies into sub assemblies that form the component Table 2 1 TMS 3000 Shelf with Non redundant Common Logic 036M56 001 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Main Shelf Assembly 036B300 001 Assembly Filler Card 036C011 001 PCB Assembly ESCC 036P336 001 PCB Assembly Redundancy Control II 036P302 001 GDC 036R303 000 2 2 Common Card Installation Table 2 2 TMS 3000 Shelf with Redundant Common Logic 036M356 002 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Assembly Shelf TMS 3000 036B300 001 Assembly Filler Card TMS 3000 036C011 001 PCB Assembly ESCC 036P336 001 PCB Assembly Redundancy Control II 036P302 001 Table 2 3 TMS 3000 Non redundant Expansion Shelf 036M302 001 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Assembly Expansion Shelf TMS 3000 036B301 001 PCB Assembly Expansion Card TMS 3000 036P307 002 Table 2 4 TMS 3000
53. address are set correctly 13 Press lt Esc gt to return to the previous menu Press F10 save and exit Continue with the procedure Starting XENIX From the Boot Floppy Set INTEL 486 66 Setup Configuration Program When loading software on a 486 be aware that this computer has an IDE Intelligent Drive Elec tronics hard drive The drive is low level formatted at the factory by the manufacturer A DOS Prep or any other low level format utility must not be used on this or any other IDE hard drives Doing so erases all preconfigured information that was factory installed and render the drive unbootable and unusable You don t have to do a XENIX badtrack scan as the badtracks have already been identified and flagged at the factory To bypass this step type Q The Setup Configuration Program lets you tell the computer how your system is configured The following procedure is only for an Intel 486 66 To set up the Intel follow these steps 1 Reboot the machine 2 When the number 135 appears in the upper left hand corner of the screen hit the key 3 Ensure that all of the following parameters are set as indicated Onboard diskette Enabled Diskette A 3 5 1 44 MB may vary Diskette B Not Installed Onboard IDE Enabled GDC 036R303 000 System Initialization 5 9 Hard Drive 1 Type 2 CYL HD PRE LZ SEC SIZE 72313 0 0 51 234 may vary 2 Not Installed User definable drives 2 amp 3
54. and modules Appendix A Options provides descriptions of and installation instructions for options that are available for the TMS 3000 Appendix B Technical Characteristics contains system and module specifications and power requirements Appendix C TMS 3000 Maintenance Console describes the procedures for using a TMS Maintenance Console a software package designed to be used with an ASCII terminal that operates remotely from the TMS Controller Appendix D Agency Rules and Regulations contains specialized information for the UK and the Republic of Ireland Appendix E EC Declaration pertains to GDC s conformance to harmonized standards as described in the Official Journal of the Euorpean Communities GDC 036R303 000 ii Preface The Index contains the TMS 3000 subject and page number Although these options appear on the TMS Controller the TPP and OPP cards do not support TPP Redundancy Microcell SNA SDLC PIR NOTE Please refer to the appropriate version of the TPP and OPP release notes Document Conventions Level 1 paragraph headers introduce major topics Level 2 paragraph headers introduce subsections of major topics Level 3 paragraph headers introduce subsections of secondary topics Notes present special instructions helpful hints or general rules NOTE Related Publications The following documents have additional information that may be helpful when using this product GDC Number S
55. backplane You also need a shielded EIA TIA 232 E extension cable GDC 027H506 XXX The two cables are combined in GDC 027H004 XXX Refer to Chapter 5 System Initialization to connect the keyboard monitor and system unit together Chapter 5 also provides a description of TMS 3000 Controller initialization Connect the Maintenance Console to the TMS 3000 using GDC 028H305 One end of the cable connects to Connector 119 on the TMS 3000 backplane the other end connects to the Main tenance Console connector marked MODEM or COMM See Figure 1 6 Some of the TMS common cards ESCC ACM CDA TPP and OPP have a front monitor port for connecting the Maintenance Console The cable required for this NOTE connection is GDC 024H140 An interactive control port for the Controller may be extended to a remote NETCON site This application uses the NETCON CRT link facility to control TMS 3000 through the CRT of a NETCON operator Connections at the Controller site are made to serial Port 1 located at the back of the controller Typically a modem link connects the port to a NETCON I O port at another site The Controller can be connected to a modem through which it can communicate with a NETCON at a remote node A NETCON CRT link is described in GDC NOTE O58R675 and Chapter 4 of this manual When the PC is connected to the TMS 3000 through serial Port 0 serial Port 1 can be used to link a modem on NETCON to the PC only if the PC monitor and ke
56. card at each end of the path Channel Module This Voice or Data Channel Module plugs into an Expansion Shelf TMS Compact MEGAMUX Plus or OCM It interfaces external equipment via cables to a Channel Interface Card Channel Interface Card This card interfaces with Channel Modules and the 16 896 MHz Fast Bus It contains all the cir cuitry necessary to control frame multiplex and demultiplex up to 64 channels onto the Fast Bus Channel Card connections to the Channel Interface Card are made viaa pair of ribbon cables that run from the backplane of the Expansion shelf holding the channel cards to the Main Shelf Backplane where the Channel Interface Card is located Circuit An end to end data or voice path which can pass through several entities in a communication sys tem A circuit is described or referred to by the node channel names which identify the endpoints of the circuit Common Module or Common Card A generic term for any module that when removed will cause a major alarm This includes all modules housed in the main TMS shelf plus the Expansion Modules located on each TMS Ex pansion Shelf CSU Channel Service Unit DACS Network DACS Digital Access Cross connect System is a byte oriented DSO digital T1 network ser vice DCE Data Communications Equipment GDC 036R303 000 vi Preface Dial Backup A feature that provides a direct node to controller link if normal supervisory communication be twe
57. either disabled or enabled when the external control line is grounded Enable when external control line is grounded Open Up Closed Down With the switches set to the Disable Always or Enable Always posi tion the Echo Canceller is perma nently disabled or enabled regardless of the state of the external control line dBm NOTE Switch S1 1 is to remain in Open Up position at all times The residual echo suppresser option on the Echo Canceller Card may cause the Universal Voice Card to syn chronize incorrectly after a loss of sync due to link errors The Adaptive Bulk Delay has a factory default of 0 GDC 036R303 000 Channel Card Insta llation 3 49 Variable Rate ASP Piggyback Card Either a fixed or variable rate ASP Piggyback card may be installed on the Voice II ASP or UVC ASP Channel Module With the ASP Piggyback Card GDC 036P259 001 installed fixed rate ASP at 16 Kbps is provided With ASP Piggyback Card GDC 036P259 002 installed variable rate ASP rates of 10 11 12 and 16 Kbps may be selected by means of the software The location of option Switch S1 on the ASP Piggyback Card is shown in Figure 3 18 The option selections for fixed or variable rate ASP are described in Table 3 56 P2 P1 oo000000 Figure 3 19 Fixed or Variable Rate ASP Piggyback Card Option Switch S1 Location Table 3 56 Fixed o
58. external EXT clock signals should be synchronized no phase slippage Voice Il or UVC Channel Modules Check for the following conditions If Voice Channel is active busy the voice signals in and out of the channel should be present at the IN and OUT test points Technical Assistance Procedure For technical assistance customers should call General DataComm Service at 203 598 7526 In Canada General DataComm Canada Ltd Service and Repair Facility 1790 Beaulac Street St Laurent Montreal Quebec H4R 1W8 Telephone 1 514 336 5454 TWX 610 421 3221 Telex 05824085 In the United Kingdom contact the GDC area manager at General DataComm U K Ltd Molly Millars Close Molly Millars Lane Wokingham Berkshire England RG11 2QF Telephone 011 44 734 774 868 Telex 851 847298 Fax 011 44 734 774 871 GDC 036R303 000 7 8 Maintenance In Europe A frica Middle East General DataComm 14 rue Jules Saulinier Parc du Colombier BP 221 93200 ST DENIS France Tel 011 33 1 48133470 Fax 011 33 1 42430021 In the Pacific General DataComm Pty Ltd Suite 902 275 Alfred Street North North Sydney NSW 2060 Australia Tel 011 61 2 956 5099 Fax 011 61 2 956 5083 In Asia General DataComm 803 Century Square 1 13 D Aguilar Street Central Hong Kong Tel 011 852 5265511 Telex 780 80579 Fax 011 852 5259944 In Latin America General DataComm International 1579 Straits Turnpike P O Box 1299 Middlebury Connecticut 067
59. for operation as a Compact node TMS 3000 93 1 ON Configures ESCC for operation as a TMS node Watchdog Disabled 93 2 OFF Disables watchdog for testing purposes Enabled 93 2 ON Enables watchdog Monitor Port Back 53 3 OFF Selects back port for maintanance console Front 53 3 Selects front port for maintenance console Clock Bus 6 Frequency Special Rate 53 4 OFF Selects special rate PROGI as clock frequency on PROGI Clock Bus 6 1 536 MHz 53 4 ON Selects 1 536 MHz as clock frequency on Clock Bus 6 Clock Bus 7 Frequency Special Rate 53 5 OFF Selects special rate PROG2 as clock frequency on PROG2 Clock Bus 7 1 344 MHz 53 5 ON Selects 1 344 MHz as clock frequency on Clock Bus 7 External Timing Unbalanced S3 6 OFF Selects unbalanced impedance for an external tim Source Impedance ing source if any on serial Port J18 Choose unbal anced impedance for EIA 232 D and RS 423 interfaces Balanced S3 6 ON Selects balanced impedance for an external timing source if any on serial Port J18 Choose balanced impedance for V 35 and RS 422 interfaces J20 RSET Disabled S4 1 OFF Disables signal RSET on serial Port J20 Enabled S4 1 ON Enables signal RSET on serial Port J20 J20 SERITDATA Disabled 54 2 OFF Disables signal on serial Port 720 Enabled 54 2 ON Enables signal SERITDATA on serial Port J20 J20 SERIDTR Disabled S4 3 OFF Disables signal on serial Port J20 En
60. has lost DS1 sync on its receive data stream Red LED lights if the Port A link is under test and not in normal operation Red LED lights if the Port B link is under test and not in normal operation Allows you to remove module from service without physically removing it from the shelf If performed on an in service CDA of a redundant pair a dundant switch occurs If performed on a non redundant in service module module still goes into the standby mode To return to in service toggle switch again or a presettable software timer resets the module Red LED lights if the CDA has detected an internal hardware failure Green LED lights to indicate that the card is in service Port A Transmit Clock isolated through a 1K ohm resistor Port A Receive Clock isolated through a 1K ohm resistor Ground Port B Transmit Clock isolated through a 1K ohm resistor Port B Receive Clock isolated through a 1K ohm resistor Port for connecting a maintenance terminal Figure 4 16 CDA Module Front Panel T1 and E1 versions GDC 036R303 000 Operation 4 27 Name Part Description d DataIn LED Data In O Data Out O DataOut LED Indicates data activity is being transmitted by the module A space high lights the amber LED Indicates data activity is being transmitted by the module A space high lights the amber LED In Service In Svce LED Green LED lights when the TID III channel is entered in the cur ren
61. heat dissipation of the main shelf are required See Installation in Chapter 1 which discusses the cooling requirements of the main shelf Remember also that the CIC performs the interface for up to 64 data and voice channels at the local node and sends a serial stream across the fast bus to the ACC s Only an ACC can perform the interface tasks for each aggregate trunk A CIC therefore does not use the aggregate trunk connector positioned behind it One CIC must use both 50 pin ribbon cable connectors located on the backplane below each pair of slots For this reason Channel Interface modules always require two slot positions If you choose to have a non redundant CIC the adjacent slot must be empty Also a CIC cannot be paired with an ACM Aggregate Control or CDA Module Notice in Figure 2 11 that the pri mary module is always on the right for example Slot 1 is redundant and Slot 2 is primary When configuring an ACC take the following steps to configure redundant or non redundant modules and diverse or non diverse aggregate trunks 1 Select diversity or single aggregate non diverse on both ACCs in the pair Use the berg jumpers located on the ACC 2 Select redundant or non redundant on both ACCs Use the berg jumpers located on the ACC 3 Select the options on Aggregate Interface Piggybacks A and B for both ACCs Both boards should be set the same 4 For diversity place the piggyback interface card for the lower connector
62. in materials and workmanship The warranty period is one year from the date of shipment GDC s sole obligation under its warranty is lim ited to the repair or replacement ofthe defective equipment provided it is returned to GDC transportation prepaid within a reasonable period This warranty will not extend to equipment subjected to accident misuse or alterations or repair not made by GDC or authorized by GDC in writing The foregoing war ranty is exclusive and in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including but not limited to warranties of merchantability and fitness for purpose Trademarks and Patents General DataComm the General DataComm logo and the following are trademarks of General Data Comm Inc in the United States and other countries ACCULINE ANALOOP AUTOFRAME BERT 901 DATACOMM SECURE PAK DATALOOP DIGIDIAL ENmacs FASTPRO FIRST RE SPONSE GDC GDC APEX GENERAL DATACOMM X PRESS GEN NET GEN PAC IM AGE TMS KILOMUX LAN TMS MEGA BRIDGE MEGAMUX MEGAMUX TMS MEGANET MEGASPLIT MEGASWITCH MEGAVIEW MULTIMODEM NETCON NETSWITCH NMC QUIKSHIPPERS SERVI CHECK SERVI SNAP Ethernet is a trademark of the Xerox Corporation HP OPENVIEW is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company IBM PS 2 is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Microsoft is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation NetWare is a trademark of Novell Inc Novell is a trademark of Novell Inc XENIX is a trademark of Micr
63. keys Once you have selected Help select information on a key by pressing that key The Help screen for that key ap pears Help screens contain directions for returning to TMS 3000 displays F3 Back Display This key steps backward through a sequence of displays and menus reversing the steps that you followed to enter that routine This is the normal method of exiting from a routine Repeatedly pressing F3 brings you back to the TMS 3000 Main Menu Take care in using F3 to exit a Diagnostic routine Some TMS 3000 tests continue to run until stopped Ifyou exit a test routine by using F3 make sure you end the test first if you don t want it to continue F4 Next Display This key steps forward through a display sequence in those instances where there is only one pos sible forward sequence no menu or other choices required In the Modify Node Equipment Rou tine this key selects the Aggregate Configuration and Channel Configuration displays when the cursor is positioned at a parameter field for that node component in the Modify Node Equipment display F5 Backup Page This key is used in routines that require more than one display page for a particular display Press ing this key returns the previous display page to the screen GDC 036R303 000 4 4 Operation F6 Advance Page This key is used in routines that require more than one display page for a particular display Pressing this key brings the next display page to the scree
64. level of 0 dBm 5 0 dB and 16 dBm selected on Switch S1 OFF ON ON ON 5 5dB OFF ON ON OFF 6 0dB For example if the nominal level is 0 dBm and the actual level is 2 dBm selection of 2 dB would compensate for the difference between the nomi nal and measured input values Table 3 38 Voice II CVSD Channel E And M Signaling Option Selection Berg Jumper Positions Signaling States X4 X5 X6 Idle Busy Application 1 GND M GND 0Vdc 12 to 48 Vdc X4 X5 and select the proper in 2 GND M BATT Open 12to 48 Vdc terface for different E amp M signaling 3 GND M BATT 0 Vde 12 to 48 Vde types The jumper positions selected depend entirely on the E amp M signal 4 M GND Open 0 Vdc ing type used by the voice equipment 5 M GND Open 0 Vdc connected to a Voice Channel mod 2 INT INT Open 0Vde ule For most applications the selec tions shown for Signaling Type 1 are used Back to back i e when the VF interfaces of two voice II Channel modules are connected directly together GDC 036R303 000 3 32 Channel Card Installation VOICE CHANNEL A TERMINATING Ud M LEAD M LEAD SENSOR ISOLATED X1 ON VOICE IWASP CHANNEL MODULE AND UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD X4 ON VOICE II CVSD CHANNEL MODULE X4 ON VOICE amp ADPCM CHANNEL MODULES X2 ON VOICE IWASP CHANNEL MODULE AND UNIVERSAL VOIC
65. levels from connected OFF OFF OFF OFF 0 telephone equipment The Switch selects a ON ON ON OFF 0 5 level of compensation from 1 5 dB to 6 0 ON OFF ON OFF _1 0 S d s witc selects a level of attenuation or OFF ON ON OFF 1 5 amplification the individual steps are add OFF OFF ON OFF 2 0 ed to produce a particular level A level is ON ON OFF ON 2 5 selected to compensate for some measured ON OFF OFF ON 30 deviation of the output level of equipment connected to the channel The deviation is OFF ON OFF ON 3 5 the difference between the actual level and OFF OFF OFF ON 4 0 the nominal level selected on Switch S1 ON ON ON ON 4 5 D ON OFF ON ON 5 0 OFF ON ON ON 5 5 OFF OFF ON ON 6 0 Table 3 45 Voice II ASP VF Channel E And M Signaling Type Selection Signaling Berg Jumper Positions Signaling States Type X1 X2 X3 X15 X9 X10 X11 X12 IDLE BUSY 1 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 1 2 0 Vdc OPEN 12 to 48 Vdc 2 2 3 2 3 1 2 2 3 1 2 0 Vdc 12 to 48 Vdc 3 2 3 2 3 1 2 2 3 1 2 OPEN 12 to 48 Vdc 4 1 2 4 5 2 3 2 3 1 2 OPEN 0 Vdc 5 1 2 4 5 2 3 2 3 1 2 OPEN 0 Vdc U K 1 2 4 5 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 2 3 0 Vdc Table 3 46 Voice Channel E Lead Polarity Option Selection Feature Selection X13 X14 Position Application E Lead Polarity Negative 1 2 Jumpers X13 and X14 select polarity for the E Lead Polarity These jumper positions depend on the requirements of the equip ment connected to the ASP channel interface Nor Positive 2 3 mal
66. machine again GDC 036R303 000 5 6 System Initialization Pentium 90 Setup Procedures Use the following procedures to set up the parameters needed to run GTS software on a Pentium 90 machine 1l While the machine is booting up after the memory check press when prompted 2 Youseethe following display If necessary change your settings to correspond to the ones below Main Advanced Security Exit System Date YYYY DD MMM System Time HH MM SS Floppy A type 1 44 MB 3 5 Inch Floppy B type Disabled Hard disk type type of drive installed d not installed e not installed f not installed Language English Boot Options XPRESS ENTER 3 Press Enter You see the following sub menu Boot sequence A first then C System Cache enabled Boot speed turbo Num lock OFF Setup Prompt enabled Hard disk pre delay3 seconds Type matic rate programming refresh 4 Press Esc to return to the previous menu The following fields are fixed Video mode EGA VGA ouse not installed Base memory 640KB Extended memory 15360K may differ GDC 036R303 000 System Initialization 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 Press the right arrow key to display the advanced setup screen Highlight Peripheral Configuratio lowing fields Correct if needed Fixed Fields n and press Enter You should see the fol Configuration
67. mode Auto PCI IDE Interface Enabled Standard IDE Interface Enabled Floppy Interface Enabled Fixed Fields Serial Port 1 Address COM13F8H Serial Port 2 Address COM22F8H Parallel Port Address LPT1378H Parallel Port Mode Compatible Fixed Fields Serial Port 1 IRQA Serial Port 2 IRQ3 Parallel Port IRQ7 Press Esc to return to the previous menu Highlight Advanced Chipset and press Enter You should see the following fields Correct 1f needed Base memory size ISA Bus speed Byte merging PCI IDE prefetch buffers ISA LFB size Latency timer PCI Clocks Press Esc to return to the previous menu 640KB Compatible Enable Enabled Disabled 66 Highlight Power management configurationandpress Enter You should see the following field Correct if needed Advanced power management Press Esc to return to the previous menu Disabled Highlight Plug and play configuration and press Enter You should see the following fields Correct if needed GDC 036R303 000 5 8 System Initialization Configuration mode Use setup utility ISA shared memory size 64KB ISA shared memory base address D000h IRQ 5 used by ISA card IRQ 9 available fixed field IRQ 10 available fixed field IRQ 11 available fixed field 9 A The optional Digiboard card will not function properly unless the ISA shared NOTE memory size and and shared mamory base
68. onthe Controller Configuration screen When a subordinate cannot communicate with the master and both controllers are up and running the network becomes separated In a multiple controller environment link failures can cause the following problems in the network The master controller becomes isolated from its subordinates One subordinate becomes isolated from the rest of the controllers A group of subordinates is isolated from the rest of the controllers In all cases once the network is separated the process of selecting a new master within each iso lated sub network begins This process is done without intervention The selection is based on controller priorities and addresses of the controllers The one with the best controller priority val ue becomes the master of the isolated sub network The value of the controller priority is from 1 through 10 The smaller the value the better the controller priority If more than one controller has the same controller priority the one with the lowest address becomes the master After the new master establishes local node ownership it broadcasts its existence to all other con trollers The subordinates reply indicating acceptance When the master completes exchanging status with its subordinates the process of data resynchronization and periodic network communication between the new master and subordinate controllers begins O Z lt The selected master controller does not beco
69. or raising the local controller switcho ver priority Once the new master establishes handshaking between itself and its subordinates the next phase of network restoration begin These are data resynchronization and periodic net work communication between the new master and the subordinates The CCN configuration data of the new master becomes the base for the CCN data of all subordinates Adding Removing a Controller Modifying the controller configuration at the master controller lets you add remove a controller to from the on line network To add a controller to the on line network 1 Power on the added controller 2 the added controller if the intended on line network does not exist you can either re store the same network by using a floppy saved from the master or create a dummy network with the same on line network name See Controller and Network Configuration descrip tion earlier in this chapter for an explanation of dummy network 3 Modify controller configuration on the master controller via Create Modify Controller menu selection 4 Walt until the master finishes downloading this new configuration into all nodes in the net work then connect the added controller to the designated node 5 Login to the intended on line network on the added controller This step may or may not be required depending on whether the selected network on the added controller is recog nized by its local node If the selected network on the a
70. port The other end of this cable connects into the external modem 2 Another cable GDC 028H502 XXX connects from the external modem into the 25 pin connector of an unused Sun TTY port on the Sun Workstation This cable functions as MEGAVIEW DU Dialup alarm interface Configure this Port 02 07 on the I O Port Configuration screen as MEGAVIEW DU Select the baud rate on this screen 3 From the Controller Maintenance menu select Load a Software Release install the MEGAVIEW Feature Module disk into the floppy drive and proceed to follow the on screen instructions Allow the system time to reboot Whenthe TMS Main Menu appears continue to follow the instructions in the MEGAVIEW User s Guide for initializing the TMS 3000 An alarm configuration window should appear on the MEGAVIEW Set up the alarm sessions on this screen Refer to the MEGAVIEW User guide for further information Aggregate Performance Installation From the Controller Maintenance menu select Load a Software Release install the Ag gregate Performance Feature Module disk into the floppy drive and proceed to follow the on Screen instructions To verify installation select Examine Software Versions from the Controller Mainte nance menu Whenthe Examine Software Revision menu appears select Examine TMS GTS Options Installed Aggregate Performance should appear in the Software Item list GDC 036R303 000 Options A 7 TCP IP and STREAMS The fo
71. reaching an additional shelf Cable 029H617 010 with 1 5 ft extension reaching an additional shelf Cable 029H617 011 with 1 5 ft extension reaching an additional shelf GDC 036R303 000 Be sure to connect each ribbon cable so that the colored tracer on the edge of the ribbon is up Common Card Installation 2 41 FRONT VIEW 029H6 13 009 029H6 11 005 029H6 16 006 029H6 17 009 29 H6 13 01 029H6 11 006 029H6 16 008 029H6 17 010 029H6 13 01 029H614 002 029 H6 11 008 029H610 002 029H6 16 009 029H6 17 011 029H614 004 029H6 11 009 029H610 004 029H6 16 01 1 029H617 013 29H6 13 013 029H614 005 029H6 11 005 029H610 005 029H6 17 009 29 H6 13 00 029H614 007 029H6 11 006 029H610 007 029H617 010 029H6 13 010 0 029H615 005 029H611 008 029H611 005 029H617 011 29 H6 13 01 1 029H6 13 013 029 H6 11 009 029H615 006 029H6 17 013 029H6 11 006 MAIN SHELF CABINET The above diagram is a front view of five cabinets The center cabinet or main shelf cabinet houses the common cards The other four are independent cabinets To connect the expansion shelves in the main cabinet Find the expansion shelf in the diagram that corresponds to the one that you are installing The two numbers in the box are GDC cable numbers These are the cables that can reach from the main shelf to that expansion shelf Use the top number if the CIC you are connecting is on the right side of the main shelf as viewed
72. secondary card is in service In a non redundant configuration all com mon modules and expansion cards must be in the right hand slot of each pair of slots any com mon module or expansion cards in the left hand slot are removed from operation except the ESCC which is in the left hand slot Aggregate Control Card Removal of the Aggregate Control Module in a non redundant system or the redundant pair of modules in a redundant system stops data traffic on the associated aggregate trunk for that mod ule and on any channel that is routed through that aggregate trunk CDA Combined Digital Aggregate Module Removal of the CDA Module in a non redundant system or the redundant pair of modules in a redundant system stops data traffic through the associated DS1 ports for that module and on any channels routed through the DS1 ports to a TMS 3000 node or associated D4 device To remove the CDA Module first press the Dsbl disable switch on the front panel once All front panel LEDs should go off The module is now in a low power mode and may be removed from the shelf in the usual manner If the module is not removed pressing the Dsbl switch once more reactivates the module and the INIT LED lights ACM Removal of the ACM in a non redundant system or the redundant pair of modules in a redundant system stops data traffic through the associated ports for that module and on any channels routed through the ports to a TMS 3000 node DPBX or APBX
73. shelf mount ing cable and wire connections option selection and system timing were all discussed What s Next In the next chapter we cover procedures for installation and optioning of TMS common cards GDC 036R303 000 2 Common Card Installation Overview The flexibility of the TMS 3000 system provides many options for TMS 3000 modules By se lecting certain options the TMS 3000 can operate in many unique environments without needing extensive external interface equipment NOTE The TMS 3000 utilizes the following components in the main shelf Note that the terms Card and Module are commonly used and interchanged in the field and in this manual For example Redundancy Control Card and Redundancy Control Module refer to the same component ACC Aggregate Control Card ACM ADPCM Compression Module CDA Combined Digital Aggregate Module CIC Channel Interface Card DBC Digital Bridging Card ESCC Enterprise System Control Card IAC ISDN Aggregate Control Card RCC Redundancy Control Card TPP TMS Packet Processor The following sections provide part numbers and describe the methods of option selection and the options provided for each TMS 3000 common card Detailed information about specific settings of option devices is given in a number of tables in this chapter Option tables for each module are grouped with the drawings pertaining to that specific module A TMS 3000 system is shipped from GDC with
74. shown in these directions and follow upper lower case spelling exactly Ev erything that you must type in at the keyboard is in boldface type 9 L Before you begin these procedures check the Caps Lock indicator on your NOTE keyboard Ifilluminated press the Caps Lock key until the indicator turns off Do not attempt to log in to XENIX with the Caps Lock key set Follow these instructions to load GTS software At the prompt 1 Type shutdown 0 and press Enter The system shuts down When the shutdown is fin ished the reboot prompt appears Press any key to reboot 2 Press Enter The screen displays XENIX System V Boot 3 Press Enter The screen displays hd 40 xenix 4 the Ctrl and D keys simultaneously Enter the date by year month and day yy mm dd The date and time prompt appears Enterthe time in the 24 hour military format hh mm Press Enter The login prompt appears xenix386 login 5 root and press Enter The password prompt appears Password 6 Enter the super user password The super user prompt appears Insert Basic Setup floppy disk of the TMS 3000 software set into the disk drive slot Type fsck n dev fd0135ds18 if using 3 5 inch drive 0 and press Enter GDC 036R303 000 5 34 etc mount if using 3 5 inch drive 0 F and press Enter System Initialization When the superuser prompt appears again type
75. sided 1 44 Mb 3 5 inch floppy drive XENIX Operating System floppy disks version 2 3 4 Software serial number supplied with the XENIX disks Software activation key supplied with the XENIX disks To install the Informix data base you need the hardware listed above with the XENIX operating system loaded plus the Informix Runtime diskette Informix serial number and Activation Key Setup procedures are given for the Pentium 100 Pentium 90 Intel 486 66 Zenith 386 Zenith 486SX 25MHz Zenith 486DX 33MHz Zenith 433Dh 33MHz PCs and Zenith 486DX Z Select 100 Use the procedure that is appropriate for your PC Using Large Hard Drives SCO XENIX cannot recognize hard drives that are larger than 1023 cylinders or 16 heads To use PCs with these larger drives you must reconfigure the hard drive parameters in your CMOS or ROM setup utility to use 1023 cylinders or less Unfortunately doing so renders otherwise usable disk space unusable On the Intel Pentium 100 the setup we recommend is as follows 1022 cylinders 16 heads 63 sectors Using Other PCs Not Listed Here Because of the extremely large variety of PCs on the market GDC cannot possibly test all PC configurations for XENIX compatibility If you wish to use other PCs you should be aware that they may or may not work with SCO XENIX SCO has attempted to test as many PC makes models and hardware configurations as possible There are many models that work but some do not
76. that mates with pins on the ACC An optional connector XP2 mates with a later version of the ACC GDC 036P313 003 Line up the pins and gently press the G 704 Aggregate Interface Piggyback onto the ACC Using Switches S1 and S2 on the G 704 Aggregate Interface Piggyback Card CRC4 multiframe time Slot 16 synchronous plesiochronous clocking mode and the elastic buffers may be selected in addition to the Transmit Receive impedance at the aggregate and the line balance See Figure 2 9 Table 2 14 defines the option selections and describes the application of each Table 2 15 shows the buffer size delay time of the plesiochronous buffers The ITU T requires a provision be made to optionally ground the outer conductor of a coaxial cable unbalanced when used with the G 704 interface Either end of the cable transmit or re ceive may require grounding Grounding of the aggregate signal DATA B on the G 704 Aggre gate Interface Piggyback is performed as follows Receive End The grounding of signal RCVDATB is achieved by moving DIP Switch S2 8 on the G 704 Aggregate Interface Piggyback card to the UNB or closed ON position This connects RCVDATB to Signal Ground Transmit End The grounding of signal XMTDA TB is achieved by soldering a zero ohm resistor or a simple wire link to future use resistor R11 F U R11 located on the right hand side of connector XP1 See Figure 2 9 This connects XMTDATB to Signal Ground GDC 036R303 00
77. the channel card In Svce LED Green LED lights when card is in service Figure 4 7 Channel Interface Card Digital Bridging Card Front Panel GDC 036R303 000 4 18 Operation id STATUS Init O Stan MajorO MinorO In Svce LED In redundant systems this green LED lights on the Expansion module that m currently in operation In non redundant systems this LED should always b LOOPBACK lit Intl O Local CHANNEL INTFC Figure 4 8 Expansion II Module Front Panel GDC 036R303 000 Operation Name Part Description In LED Amber LED lights when transmit data into a channel is a space Out LED Amber LED lights when receive data out of the channel is a space In Svce LED Green LED lights when the channel is entered in the currently active TMS configuration This indicates that the card is either operating or prepared to operate according to the parameters entered for that channel in the active con figuration Chan LED Red LED lights when an alarm condition exists in the channel Alarm de Alm scriptions are in GDC 036R603 Vnnn In Test Test point for transmit data into the channel Test point isolated through a Point 10K ohm resistor Out Test Test point for receive data out of the channel Test point isolated through a Point 10K ohm resistor Int Test Test point for internal clock used to process and transfer data between the Point channel card an
78. the following appears Press the Ctrl key and the D key simultaneously to proceed with normal startup Enter The message not installed in your PC you see the following Check switch settings System Initialization 5 35 16 17 The Controller should now initialize Press F4 to reach the Network Access menu Move the cursor to Access Disk Based Manual and press Enter If you are not familiar with using the disk based manual refer to the Preface in GDC 036R603 Vnnn Installing INFORMIX in a Controller Containing a Previous Version If TMS software is already installed perform the following steps 1 2 3 Select Controller Maintenance from the TMS main menu Next select Shutdown Disable AutoLogin Answer y to the question about shutting down to reinstall TMS If you want to restore the Auto Login function you have to do the mninstall procedure again Reboot the controller Login as root If TMS software is not installed you should login as root Use the following procedure to install informix on the hard disk Type the commands shown in boldface and press Enter 1 2 Enter the following at the prompt rm r usr informix At the next prompt enter rmuser Z 9 XENIX may prompt you to manually delete some mail files etc NOTE The following prompt appears Press Enter when you are ready Press Enter The following prompt appears Enter login name Type in
79. the phone line at the remote end The output of the phone line connects into the remote external modem 2 Utilizing GDC 028H502 XXxX connect one end to the output of the external modem Con nect the other side to J42 on the rear of the Main Shelf Backplane 3 Using the main menu and node configuration screens of the Controller proceed to initiate Dial Backup GDC 036R303 000 1 12 Shelf Installation Supervisory Pass Through Installation Using GDC 028H303 025 or 028H320 connect the Controller output Port 1 to connector J20 TMS Controller Input on the TMS 3000 Backplane of the node at the local site Next using GDC 028H502 XXX connect the output connector J42 of this node to J20 of the next node at the site See Figure 1 8 The supervisory route continues using the same GDC Cables until the desired number of nodes at the site are connected Utilizing the configuration screens of the Main Controller software establishes the supervisory data communication path to each node at the site Nodes at the Local Site 027H303 XXX or 028H320 XXX J20 TMS 3000 TMS 3000 Controller Supervisory Pass 028H502 XXX Through connects zu through the RCC RCC TMS 3000 028H502 XXX RCC TMS 3000 028H502 XXX Figure 1 8 Supervisory Pass Through Installation GDC 036R303 000 Shelf Installation 1 13 Summary In this chapter we provided procedures for installation of the TMS 3000 Unpacking
80. this technique on the DSO frame format 51 3 Off Selects ESF Fram Two methods of framing existin a DS1 data stream ESF DA ing A D4 frame consists of twelve 193 bit frames called a Superframe An ESF retains the structure of D4 Selects D4 Frami but consists of twenty four 193 bit frames instead of framing 12 ESF is known as Extended Superframe 51 5 LEN2 S1 5 81 6 51 7 Selects line length Clock and data extraction are improved by cable S1 6 LENI On Off Off 0 220 ft length transmit equalization This feature allows line lengths of up to 655 feet to be used without the 91 7 EEN On 2204401 customary line build out networks With line trans On Off On 440 655 ft mit equalization the pulse shape and amplitude at On Off Off 0 133 ft properly terminated receiving equipment conforms Off On On 266 399 ft to AT amp T standards The line length selections sup f port a three partition arrangement for MAT and off On Off 399 533 ft ICOT and a five partition arrangement for ABAM Off Off 533 655 ft PULP and PIC cables Configure S1 5 6 7 to the Off Off Off G 704 G 732 proper length and cable type On On On 2 048 MHz CEPT Bit 7 substitution is not used Switch S1 2 should always be in the ON position NOTE S1 8 is not used and should remain in the OFF position GDC 036R303 000 2 36 Common Card Installation ACM Interface Cable Connections The ACM has one Input Output Card This card
81. to 1 5 dB of compensation available in 0 5 dB steps 23 dBrnc0 maximum 60 dB minimum 0 dB Channel Gain 48 dB minimum 23 dB Channel Gain 25 dBm0 maximum 2nd order 40 dBm0 max 3rd order 36 dBm0 GDC 036R303 000 B 4 Technical Characteristics Table B 1 Technical Characteristics Cont Item Specifications Voice II CVSD Channel Cont Dynamic Range 3 to 50 dBm0 Level Stability 0 25 dB Channel Gain at 1004 Hz 0 0 5 dB or 23 0 5 dB Nominal gain Trim Signal to Quantizing Noise 1004 Hz Test Tone At 39 dBm0 Signal Level 19 dB S N At 27 dBm0 Signal Level 25 dB S N At 18 to 3 dBm0 Signal 26 dB S N Level Frequency Response 1 5 dB to 1 dB Relative to 1004 Hz 400 to 3200 Hz Envelope Delay 300 to 500 Hz 700 us 500 to 2400 Hz 300 us 800 to 2400 Hz 100 us 2400 to 2900 Hz 300 us 2900 to 3400 Hz 700 us E and M signaling states E lead relay Open idle Closed busy M lead detector Compatible with Types 1 5 signaling interface M lead input impedance 10 kilohms minimum diode protected M lead sensitivity 1 mA maximum E Lead Relay Contact Ratings Maximum Current 0 25 A Maximum Voltage 100 volts Minimum Resistance 100 milliohms Voice II ASP Channel Module 4 Wire Interface Impedance 600 ohms resistive 10 Return Loss 20 dB minimum 300 to 3400 Hz Longitudinal Balance 56 dB minimum 300 to 3400 Hz Usable Bandwidth 300 to 3400 Hz ASP Mode 300 to 3400 Hz PCM Mo
82. types and service interruption requirements Voice encoding options unique to each type of Universal Voice Card are selected using Switch S1 on the card See Figure 3 17 Table 3 49 defines the switch positions the corresponding part number of the Universal Voice Card and the application of each voice type Option selections for input and output levels signaling types and service interruption requirements are common for all versions of the card and are selected using Switch S2 and Headers X1 through X12 See Figure 3 17 and Table 3 50 through Table 3 54 PCM Voice Encoding Universal Voice Card P N 036P265 002 is used for PCM voice encoding This card furnishes PCM voice encoding at a synchronous data rate of 64 Kbps Either U S or U K signaling types can be accommodated PCM voice encoding with either 2 kHz or 800 Hz may be selected See Table 3 49 GDC 036R303 000 3 42 Channel Card Installation ADPCM Voice Encoding Universal Voice Card P N 036P265 003 is used for ADPCM voice encoding The ADPCM option provides ADPCM voice encoding with 800 Hz overhead and software controlled variable synchronous data rates of 32 Kbps 24 Kbps or 16 Kbps with PCM T 64 Kbps fallback mode See Table 3 49 Input and Output Signal Level Option Selections The PCM and ADPCM versions of the Universal Voice Card accept nominal input levels of 16 dBm and 0 dBm and provide nominal output levels of 0 dBm and 7 dBm You can choose nominal in
83. unbalanced external clocking source Table 1 2 provides pin functions and technical specifications for connector J18 Figure 1 5 illus trates the J18 connector pins as viewed from the TMS 3000 rear backplane The TMS 3000 node also outputs an external timing source for transfer of timing This output is a balanced RS 422 interface clock signal at the rate of 512 KHz and is phase locked with the node reference clock Table 1 2 External Clock Input J18 Function Pin No Function Unbalanced Clock Balanced Clock Protective Ground Signal Ground Cable shield 2 External Timing Input A Clock input Clock A input 3 External Timing Input B No connection Clock B input 4 7 Not used Not used 8 External Timing Output B 512 KHz Clock Output B 9 External Timing Output A 512 KHz Clock Output A See Table 2 5 for ESCC option settings for balanced and unbalanced interfaces EXT TMG External timing Output A 9 O4 External timing Output B 80 Os ining 70 32 External timing Input B 6 O Protective ground Figure 1 5 External Clock Connector 718 TMS 3000 Rear Backplane View Alarm Relay Connections The RCC Redundancy Control Card in the TMS 3000 contains two relays one for major alarms and one for minor alarms that allow connections to activate external equipment The alarm relays are deenergized during normal operation and provide two sets ea
84. 0 Channel Card Installation 3 37 Table 3 41 E And M Signaling Option Selections EAM 1 Board Berg Jumper Berg Jumper Positions Signaling States Positions Signaling Type X4 X3 X5 IDLE BUSY X2 X6 X10 1 GND M GND 0 V dc 12 to 48 V dc US 2 GND M BATT OPEN 12 to 48 V dc US 3 GND M BATT 0 V dc 12 to 48 V dc U S 4 M BATT GND OPEN 0 V dc U S 5 M BATT GND OPEN 0 V dc U S 2 M INT INT OPEN 0 V dc U S U K M INT INT GND OPEN 0 V dc U K For back to back signaling with no external battery Application X2 X5 and X10 select the proper interface for different E and M signaling types The jumper positions selected depend entirely on the E and M signaling type used by the voice equipment connected to the Voice II PCM or Voice H ADPCM module For SSDCS5 signaling two jumper plugs are required on X5 in both the INT and GND positions P 1 OOOOOOOO 1 O N Note X2 through X10 jumper options are identified on the solder side p the an O o z ASna ASna adi ASna QNO LNI eE sn AN Note The card is configured for U S operation Figure 3 15 E and M Signaling Piggyback Card EAM 1 Option Locations GDC 036R303 000 3 38 Channel Card Installation Table 3 42 Idle Busy E Lead Option Selection EAM 1 Board Jumper Selection Application X7 BUSY When
85. 0 2 22 Common Card Installation Note that on the aggregate 25 pin D Connectors J1 and J16 on the back of the main shelf the grounded signals appear on the following connector pins RCVDATAB Pin 16 and XMTDATB Pin 14 Do not ground both ends of the same cable lt N ON 12 3 4 5 6 Aw F U R11 Figure 2 9 704 Aggregate Interface Piggyback Card GDC 036R303 000 Common Card Installation 2 23 Table 2 14 704 Aggregate Interface Piggyback Card Option Selections Switch No Desig Position Function Application 51 1 1 On Value of Switch S1 1 through S1 5 define the value of N in N x 64 Add the values of the five switches together for Off No value the value of N The switch setting affects the elastic buffer size for the synchronous buffer mode only S1 2 2 On Value of 2 Off No value S1 3 4 On Value of 4 Off No value 51 4 8 Value of 8 Off No value 51 5 16 On Value of 16 Off No value 51 6 Off Not used Leave Switches 5 1 6 through 8 in the Off position through S1 8 952 1 DIS On CRC4 multiframe CRC4 multiframe is not used disabled CRC Off CRC4 multiframe The CRC4 multiframe mode is enabled enabled S2 2 D16 On D16 Time slot Time Slot 16 carri
86. 0 A TID III Control Status screen is provided in software and is comparable to existing channel screens For more information on configuring the TID III Data Channel Module applications modes refer to the Operation Manual for TMS 3000 Controller GDC 036R603 Vnnn By properly configuring the program settings the TID III Data Channel Module is set up for the desired operating mode isochronous channel input rate and a corresponding TDM synchronous clock rate For the RS 422 423 channel adapters DTE DCE component board designations always refer to the equipment to which the adapter is connected If you are NOTE connecting data terminal equipment CRTs printers etc to the adapter place switches and program plugs in the DTE position If you are connecting data communication equipment modems multiplexers etc to the adapter place switches and program plugs in the DCE position For operation in Modes 1 through 4 Jumper E1 E2 on the receiver board is installed This jumper provides automatic module reset for conditions of FIFO buffer overflow underflow This jumper is not installed for operation in Mode 5 the automatic tracking mode On the receiver board a jumper is configured between E3 and E5 normal In this position the transmit clock is derived from encoded information in the data received from a remote TDM GDC 036R303 000 Channel Card Installation 3 21 If the jumper is configured between E3 and E4 optiona
87. 0 249 on the maintenance console VEQ or VCH screens The code digits correspond to ten special rates as follows 240 Special Channel Rate 1 241 Special Channel Rate 2 242 Special Channel Rate 3 243 Special Channel Rate 4 244 Special Channel Rate 5 245 Special Channel Rate 6 246 Special Channel Rate 7 247 Special Channel Rate 8 248 Special Channel Rate 9 249 Special Channel Rate 10 Special Channel Rates 1 through 10 may refer to any of the special channel rates listed in Table 1 4 in Chapter 1 of this manual Tx Clk indicates the source of the transmit clock for this slot I internal E external Ext Clk indicates the source of the external clock for this slot A indicates that the aggregate clock is used for timing R indicates that the timing signal is to be derived from the aggregate receive data or the aggregate receive clock T1 D4 NTT indicates that a T1 D4 or NTT interface is used Y appears if this type of interface is used for this slot N appears if this type of interface is not used for this slot Red indicates whether or not this system is redundant Y indicates a redundant system N in dicates a nonredundant 64 system 1 s Den indicates whether or not one s density is used Y indicates that it is used N indicates that it is not used Adr indicates the node address to which this aggregate is connected The Adr column gives the address of the remote connected node if the module is an Aggrega
88. 0 66 Channel AD PCM 64800 67 Channel PCM Note that special rates entered from the Controller appear as rates 240 249 on the maintenance console VEQ or VCH screens GDC 036R303 000 TMS 3000 Maintenance Console Table C 2 Aggregate Channel Rate Code Digits Cont Rate Number to Enter Usage 1056000 68 Not Used 2112000 69 Not Used 3168000 70 Not Used 4224000 71 Not Used 5280000 72 Not Used 6336000 73 Not Used 7392000 74 Not Used 3152000 75 Not Used 6312000 76 Not Used 921600 71 Aggregate Channel 896000 78 Aggregate Channel 448000 79 Aggregate Channel 307200 80 Aggregate Channel 2034000 81 Not Used 8448000 82 Not Used 394000 83 Channel 1344000 84 Aggregate 1472000 85 Aggregate 1528000 86 Aggregate 1536000 87 Aggregate 422 10400 88 Tor Channel Rate 32800 89 ADPCM2 Channel Rate 50 90 Channel 39000 91 Channel 40800 92 Channel 168000 93 Aggregate 338000 94 Channel 1536000 95 Aggregate NTT 8800 96 Tor Channel Rate 10000 97 ASP Channel Rate 11000 98 ASP Channel Rate 12000 99 ASP Channel Rate T1 D4 E only Note that special rates entered from the Controller appear as rates 240 249 on the maintenance console VEQ or VCH screens GDC 036R303 000 TMS 3000 Maintenance Console C 9 Table C 2 Aggregate Channel Rate Code Digits Cont Rate Number to Enter Usage 12800 100 ASP Channel Rate 15000 101 ASP Channel Rate 16800 102 ASP Channel Rate 32800 1
89. 000 Common Card Installation 2 25 Table 2 16 Module 036M309 003 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No 036P309 001 PCB Assembly Base Card PCB Assembly I O Piggyback T1 036P310 001 PCB Assembly Micro Piggyback 036P316 001 PCB Assembly I O Piggyback G 732 CEPT 2 048 MHz 036P282 001 Table 2 17 Module 036M328 002 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No PCB Assembly Base Card 036P309 001 PCB Assembly Micro Piggyback 036P316 001 PCB Assembly I O Piggyback G 732 CEPT 036P282 001 2 048 MHz Qty 2 CDA Option Selections The CDA base card contains a hardware jumper X15 for redundancy This jumper should be setto RED when using a redundant CDA pair or when using a non redundant 256 CDA It should be set to NRED when using a non redundant 128 CDA Note that when using a non redundant 256 CDA its paired slot must be empty The CDA base card also contains Switch S2 which is a factory adjustment switch Use of this switch may cause erroneous data transfers or complete node failure Switch S2 should never be changed in the field It controls a critical factory adjustment option which is set only when the PCB assembly is installed ina specialized test fixture at the factory The purpose of Switch S2 is to fine tune the turn on and turn off times of the fast bus circuit Improper adjustment of this switch can cause e
90. 03 ADPCM Channel Rate 24800 104 ADPCM Channel Rate 32800 105 ADPCM Channel Rate 32800 106 ADPCM Channel Rate 320K 107 Aggregate Channel 640K 108 Aggregate Channel 704K 109 Aggregate Channel 832K 110 Aggregate Channel 960K 111 Aggregate Channel 1 088M 112 Aggregate Channel 1 216M 113 Aggregate Channel 1 280M 114 Aggregate Channel 1 408M 115 Aggregate Channel 1 600M 116 Aggregate Channel 1 664M 117 Aggregate Channel 1 728M 118 Aggregate Channel 1 792M 119 Aggregate Channel 1 856M 120 Aggregate Channel 1 920M 121 Aggregate Channel 1 984M 122 Aggregate Channel 280K 124 Aggregate Channel 336K 125 Aggregate Channel 504K 126 Aggregate Channel 560K 127 Aggregate Channel 616K 128 Aggregate Channel 672K 129 Aggregate Channel 728K 130 Aggregate Channel 784K 131 Aggregate Channel 840K 132 Aggregate Channel 952K 133 Aggregate Channel 1 008M 134 Aggregate Channel Note that special rates entered from the Controller appear as rates 240 249 on the maintenance console VEQ or VCH screens GDC 036R303 000 C 10 TMS 3000 Maintenance Console Table C 2 Aggregate Channel Rate Code Digits Cont Rate Number to Enter Usage 1 064M 135 Aggregate Channel 1 120M 136 Aggregate Channel 1 176M 137 Aggregate Channel 1 232M 138 Aggregate Channel 1 288M 139 Aggregate Channel 392K 140 Aggregate Channel 328K 141 Aggregate Channel 25 123 Not Used 7 600M 142 Not Used Note that special rates entered from the Controller appear as rates 24
91. 12 1 2 Options Select4Add a supported product At the prompt Insert distribution volume 1 and press Enter Press Enter Select Install one or more packages At the prompt Insert SCO TCP IP disk 1 of 3 and press Enter Press Enter Select Install one or more packages Press Enter At the prompt Enter packages to install type tcprt andpress Enter Follow the prompts to insert and load all three disks At the end of the three disk installation you see the message SCO TCP IP Runtime System initialization Enter your serial number Enter your serial number found on your SCO PRODUCT ACTIVATION KEY CARD Please remember that this serial number is case sensitive you must type it exactly as shown At the prompt Enter your activation key Enter your activation key found on your SCO PRODUCT ACTIVATION KEY CARD You see the message Updating system configuration You are asked Do you wish to relink the Kernel now Type n andpress Enter After the Main Menu appears you are prompted Select an option or enter q to quit Type q andpress Enter Ethernet Device Configuration Type cd usr sys conf andpress Enter Type mv e503 inet 3comB and press Enter GDC 036R303 000 Options 9o OV SON ON 10 A 11 Type cat link xenix sed e503 d gt link xenix new and press Enter Type cp link xenix link xenix save and press Enter Type cp link xenix new
92. 14 UDC Module with RS 422 Interface 056M078 002 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Interface Set RCV XMT RS 422 Data IV Channel PCB Assembly 036M047 002 036P236 007 Table 3 15 UDC Module with RS 423 Interface 036M078 003 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Interface Set RCV XMT RS 423 Data IV Channel PCB Assembly 036M047 003 036P236 007 Table 3 16 UDC Module with V 35 Interface 036M078 004 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Interface Set RCV XMT EIA TIA 232 E Data IV Channel PCB Assembly 036M047 004 036P236 007 Table 3 17 UDC Module with X 21 X 27 Interface 036M078 007 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Interface Set XMT RCV 422 Data Sync Channel PCB Assembly 036M047 002 036P236 010 Conn Program Plug 209 014 116 Table 3 18 TID III Data Channel 18607 201 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No TID III TID III 18607 201 Transmitter Card TX 18601 201 Receiver Card RX 18602 200 NCO Card NCO 18603 200 GDC 036R303 000 3 4 Channel Card Installation Table 3 19 Channel Interface Cables GDC Cable No Description Application 028H502 EIA TIA 232 E Used for all standard EIA TIA 232 E applications Avail able in 5 15 25 50 foot lengths 027H408 RS 422 423 Cascade Used to casca
93. 24 5 6 J25 J26 7 8 J27 J28 9 10 J33 J34 11 12 J35 J36 13 14 J37 J38 15 16 J39 J40 GDC 036R303 000 2 40 Common Card Installation Table 2 28 lists the Channel Interface Ribbon Cables In Table 2 28 the first 16 cables dress to the right for the connectors to the right of the center of the backplane The second group of cables dress to the left for connectors to the left of the center of the backplane Figure 2 19 shows the correct cable numbers and cable configuration Table 2 28 GDC Cable No CIC Expansion Ribbon Cabling Description 029H610 002 029H6 10 004 029H610 005 029H610 007 029H61 1 005 029H61 1 006 029H611 008 029H611 009 029H612 006 029H612 008 029H612 009 029H612 011 029H613 009 029H613 010 029H613 011 029H613 013 Cables Dressing to the Right Rear View Main Harness to Expansion Shelf length 2 5 ft Cable 029H610 002 with 1 5 ft extension reaching an additional shelf Cable 029H610 004 with 1 5 ft extension reaching an additional shelf Cable 029H610 005 with 1 5 ft extension reaching an additional shelf Main Harness to Expansion Shelf length 5 ft Cable 029H611 005 with 2 5 ft extension reaching an additional shelf Cable 029H611 006 with 1 5 ft extension reaching an additional shelf Cable 029H611 008 with 1 5 ft extension reaching an additional shelf Main Harness to expansion Shelf length 6 5 ft Cable 029H611 006 with 1 5 ft extension reaching an additional shelf Cable 029H612 008
94. 3 4 Interface Set RCV XMT EIA TIA 232 E 036M047 001 3 8 Interface Set RCV XMT RS 422 036M047 002 3 8 Interface Set RCV XMT RS 423 036M047 003 3 8 Interface Set RCV XMT V 35 036M047 004 3 8 ITU T G 703 2 048 Mbps Interface To Aggregate Line Transceiver 25 Pin Connector Pin Assignments 8 3 ITU T G 703 256 Kbps Interface To Aggregate Line Transceiver 25 Pin Connector Pin Assignments 8 2 ITU T G 703 64 Kbps Codirectional Interface To Aggregate Line Transceiver 25 Pin Connector Pin Assignments 8 2 ITU T G 703 64 Kbps Contradirectional Interface To Aggregate Line Transceiver 25 Pin Connector Pin Assignments 8 3 ITU T V 35 Interface To Aggregate Line Transceiver 25 Pin Connector Pin Assignments 8 4 Jumper Plugs 2 3 Limited Range Entry 4 11 Loading Ethernet Software A 8 Loading GTS Software 5 33 A 8 Loading Informix Software 5 30 Loading SCO Streams A 8 Loading TCP IP A 9 Main Shelf Backplane 50 Pin Ribbon Cable Connectors Rear View 2 39 Main Shelf Slot Locations 2 8 Maintenance Console 5 36 7 4 C 1 Maintenance 7 1 Mastership Switchover 6 3 MEGAVIEW A 4 MFP C 13 M Lead Signaling Interfaces 4 Sheets 3 30 3 33 MNT C 11 Module Installation 7 4 Module Locations 1 3 Module Removal 7 4 Module Replacement 7 1 Moving a Controller from one Node to Another 6 5 Multiport I O Card 4 12 Network Restoral 6 4 Network Separation 6 4 Network Startup Procedure 6 3
95. 36R603 xxx series of manuals is now in Chapter 5 of this manual This manual has eight chapters and five appendices The information is arranged as follows Chapter I Shelf Installation contains diagrams and procedures for unpacking shelf mounting cable and wire connections of the TMS 3000 Chapter 2 Common Card Installation contains installation and optioning procedures for common cards of the TMS 3000 Chapter 3 Channel Card Installation describes the installation and optioning procedures for the channel modules of the TMS 3000 Chapter 4 Operation describes the function keys screen format and general operating procedures for the TMS 3000 It also describes the function of indicators and test points on each TMS module Chapter 5 System Initialization describes how to check out the TMS Controller hardware using the built in ROM monitor program It also describes initial installation and setup of SCO XENIX INFORMIX and GTS software on various PC platforms Chapter 6 Redundant Controllers describes the TMS 3000 multi controller network environment including configuration startup and maintenance procedures Chapter 7 Maintenance includes routine maintenance corrective maintenance and troubleshooting procedures for the TMS 3000 It also lists telephone numbers and addresses for technical assistance world wide Chapter 8 Connector Pin Assignments contains tables that list pin assignments for various system connectors
96. 3ComB 3c503 Etherlink II card Etherlink III cards are not supported by SCO SCO Xenix Operating System Disks serial numbers and activation keys To load any Ethernet software first load the LINK package supplied in the SCO XENIX Op erating System The LINK package installs certain directories and files needed to relink the kernel the execut able part of the Operating system Log in as root At the prompt type custom and press Enter Select 1 Operating System and press Enter Select 1 Select one or more packages and press Enter At the prompt Enter the package s to install or enter q to return to the menu typelink and press Enter Follow the prompts to insert the needed Operating System disks and to enter the link kit serial number and activation key which are the same numbers that were supplied with the Operating System disks When the main menu appears type 6 Select a new set to customize Loading GTS Unless previously loaded load the GTS software Refer to Chapter 5 Loading SCO STREAMS Install the first software package that allows Ethernet access from your TMS Controller l 2 3 Insert disk 1 of the STREAMS runtime set into the boot drive Select 4 Add a supported product and press Enter At the prompt GDC 036R303 000 Options A 9 Insert distribution disk number volume 1 and press Enter Press Enter 4 Select 1 Install one or more packages and press Enter
97. 4 Dis abled CAS Signaling TS16 En abled CRC 4 Enabled CAS Signaling TS16 Off Off Disabled CRC 4 Enabled NOTE Switches S1 3 and 5 1 4 remain in the OFF position GDC 036R303 000 Common Card Installation 2 31 X1 m XP2 e HHH N ON 1 2 3 4 MA X2 LO Y i S E GND OPEN X3 LO ooo eM X4 x9 9 XP3 XP1 00000000000000000000000000 Figure 2 13 CDA E1 I O Plug In Card Option Locations ADPCM Compression Module ACM Insert the ACM into the shelf by pressing it in firmly To remove the ACM first press the Dsbl disable switch on the front panel once All front panel LEDs should go off The module is now disabled and may be removed from the shelf in the usual manner If the module is not removed pressing the Dsbl switch once more resets the module When the ACM is plugged in it performs a reset Part Numbers This section provides information to be used to procure replacement assemblies and pc boards Tables 2 22 and 2 23 break down assemblies into sub assemblies that form the component GDC 036R303 000 2 32 Common Card Installation Table 2 22 1 Module 036M335 002 Eq
98. 5 At the prompt Enter packages to install type runtime andpress Enter 6 At the prompt Insert disk 1 of the STREAMS runtime into the boot drive and press Enter Press Enter 7 Youare prompted to enter your serial number and activation key These are on the SCO Product Activation Key Card that came with the STREAMS software package SCO STREAMS Runtime Serialization Enter your serial number Enter your serial number from your Product Activation Key Card Enter your activation key Enter your activation key from your Product Activation Key Card If they were entered correctly you see Installing STREAMS module The STREAMS kernel parameters are reset to the following values You are given the parameters and their values 8 You see the message You must create a new kernel to use the STREAMS module Do you wish to create a new Kernel now Type n and press Enter 9 You see the message The streams module you installed will not be functional until the kernel is re linked and installed Do you wish to create a new kernel now y n q Type n and press Enter 10 You see the message Checking file permissions Loading TCP IP At this point you load the SCO TCP IP software release 1 Remove STREAMS disks 1 of 1 and insert SCO TCP IP Runtime system disk 1 of 3 2 Atthe main menu Select a new set to customize GDC 036R303 000 A 10 10 11
99. 62 1299 Telephone 203 574 1118 Telex 7400905 Fax 203 758 9518 GDC 036R303 000 Maintenance 7 9 To return a unit for repair if so authorized by GDC use the return tag and address the package Product Repair Department General DataComm Inc 1579 Straits Turnpike P O Box 1299 Middlebury Connecticut 06762 1299 Lease and Maintenance contract customers may call General DataComm Service toll free at 1 800 243 1030 24 hours a day 7 days a week for trouble reporting or installation scheduling In stallations are normally scheduled between 8 a m and 5 p m Training Hands on training courses are available from General DataComm Service Educational Services inthe USA and in the UK Courses offered range from basic data communications modems and multiplexers to complex network systems and are given at our Connecticut facility or at your location For information call USA 203 574 1118 Ext 6190 UK 011 44 734 774 868 Summary This chapter covered routine and corrective maintenance for the TMS 3000 What s Next The next chapter provides card connector pin assignments GDC 036R303 000 8 Connector Pin Assignments Overview This chapter lists pin assignments for 25 pin aggregate and channel connectors It also lists the pin assignments for the 5 pin external timing connector the internal external modem connector the external alarm relay connector echo canceller piggyback card CDA module T1 D4 E Ag greg
100. 9 Data Channel Connector Pin Assignments Signal Signal Signal Unbalanced Balanced Signal Unbalanced Pin EIA TIA 232 E RS 422 ITU T Balanced RS 422 V 54 Using X 21 No RS 423 V 35 ITU T G 703 Adapter MM08 X 27 1 Chassis Ground Chassis Ground Chassis Ground Chassis Ground Chassis Chassis Ground Ground 2 Transmit Data Transmit Data A Transmit Data Data A Transmit Data SD A 3 Receive Data Receive Data Receive Data Receive Data A Receive Data RD A 4 Request To Send Request to Send Request to Send RTS RTSB Request to RTS A Send 5 Clear To Send Clear To Send Clear To Send CTS A CTS B RTS B 6 Ready Out Ready Out Ready Out Rdy A Rdy B Test Mode DCD B DSR DSR DSR 7 Signal Ground Signal Ground Signal Ground Signal Gnd Signal Ground Signal Ground 8 Carrier Detect Carrier Detect Carrier Detect DCD A DCD B Carrier De DCD A tect 10 Non Standard Transmit Receive Nonstandard con Xmt Data B Remote Loop ST B Control Signal Clock B trol signal back 11 Receive Ground External Transmit Xmt Clk B TT B Clock B 15 Transmit Receive Transmit Receive XmT Rx Clk A Transmit Re ST A 17 Clock Clock A ceive Clock 20 Ready In DTR Ready In DTR Ready In DTR Rdy A Rdy B Ready Out DTR 22 Ring Indicator Transmit Data Transmit Data Xmt Data B Local Loop SD B back 24 External Transmit External Transmit Xmt Clock A External TT
101. A Clock Clock A Transmit Clock 25 Busy Out Receive Data B Receive Data B Receive Data B RD B Control signals are unbalanced at ELA TIA 232 E voltage levels Pins 15 and 17 are tied together on backplane GDC 036R303 000 Connector Pin Assignments Table 8 10 Voice II CVSD And PCM Channel Connector Pin Assignments Pin Number Description 2 BATT 3 M Lead 4 Receive Tip RT 5 Receive Ring RR 7 Signal Ground 8 Station Ground 10 Transmit Ring TR 11 E Lead 15 Station Battery 24 E Lead 25 Transmit Tip TT The E lead is the same signal as the E lead and provides no additional functions The CVSD card had a type C relay driving the E Lead and so both NC and NO outputs were made available for customer use The UVC connected the E and E together Station Ground pin 8 is the SG lead which is paired with the E Lead Signal Ground is an internal mux ground and so is not normally used for signal ling due to the added noise which may then be injected Table 8 11 External Timing Connector J18 Pin Assignments Pin Number Description 1 Protected Ground 2 External Timing A In 3 External Timing B In 8 512 KHz Reference B Out 9 512 KHz Reference A Out Table 8 12 Phone Jack Internal Modem Connector Pin Assignments Pin Number Description 3 Tip 4 Ring Note that the internal modem is available only on earlier versions of the RCC GDC
102. A HEADER amp JUMPER FIGURE B DOUBLE POLE LATCH SLIDE SWITCH E j 34 FIGURE D VERTICAL OE RIGHT ANGLE SLIDE SWITCH FIGURE C INTERCHANGEABLE DIP SWITCHES Figure 2 1 Option Switches and Jumpers GDC 036R303 000 2 4 Common Card Installation Enterprise System Control Card This section covers ESCC options Associated tables and drawings provide detailed installation in formation ESCC Option Selection ESCC options are selected by varying the positions of option Switches S2 S3 and S4 that are lo cated on the ESCC printed circuit board assembly as illustrated in Figure 2 2 Use Tables 2 5 and 2 6 to determine how to select each option CO 8 9 9 CI st CO QN nnnnnnnm 879 S Ll ESCC PCB Assembly GDC 036P336 Figure2 2 Option Switch Locations GDC 036R303 000 Common Card Installation Table 2 5 ESCC Option Description Option Selection Switch Setting Description Node Address 1 thru 126 S2 1 thru See Ta Used to select the address for the node See Table 2 S2 7 ble 2 5 5 Node Type Compact 93 1 OFF Configures ESCC
103. AVIEW Interface is found in Appendix B Printer Options Controller software includes routines that print an entire network configuration IAR data Alarm Reports or individual screens These routines are described in GDC 036R603 Vnnn Chapter 41 TMS 3000 Front Panel Components The following pages describe the function of each indicator and test point on each TMS 3000 card Front panels are shown in Figures 4 4 through 4 20 GDC 036R303 000 4 14 Operation Name Part Description Init Status Red LED lights during the ESCC initialization sequence during initial LED ization the ESCC is not operational Stand By Status Green LED lights if the ESCC is the idle card of a redundant pair of ES LED CCs File State Status Yellow LED lights if the ESCC requires a download of its file system LED Flashes when a download of the ESCC file system occurs Major Alarm Red LED lights if the ESCC experiences a failure that affects its opera LED tion Also lights at power on reset but turns off after positive status and self tests are performed Enable Switch Permits installation and removal of the ESCC without disruption of the Disable TMS 3000 Before installing or removing the ESCC into or from a shelf place the switch in the Disable position After installation place the switch in the Enable position after the Init and Major LEDs are lit In Svce LED Green LED lights when the ESCC is operating Test Test Point Test po
104. Bourne Shell 2 rsh Restricted Shell 13 Enter 1 to select the Standard Bourne Shell Next the following prompt appears Enter Password 14 Enter at least 5 characters for the Informix password then press the Enter key You are asked Re enter for check 15 Enter the same characters you did in the previous step Press the Enter key again for com ments Now the selected information is displayed User name is informix user id is 201 Group name is informix group number is 51 Shell is sh Comment field is GDC 036R303 000 5 32 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 System Initialization The following prompt appears Do you want to change anything y n q CI Answer n and press Enter The following prompt appears Do you want to add another user y n q Answer n and press Enter At the prompt type in the following lines and press Enter after each line INFORMIXDIR usr informix PATH SPATH SINFORMIXDIR bin export INFORMIXDIR PATH cd SINFORMIXDIR If you are installing Informix Version 2 10 03K place the first informix runtime diskette of the set in the disk drive and type the following cpio icvdBum dev rfd0135ds18 for 3 5 inch floppies in drive 0 Press Enter After the files are loaded type the following installesqrf for Version 2 10 03K Informix Press Enter The following appears Press Enter
105. C CIC or TPP ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC CIC or TPP ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC CIC ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC CIC or TPP ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC CIC or TPP ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC CIC or TPP ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC or CIC ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC or CIC ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC or CIC ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC or CIC Cable Tray Expansion Shelf Channel and Sync Status Cards Expansion Shelf Expansion Shelf Expansion Shelf Blower Figure 1 2 TMS 3000 Module Locations GDC 036R303 000 1 4 Shelf Installation The EP 4 cabinet comes wired with a 20 ampere rated line cord and a twist lock NEMA L5 20P type plug This mates with a NEMA 20R type receptacle which must NOTE be available adjacent to the installation Provide the following vertical rack space for each TMS 3000 shelf component GPS 8A GPS 8B or DPS 8A 7 in 18 cm TMS 3000 shelf 14 in 36 cm 16 channel expansion shelf 7 in 18 cm 32 channel expansion shelf 14 in 36 cm Air must be forced through the rack A blower capable of moving 300 cfm cubic feet per minute must be installed at the bottom of the shelves Three exhaust fans capable of moving 100 cfm must be installed at the top of the cabinet Ideal external ambient temperature is between 77 and 93 F 25 and 30 C Operation between 32 and 124 F 0 and 50 C is allowable only when equipment is mounted in a GDC EP 2T EP 2M and EP 4 cabinets assuming proper airflow requir
106. C gt X Using the Custom Utility on Drives Other than the Boot Drive It is possible that your TCP software and STREAMS software is a different format 1 e 3 5 or 5 25 than the original disk type you used to load your SCO Xenix operating system A ways ensure that you order and use the same disk format as you used to originally load the operating system since loading is much less complex If this is not the case you must perform the following Substitute the command custom with custom m dev fd device ds sectors where device 0 or 1 device 0 is the boot floppy drive 1 is the second drive most likely 1 and sectors 9 320K 5 29 Qr A20K 3 5 15 12M 5 25 18 1 4M 3 5 It is possible that the two software packages STREAMS and TCP IP are on different disk for mats Ifthis is true prior to loading TCP IP quitthe custom routine by answering q to all questions and re running the custom routine by entering the command from above GDC 036R303 000 Options Loading Ethernet Software Be sure you have the following items before starting 1 3 4 3 SCO STREAMS Kit and multi user license for SCO XENIX V2 3 4 including serial num bers and activation keys SCO TCP IP Kit and multi user license for SCO XENIX V2 3 4 including serial numbers and activation keys IP address and node name This is provided by your Network Administrator A
107. CM in Slot N where N is odd has its ports at DB 25 connector N 1 When the slot is even the associated connector is N 1 An ACM EI Module is used on the ITU T network 2 048 Mbps Refer to the CDA E1 Module section to configure the ACM E1 I O card Configure most ACM options through the Controller software screens Refer to the Operation Manual for TMS 3000 Controller GDC 036R603 Vnnn for more information on ACM software options Jumper X3 is set on the base card for redundancy Select the option for redundant or non redundant operation on both ACM Modules Table 2 24 shows how to configure Jumper X3 on the ACM base card for redundant or non redundant operation Figure 2 14 shows the location of Jumper X3 Switch S2 on the ACM base card sets the Fast Bus Timing This switch is factory set and should not be adjusted GDC 036R303 000 Common Card Installation 2 33 Table 2 25 shows how to configure ACM T1 I O plug in card DIP Switch S1 The location of Sl on the ACM T1 I O plug in card is shown in Figure 2 15 Q n4 2 a n4 NOTE Jumper X12 and Switch S2 are factory set Do not change Figure 2 14 ACM Option Locations GDC 036R303 000 2 34 Common Card Installation O XP2 O ON 2 845678 tiyay XP3 XP1 Figure 2 15 1 I O Plug In Card Option Locations T
108. CO XENIX on an ESDI hard drive first initialize the hard drive with a low level format But you must not do this with a Zenith 486 or 433 or newer models See earlier descriptions for 486 and 433 The low level format may be accomplished with Zenith s DOS PREP or any other commercially available low level formatting software 9 If you are using an IBM PS 2 ensure that you have the correct version of SCO XENIX for the PS 2 SCO XENIX 386mc 2 3 4 NOTE If you are using an IBM Value Point you may need to order from GDC a special software pack age that includes a special N1 disk The IBM Value Point does not use the XENIX 386mc ver sion Newer versions ofthe Value Point may not need this special N1 disk If you are not sure of the requirements of your Value Point contact General DataComm Service 1 Insertthe BOOT N1 diskette into the top drive If you have more than one floppy drive use the primary drive sometimes called the boot drive Check your computer hardware manual if you are not sure which drive is the primary drive 2 Turn on your computer 3 The computer loads the XENIX bootstrap program from the diskette and executes it In the upper left corner of the screen the computer may display the total amount of memory in stalled Next you see XENIX System V Boot 4 Press Enter to boot from the floppy drive 5 You see this message 64 64 0 1
109. Channel Connection Cables 3 26 GDC 036R303 000 Voice II CVSD and ASP Channel Interface Connections 3 24 Voice II CVSD And PCM Channel Connector Pin Assignments 8 6 Voice II CVSD Channel E And M Signaling Option Selection 3 29 Voice II CVSD Channel E Lead Out Of Service Option Selection 3 34 Voice II CVSD Channel E Lead Relay State Option Selection 3 34 Voice II CVSD Channel Input Level Adjustment Option 3 29 Voice II CVSD Channel Module Option Locations 3 27 Voice II CVSD Channel Module Options 3 25 Voice H CVSD Channel Module Front Panel 4 23 Voice II CVSD Channel Option Selection 3 28 VPT C 11 What You Need 5 2 Z 486 System Board 5 13 Z649 Video Adapter Board 5 14 Zenith 386 Setup Configuration Program 5 11 Zenith 433Dh 33 MHz Setup Procedures 5 15 Zenith 486DX 66MHz Z Select 100 Setup Procedures 5 16 Zenith 486SX 25 MHz and 486DX 33 MHz Setup Procedures 5 12 idi General DataComm
110. Controller to the network On the master select the network populated in the previous step as the on line network and initiate Download as Required Z 9 Ensure that the PC contains all of the obj files which are selected in the Software Revision lists Obj files are those software files that are held on the TMS 3000 NOTE cards If this startup is for a new network you must first select obj files for the stored list and download it to the nodes in the network After all nodes have re ceived their obj files activate the stored revision list 5 Walt for the master to complete downloading of the network 6 Power on the subordinate controller and configure a dummy network of the same name as the on line network See Controller and Network Configuration earlier in this chapter for an explanation of a dummy network 7 Connect the subordinate controller to the network At the subordinate log on line to this dummy network This step is needed only if the logged on line network is a dummy net work 8 The master downloads its on line network configuration including IAR data to the subor dinate and maintain configuration data synchronization between the two thereafter Q I e In a network with multiple redundant controllers check for consistency between controllers when the network is separated by a failure then restored You do this NOTE by entering the Controller Status screen Mastership Switchover A primary user can reque
111. DATA B The B side of the receive data pair GDC 036R303 000 Connector Pin Assignments 8 3 Table 8 4 ITU T G 703 2 048 MBPS Interface To Aggregate Line Transceiver 25 Pin Connector Pin Assignments Pin No Signal Name Description 1 Gnd Chassis Ground 2 XMT DATA A The A side of the transmit data pair 3 RCV DATA A The A side of the receive data pair 14 XMT DATA B The B side of the transmit data pair 16 RCV DATA B The B side of the receive data pair Table 8 5 ITU T G 703 64 KBPS Contradirectional Interface To Aggregate Line Trans ceiver 25 Pin Connector Pin Assignments Pin No Signal Name Description 1 Gnd Chassis Ground 2 XMT DATA A The A side of the transmit data pair 3 RCV DATA The A side of the receive data pair 13 RCV CLK B Receive clock for B 14 XMT DATA B The B side of the transmit data pair 15 XMT CLK A Transmit clock for A 16 RCV DATA B The B side of the receive data pair 17 RCV CLK A Receive clock for A 19 XMT CLK B Transmit clock for B Table 8 6 ITU T V 35 Interface To Aggregate Line Transceiver 25 Pin Connector Pin Assignments Pin No Signal Name Description 1 Gnd Chassis Ground 2 XMT DATA A The A side of the transmit data pair 3 RCV DATA A The A side of the receive data pair 4 V 5V 12 EXT TIM B External transmit clock for B 13 RCV CLK B The receive clock for B 14 XMT DATA B The B si
112. DC 036R303 000 Channel Card Installation 3 45 Table 3 50 Universal Voice Card Input Output Level Option Selections Switch S2 Selection Switch S Feature dBm Desig Position Application Nominal Input 16 S2 1 ON The nominalinput level is determined by the nom Level 0 S2 1 OFF inal output level of the telephone equipment con nected to the channel If actual output levels of connected equipment vary from the nominal levels Switch S2 may be set to achieve an additional level of compensation Nominal Output 0 S2 3 OFF The nominal output level for the channel is either Level 7 S2 3 ON 0 dBm or 7 dBm This selection depends on the nominal input level specified for the telephone equipment connected to the channel Adjusting out put level to get more compensation is a software op tion Note Switch S2 is located on the Analog Universal Voice Card Table 3 51 Universal Voice Card Input Level Adjustment Options Switch S2 Input 52 5 52 6 52 7 52 8 Compensation Applications 1 dB 0 5 dB 2 dB 4 dB dB ON ON OFF OFF 1 5 Switches S2 5 through S2 8 se ON OFF OFF OFF 1 0 lect attenuation or amplification OFF ON OFF OFF 40 5 for the voice input level This compensates for cable losses or OFF OFF OFF OFF 0 improper output levels from ON ON ON OFF 0 5 connected telephone equipment ON OFF ON OFF ET The switch selects a level of compensation from 1 5 dB to
113. Data Channel Module 3 1 Automatic Tracking Mode Mode 5 3 18 Controls 3 10 Data Channel Module Options 3 8 Digital Line Driver Adapter 3 8 Hyper Plug In Card 3 21 Hyper Plug In Card Upgrade Kit 3 23 Interface Options 3 4 GDC 036R303 000 Installation Procedures 3 21 Part Numbers 3 21 Part Numbers 3 1 RS 422 423 Channel Adapter Options 3 17 TID I ECH 11 Emulation Mode Modes 4 3 18 TID II ECH 2 Emulation Mode Modes 1 3 3 18 Time Independent Data III Module Options 3 18 Configuration Requirements 3 19 TID III Module Setup 3 19 Data Channel Program Plug PP1 Positions DCE DTE 3 11 Data II Channel Module with EIA TIA 232 E Interface 036M048 001 3 1 Data II Channel Module with RS 422 Interface 036M048 002 3 1 Data II Channel Module with RS 423 Interfac 036M048 003 3 1 Data II Channel Module with V 35 Interface 036M048 004 3 2 Data II Channel Module Front Panel 4 19 Data III Channel Module with EIA TIA 232 E Interface 036M058 001 3 2 Data III Channel Module with RS 422 Interface 036M058 002 3 2 Data III Channel Module with RS 423 036M058 003 3 2 Data III Channel Module with V 35 Interface 036M058 004 3 2 Data III Channel Module Front Panel 4 20 Data IV Channel Module with EIA TIA 232 E Interface 036M079 001 3 2 Data IV Channel Module with RS 422 Interface 036M079 002 3 2 Data IV Channel Module with RS 423 036M079 003 3 3 Data IV Channel Module
114. E CARD X5 ON VOICE IIICVSD CHANNEL MODULE ON VOICE II PCM amp ADPCM CHANNEL MODULES X3 ON VOICE IWASP CHANNEL MODULE AND UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD X6 ON VOICE IIICVSD CHANNEL MODULE X5 ON VOICE II PCM amp ADPCM CHANNEL MODULES X2 X6 AND X10 ON EAM 1 PIGGYBACK BOARD IN U S POSITION A TYPE 1 NC N C X4 AND X9 ON UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD IN U S POSITION NOTE For interface the ground of the Signalling and the ground of the Trunk CKT must be referenced to the same place for reliable operation The GDC Type interface is correctly pictured as VOICE CHANNEL A TERMINATING EQUIPMENT P1 AKA M M LEAD SENSOR ISOLATED M LEAD B TYPE 2 AND UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD X4 ON VOICE IIICVSD CHANNEL MODULE X4 ON VOICE II PCM amp ADPCM CHANNEL MODULES X2 ON VOICE IWASP CHANNEL MODULE AND UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD X5 ON VOICE IIICVSD CHANNEL MODULE ON VOICE II PCM amp ADPCM CHANNEL MODULES X3 ON VOICE IWASP CHANNEL MODULE AND UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD X6 ON VOICE II CVSD CHANNEL MODULE X5 ON VOICE amp ADPCM CHANNEL MODULES X2 X6 AND X10 ON EAM 1 PIGGYBACK BOARD IN U S POSITION A X1 ON VOICE IWASP CHANNEL MODULE 12 TO 48 V Es BUSY lt IDLE d ional external signal for BATT may be common for multiple PCM cards and are not related to the Trunk CKT 48 Volts is not presently available in the TMS and so an external source is required X4 AND X9 ON U
115. E When the E Lead is used for signaling loss of TMS 3000 power X6 IDLE results in an IDLE E Lead X7 VE Jumpers X7 and X8 select polarity for the E Lead These jumper X8 VE positions or depend on the requirements of the interface Positive Polarity Normally the M Lead detector of the channel equipment will X7 VE provide only a negative voltage and requires a negative polar X8 VE ity E Lead setting But if the M Lead detector provides a posi Negative Polarity tive voltage the E Lead polarity should be set to positive NOTE Headers X5 X6 X7 and X8 are located on the Universal Voice Card Table 3 54 E Lead Service Interruption Options X10 X11 Application NORM NORM The E lead is forced to IDLE 0 5 seconds after a service interrup tion and reverts to BUSY after an additional 2 5 seconds NORM INH The E Lead is forced to BUSY 3 0 seconds after a service interrup tion INH NORM The E Lead is forced to IDLE 0 5 seconds after a service interrup tion INH INH The E Lead is not affected by a service interruption NOTE Headers X10 and X11 are located on the Universal Voice Card GDC 036R303 000 Channel Card Installation 3 47 Echo Canceller Card The Echo Canceller Piggyback Card is a double sided printed circuit card assembly with physical dimensions of 4 4 inches by 3 95 inches It mounts on the Universal Voice Card and is supported by four standoffs Electri
116. Figure 2 24 two ribbon cables connect from the main shelf to the first expansion shelf of the Flex Cards The numbers that follow below each successive expansion shelf show the flex card numbers necessary to attach additional shelves Table 2 31 Channel Interface Module Expansion Ribbon Cabling For TMS 3000 Using Flex Card Assemblies GDC Cable No Description Cables Dressing to the Right Rear View 029H610 002 Main Harness to Expansion Shelf length 25 ft 029H611 005 Main Harness to Expansion Shelf length 5 ft 029H612 006 Main Harness to Expansion Shelf length 6 5 ft 029H613 009 Main Harness to Expansion Shelf length 59 ft Cables Dressing to the Left Rear View 029H614 002 Main Harness to Expansion Shelf length 2 5 ft 029H615 005 Main Harness to Expansion Shelf length 5 ft 029H616 006 Main Harness to Expansion Shelf length 6 5 ft 029H617 009 Main Harness to Expansion Shelf length 9 ft Be sure to connect each ribbon cable so that the colored tracer on the edge of the ribbon is up Other Cards Other technical manuals contain detailed information on some of the common cards Refer to the Preface For OCM common cards refer to GDC 036R340 000 and its associated addendums Summary In this chapter we covered the procedures for installation and optioning of TMS common cards Part numbers were also provided What s Next The next chapter provides the procedures for installation and optioning o
117. GDC 036R303 000 Channel Card Installation Table 3 21 Data Channel DCE DTE Interface Option Selection Feature 51 4 1 Application Position Position DCE Data DCE DCE The Data Channel module communicates with data terminal Communica equipment CRTs printers CPU ports etc by presenting a tion Equip DCE interface the module communicates with data communica ment tions equipment modems multiplexers etc by presenting a Interface DTE interface Switch S1 4 selects the DCE or DTE interface Program plug PP1 must also be positioned to select the proper signal interfacing DTE and DCE markings are visible on oppo site sides of program plug socket XPP1 When PP1 is positioned so that a notch or pin 1 on the plug points to DTE the DTE in terface is selected When PP1 is positioned so that the notch or pin 1 points to DCE the DCE interface is selected DTE Data DTE DTE In the DCE position PP1 passes data timing and control signals Terminal straight through between equipment connected to the channel Equipment and circuitry on the Data Channel module In the DTE position Interface signals are crossed over to permit the proper communication between the module and data communication equipment con nected to the channel The crossovers are as follows XMT DATA to RCV DATA RCV DATA to XMT DATA CA Request to send to CF Carrier Detect CF to CA RCV TMG Receive Timing to EXT TMG Exte
118. GDC 036R303 000 System Initialization Following are the setup parameters needed to 5 17 run GTS software on the Z Select 100 486 These must be performed before loading XENIX on the PC To start the procedure press CTRL ALT S Standard System Parameters System Time XX XX XX System Date XX XX XX Diskette A 3 5 1 44 Mb Diskette B Not Installe Hard Disk 1 Auto Type 1 Hard Disk 2 Not Installe Base Memory 640K Extended Memory 7296K may b Video Type VGA EGA Keyboard Installed Your preference Numlock on at boot yes d d e different Hit PageDown key for next page Advanced CMO Serial Port 2 Modem Port Serial Port 1 COM3 COM4 Base TAZ Parallel Port Hard Disk 1 Hard Disk 2 Floppy Controller IDE Iu Controller Password Power Management Tf additional serial port is installed Tf additional parallel port is installed S Setup COM IRQ3 COM1 IRO4 3e8 2e8 LPT3 OUTPUT ONLY Standard PIO Standard PIO Enabled Enabled Not Installed IDE i Power Down Disabled Video Power Down Disabled Continue with the procedure Starting XENIX From The Boot Floppy Set GDC 036R303 000 5 18 System Initialization Starting XENIX From the Boot Floppy Set Follow the steps below remembering to press Enter after you type your responses on the key board If you are installing S
119. GDC 036R303 000 Issue 9 August 1997 Installation and Operation TMS 3000 Transport Management System idi General DataComm Warning This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause interference to radio communications It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to CISPR 22 which is designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference The user is cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Gen eral DataComm void the user s authority to operate the equipment This digital apparatus does not exceed Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus described in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le pr sent appareil num rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicables aux appareils num riques de la classe A prescrites dans le R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par le minist re des Communications du Canada Warranty General DataComm warrants that its equipment is free from defects
120. LED Sync LED Sync LED Sync LED Alarm LED Alarm LED Loop backLED Loop backLED Loopback LED Loopback LED Diversity LED Diversity LED Test Point Test Point Test Point Test Point Test Point Test Point Test Point I Red LED lights during initialization sequence The board cannot operate during this time Green LED lights if this is the standby card of a redundant pair Green LED lights when the card is synchronized with received data Red LED lights when the card is not synchronized with received data Red LED lights when remote end is not synchronized with its received da ta Red LED lights if there is a hardware failure in this card When the LED flashes rapidly a local software transfer is occuring When the LED flash es slowly a remote software transfer is occuring Red LED lights if there is a hardware failure in the remote end Red LED lights if there is an internal local loopback at the aggregate in terface Transmit data is looped back as received data Red LED lights if the remote ACC is in an internal local loopback Trans4 mit data looped back as receive data at remote aggregate interface Red LED lights when receive data is looped back at the aggregate inter face to the remote ACC Red LED lights when data from the local ACC is looped back at the re mote aggregate interface Red LED lights when the A B aggregate is not receiving data Green LED light
121. LED lights when the channel is entered in the currently active TMS con figuration This indicates that the card is either operating or prepared to operate according to the parameters entered for that channel in the active configura tion Red LED lights when an alarm condition exists in the channel Alarm descrip tions are in GDC 036R603 Vnnn Test point for bridged measurement of Voice Channel VF input level Test point isolated through a 10K ohm resistor Test point for bridged measurement of Voice Channel VF output level Test point isolated through a 10K ohm resistor Ground for VF input and VF output measurement Figure 4 14 UVC ASP Channel Module Front Panel GDC 036R303 000 Operation 4 25 In Svc eO In Svce Chan Alm VF In VF Out Gnd M 23 Signal LED Signal LED LED LED Test Point Test Point Test Point Description Amber LED lights when the E lead of the voice channel is busy Amber LED lights when the M lead of the voice channel is busy Green LED lights when the channel 1s entered in the currently active TMS con figuration This indicates that the card is either operating or prepared to operate according to the parameters entered for that channel in the active configuration Red LED lights when an alarm condition exists in the channel Alarm descrip tions are in GDC 036R603 Vnnn Test point for bridged measurement of Voice Channel VF input level
122. MS 3000 Power Requirements Domestic Unit USA Canada Japan Non Domestic Unit Europe Non Domestic Unit United Kingdom Frequency Output Voltage and Current 3 MOPS non redundant 4 MOPS redundant Remote Alarm Relay Contact Rating Power Consumption Module Module with G 732 I O Plug In Card Input Voltage Range 85 129 V ac Fuses 8 Amp 3AG Input Voltage Range 175 242 V ac Fuses 5 Amp 5x20 mm Input Voltage Range 204 264 V ac Fuses 5 Amp 5x20 mm 50 60 Hz 5 1 V 3 0 2 596 at 8 to 105 amps 12 V 410 at 0 25 to 12 amps 12 V 10 at 0 25 to 12 amps Maximum Current 0 25 amp Maximum 28 75 Watts 5 75 amps 5 V dc 12 V dc Maximum 27 0 watts 5 4 amps 5 V dc 0 2 amps 12 V ac GDC 036R303 000 Technical Characteristics Table B 1 Technical Characteristics Cont Item Specifications TMS 3000 Power Requirements Cont Channel Interface Card Enterprise System Control Card Redundancy Control Card ACM Module TPP LAN TPP FR Aggregate Control Card Harness Card EIA TIA 232 E Aggregate Inter face Plug In V 35 Aggregate Interface Plug In RS 422 423 Aggregate Inter face Plug In WECO 303 Aggregate Inter face Plug In G 703 64 Kbps Codirectional Aggregate Interface Plug In G 703 64 Kbps Contradirectional Aggregate Interface Plug In G 703 2 048 Mbps Aggregate In terface Plug In 75 ohm G 703 2 048 Mbps Agg
123. NIVERSAL VOICE CARD IN U S POSITION Figure 3 14 M Lead Signaling Interfaces Sheet 1 of 4 GDC 036R303 000 Channel Card Installation 3 33 P1 VOICE CHANNEL a TERMINATING n Ae M LEAD 975 NOTE X2 X6 AND X10 ON EAN 1 PIGGYBACK BATT BOARD IN U S POSITION X4 AND X9 ON UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD IN U S POSITION C Type 3 X1 ON VOICE IWASP CHANNEL MODULE AND UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD X4 ON VOICE II CVSD CHANNEL MODULE X4 ON VOICE II PCM amp ADPCM CHANNEL MODULES X2 ON VOICE CHANNEL MODULE AND UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD X5 ON VOICE II CVSD CHANNEL MODULE ON VOICE amp ADPCM CHANNEL MODULES ON VOICE CHANNEL MODULE AND UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD X6 ON VOICE II CVSD CHANNEL MODULE X5 ON VOICE amp ADPCM CHANNEL MODULES TERMINATING EQUIPMENT P1 we M D Type 4 NOTE X2 X6 AND X10 ON EAN 1 PIGGYBACK BOARD IN U S POSITION X4 AND X9 ON UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD IN U S POSITION X1 ON VOICE IWASP CHANNEL MODULE AND UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD X4 ON VOICE IIICVSD CHANNEL MODULE X4 ON VOICE amp ADPCM CHANNEL MODULES X2 ON VOICE CHANNEL MODULE AND UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD X5 ON VOICE II CVSD CHANNEL MODULE ON VOICE amp ADPCM CHANNEL MODULES BUSY IDLE ON VOICE CHANNEL MODULE AND UNIVERSAL VOICE CARD X6 ON VOICE II CVSD CHANNEL MODULE 12TO X5 ON VOICE amp ADPCM CHANNEL MODULES 48V I
124. OCK gt if necessary to select one of the above options Select the option that corresponds to your keyboard 9 The following message is displayed XENIX System V Hard Disk Initialization hat type of disk controller will be supporting this disk 1 Standard disk support ST506 MFM RLL ESDI IDE 2 OMTI 8620 or OMTI 8627 3 SCSI Respond to this question by pressing 1 2 or 3 and the Enter key Most approved TMS Controllers use a standard disk 1 If you are using a SCSI interface you must select 3 Additionally you must ensure that the interface card is an Adapter 1540 the only SCSI adapter supported by SCO XENIX For some newer machines that use a SCSI 2 board for increased speed this interface is not recognized by SCO XENIX You must also ensure that your hard drive does not use more than 1 024 cylinders SCO XENIX cannot address cylinders 1024 To get around this problem you must adjust the sectors heads information to change the number of cylinders By doing this a small amount of storage space may be lost GDC 036R303 000 5 20 System Initialization Preparing the Hard Disk The following steps describe how to initialize the hard disk This includes mapping bad tracks bad spots on the disk so that they are avoided by the operating system and creating one disk par tition and one file system 1 You see the message During installation you may choose to overwrite all or part of the present c
125. OFF OFF OFF OFF 94 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 123 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 95 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 124 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 96 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 125 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 97 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 126 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ESCC Installation To install the ESCC in the TMS 3000 shelf proceed as follows 1 Place the ESCC front panel Enable Disable switch in the Disable position 2 Position the ESCC in the receptacle guides top and bottom of the slot shown in Figure 2 3 and carefully slide the ESCC into the receptacle until it stops Tilt the top eJector knob up and the bottom eJector knob down and gently push the ESCC into the rear connector The knobs automatically assume their normal position 3 Place the ESCC front panel Enable Disable switch in the Enable position GDC 036R303 000 2 8 Common Card Installation ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC or CIC ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC or CIC ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC or CIC ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC CIC or TPP Option Slot ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC or CIC ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC or CIC ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC or CIC ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC or CIC oO m a lt lt A gt lt e lt ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC CIC or TPP ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC CIC or TPP ACC ACM CDA IAC
126. OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 5 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON 39 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 6 ON OFF ON ON ON 40 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 7 OF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 41 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 8 ON ON ON ON ON 42 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 9 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON 43 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 10 ON OFF ON ON ON 44 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 11 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 45 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 12 ON ON ON ON ON 46 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 13 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 47 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 14 ON OFF ON ON ON 48 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 15 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 49 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 16 ON ON OFF ON ON 50 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 17 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON 51 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 18 ON OFF OFF ON ON 52 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 19 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 53 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 20 ON ON OFF ON ON 54 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 21 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 55 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 22 ON OFF OFF ON ON 56 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 23 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 57 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 24 ON ON OFF ON ON 58 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 25 OFF ON ON OFF
127. Plug in card is inserted into pin 1 of U14 Remove sync LSI chip on the Data Channel Ill IV or UDC card Component side of the plug in card faces down Figure 3 12 Hyper Plug In Card Hyper Plug In Card Upgrade Kit An upgrade kit allows you to mount the Hyper Plug In card onto an existing Data Channel Data IV Channel or Universal Data Channel Module The kit number is given in Table 3 29 The Hyper Plug In Card kit can only be used with the Data Channel Module assemblies listed in Table 3 30 Table 3 29 Hyper Plug In Card Upgrade Kit Equipment Supplied GDC Part No Hyper Plug In Card Kit 036K244 001 Contains the following Hyper Plug In Card 036P244 001 Hyper ID label 036N023 001 Table 3 30 Upgradable Equipment List Equipment Supplied GDC Part No Data III Channel Module 036M058 002 004 Data IV Channel Module 036M079 002 004 Universal Data Channel Module 036M078 002 004 NOTE Do not use the Hyper Plug In Card on Data Channel Modules with the EIA TIA 232 E or RS 423 Interface set or with Data I Data II Channel Modules GDC 036R303 000 3 26 Channel Card Installation Voice Channel Modules Voice II CVSD PCM ADPCM and ASP Channel Interface connections options and E and M signaling are covered in this section as well as the Universal Voice Card and Echo Canceller Card Part Numbers Table 3 31 through Table 3 34 are parts listings for voice channel mo
128. S A send control at one node becomes a receive control at the opposite node For example Request to Send is selected as Send Control 1 at Node M Send Control 1 is transmitted across the link and becomes Receive Control 1 at the Node S data channel PP2 at the Node S channel interface selects Receive Control 2 and sends it through the channel interface as Carrier Detect MM02 is hand wired at GDC B MM02 CPU to Terminal Remote CTS Wrap Figure 3 7 Data Channel Control Program Plugs PP2 Sheet 2 of 5 GDC 036R303 000 Channel Card Installation 3 15 Channels Channels Data Set Ready CO Data Term Ready CO p gt PP2 Send Control 4 PP2 p lt end Control 4 Data Set Ready CC 2 15 Rcv Control 4 Rev Control 15 2 Data Term Ready Clear to Send CB 4 13 Rev Control 2 gee Suns oM Clear to Send CB 4 8 Request to Send CA 5 12 Send Control 1 Rev Control 2 13 p Send Control 1 12 5 Carrier Detect CF Carrier Detect CF 6 11 Rev Control 1 8 4 Rev 11 6 Request to Send CA Make Busy Analog Send Control 2 Send 12 Make Busy Anal Loopback CN 7 10 end end Control 2 10 ake Busy Analog CN p j gt 7 Loopback CN Ring Indicator CE 8 9 Rev Control 3 4 Ring Indicator CE Data Channel with Data Channel with DCE Interface DTE Interface Ch
129. SYSTEM VIDEO PARAMETERS Default Video Type Enhanced Graphics Video Refresh Rate Slushing 60 Hz Non Slushed SYSTEM BOARD MEMORY System Board Base Memory Base 640K System Board Extended Memory Extended 3072K System Board EMS Memory EMS 224K Note that this memory configuration may differ from other units NON SYSTEM BOARD MEMORY Non Configurable Additional Base memory Base OK Non Configurable Additional Extended memory Base OK SERIAL PORTS Serial Port 1 COM1 Serial Port 2 COM2 PARALLEL PORT Cachability of Slushed ROMs OEM and BIOS Enabled IDE Floppy Controller Board Mass Storage Device IDE SUB SYSTEM IDE Controller Enabled IDE Drive 0 IDE Auto Configure IDE Drive 1 No Drive Present FLOPPY SUBSYSTEM Floppy Drive Controller Enabled Floppy Drive 0 3 1 2 1 44M Floppy Present Floppy Drive 1 No Floppy Present SCSI GDC 036R303 000 Disable System Initialization 5 15 Z649 Video Adapter Board Host IRQ IRQ10 Host Ports Ports 290 29F Video Daughter Card Installed The video information may vary depending on your video type installed 12 These entries should be factory defaults but it is possible that they are incorrect or have inadvertently been changed at some point If you need to change any of these selections just highlight the selection using the arrow keys and press Enter Usethe arrows to high light the corr
130. Sync Status Module OCM TMS 2000 Feeder 036M482 001 2230 Shelf w CCM N R 48 Data Channel Module 036P416 001 OCM G 703 Data Channel E 3 GDC 036R303 000 E 4 036M420 005 036M420 002 036M420 027 036M420 023 036M420 024 Voice Signaling 2W FXO 2W FXO ADPCM No Echo 2W FXO ADPCM w Echo 2W FXO CELP No Fax 2W 4W FXS CELP w Fax 2W FXO CELP w Fax Minimux Plus Basic Assembly G036B003 015 G036B015 002 Minimux Plus Enclosure 220 240V Minimux Plus Exp Encl TMS 3000 Compact 036M358 001 036M358 002 TMS Compact w ESCC N R TMS Compact w ESCC Redundant 036P064 001 036P066 001 Module Interface EIF G 64K Co Direct EIF C 64K Contra Direct Data Channel Cards 036P243 001 TMS G 703 Data Channel 036P414 001 X 50 Quad Data Card GDC 036R303 000 EC Declaration 25 Pin Connector Functions 2 10 386 Setup Configuration Program 5 11 433Dh 33 MHz Setup Procedures 5 15 486DX 66MHz Z Select 100 Setup Procedures 5 16 486SX 25 MHz and 486DX 33 MHz Setup Procedures 5 12 AC Power On Off Procedure for a TMS 3000 1 5 ACC Assembly 036M3 13 003 2 9 ACC Option Locations 2 15 ACC Options 2 14 ACC Options 2 14 ACC 2 8 ACC Front Panel 4 16 Accessing the Program 5 11 ACM Aggregate Cable Connections 2 39 ACM DB25 Output 25 Pin Connector Pin Assignments 8 12 ACM Front Panel ACM Interface Cable Connections 2 39 ACM Module DB25 Output 25 Pin 8 2 ACM Optio
131. T Telephone 0734 774868 SUBSCRIBER S DETAILS COMPANY ADDRESS POSTCODE TELEPHONETELEX CONTACT NAME MODEL NO ATTACHMENT APPROVAL NO 1132 AUTHORISED FOR CONNECTION TO THE FOLLOWING SERVICE S 2 WIRE PSTN LINE 4 WIRE LEASED LINE KILOSTREAM MEGASTREAM PLEASE COME AND FIT EXTENSION SOCKETS AS SOON AS POSSIBLE GDC 036R303 000 E EC Declaration EC Declaration of Conformity for Electromagnetic Compatibility and Safety We General DataComm Inc declare under our sole legal responsibility that the following prod ucts conform to the following relevant harmonized standards the reference numbers of which have been published in the Official Journal of the European Communities Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive 89 336 EEC The affixing of the CE mark is based on compliance with directive 89 336 EEC as amended by directive 93 68 EEC EN 55022 Based on CISPR 22 Specification for limits and methods of measurement of radio interference characteristics of information technology equipment EN 55024 Limits and methods of measurement of the immunity to Electro Magnetic interference for information technology equipment EN 50081 1 Based on IEC 801 Electromagnetic compatibility generic emissions standard Part 1 Residential Commercial and light industry EN 50082 1 Electromagnetic compatibility generic immunity standard Part 1 Residential Commercial and light industry Low Volt
132. T G 703 64 Kbps Codirectional Aggregate Inter EIF G 036P064 001 face ITU T G 703 2 048 Mbps 75 ohm Aggregate Inter EIF MI 036P065 001 face ITU T G 703 2 048 Mbps 12 ohm Aggregate Inter EIF M2 036P065 002 face ITU T G 703 64 Kbps Contradirectional Aggregate EIF C 036P066 001 Interface ITU T G 703 256 Kbps 75 ohm Aggregate Interface EIF K1 336P065 001 ITU T G 703 256 Kbps 120 ohm Aggregate Interface EIF K2 336P065 002 ITU T G 704 2 048 Mbps 75 120 ohm Aggregate In 036P281 001 terface Aggregate Interface Connections Aggregate Interface cables are connected to the DB 25 EIA connectors located in the upper half of the TMS 3000 Harness Card backplane from left to right in two rows of eight connectors In the TMS 3000 system aggregate interfaces require a matching Aggregate Interface Piggyback Card mounted on the ACC A list of Aggregate Interface cables is provided in Table 2 8 along with a description of the ap plications for each cable The connectors on the TMS 3000 backplane for the Aggregate inter face cables are listed in Table 2 9 GDC 036R303 000 2 10 Common Card Installation Table 2 8 Aggregate Interface Cables GDC Cable No Description Application 028H502 EIA TIA 232 E ITU T V 28 For all 232 E and ITU T V 28 aggregate trunks Avail able in 5 15 25 and 50 foot lengths Straight through cable 027H507 ITU T V 35 For ITU T V 35 trunks generally used for domestic applicatio
133. V 35 Interface 036M058 004 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Interface Set RCV XMTR V 35 Data III Channel PCB Assembly 036M047 004 036P236 004 Table 3 9 Data IV Channel Module with EIA TIA 232 E Interface 056M079 001 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Interface Set RCV XMT EIA TIA 232 E Data IV Channel PCB Assembly 036M047 001 036P236 007 Table 3 10 Data IV Channel Module with RS 422 Interface 056M079 002 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Interface Set RCV XMT RS 422 Data IV Channel PCB Assembly 036M047 002 036P236 007 Table 3 11 Data IV Channel Module with RS 423 Interface 056M079 003 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Interface Set RCV XMT RS 423 Data IV Channel PCB Assembly 036M047 003 036P236 007 Table 3 12 Data IV Channel Module with V 35 Interface 056M079 004 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Interface Set RCV XMT EIA TIA 232 E Data IV Channel PCB Assembly 036M047 004 036P236 007 GDC 036R303 000 Channel Card Installation Table 3 13 UDC Module with EIA TIA 232 E Interface 036M078 001 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Interface Set RCV XMT EIA TIA 232 E Data IV Channel PCB Assembly 036M047 001 036P236 007 Table 3
134. When you make a selection the display scrolls up The symbol gt is displayed on the current line as a prompt If at any time you enter an unknown command or invalid data a message appears on the screen with an ESCC gt prompt The following paragraphs describe each HELP menu selection in their order of appearance on the menu Each is selected by typing the three letter command and pressing Return GDC 036R303 000 TMS 3000 Maintenance Console HEL To View the Help Menu This HEL command is used to display the HELP or Main Menu It can be selected any time the gt or the Slave gt prompt is on the screen VCH To View Channel Information This command is used to display the configuration and status of a band of up to 64 channels You can only view the running configuration you cannot change it from the TMS Maintenance Con sole If you select VCH the following prompt is displayed Slot 1 16 If the Console is connected toa MEGAMUX TMS Compact or TMS 3000 Compact Node the following prompt is displayed Slot 1 5 If the slot number you enter is not a Channel Interface Module no information is displayed If the parameters are entered correctly a screen similar to the following is displayed CHNL SHELF 1 SHELF 2 SHELF 3 SHELF 4 1 SYNC 28 ASYNC 23 UNDEF UNDEF 2 ASYNC 01 PCM 40 SYNC 28 SYNC 28 3 16 SYNC 28 ASYNC 23 UNDEF UNDEF The numbers following PCM
135. a TMS 3000 node via an external connection on the Main Harness Card The recommended controller is a Pentium 90 It performs configuration and framing calculations for the entire network as well as other status diagnostics and alarm functions A Maintenance Console is not classified as a Controller be cause it has limited control over only one node TPP TMS Packet Processor A module installed in a TMS 3000 main shelf that interfaces externally with public frame relay networks or frame relay devices such as LAN bridges routers and frame relay PADs It also has internal access to the Fastbus allowing it to transfer frame relay HDLC and SDLC data to other TPP modules in the shelf or to modules such as CIC CDA ACC and Trunk Defines a connection between a TMS port and a Network port or another TMS port Also see Aggregate Trunk Universal Voice Card Provides full duplex voice communication capabilities in a TMS 3000 Pulse Code Modulation PCM Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation ADPCM and Advanced Speech Process ing ASP card configurations are available VLBRV Very Low Bit Rate Voice Module An analog voice channel card for TMS 3000 TMS Compact Universal V4 MINIMUX OCM 2000 TDMs Maximizes voice channel bandwidth utilization while offering low bit rate values of 9 6 4 8 and 2 4 kbps XNET XNET allows connection between two independently operating TMS 3000 networks Supervi sory com
136. able 2 24 Option Selections Switch S Jumpers X Feature Selection Desig Position Application Redundant Redundant X3 RED Proper system operation requires that the Non Redundant ACM knows whether itis redundant or not pri ACM Non Redundant X3 NON RED or to program or configuration download If using ACM as a redundant pair set this jump er to RED If using ACM as a non redundant pair set this jumper to NON RED GDC 036R303 000 Common Card Installation 2 35 Table 2 25 ACM TI VO Plug In Card Option Selections Switch Switch Function Application Number Position 51 1 Off Enables B8ZS Bit 8 Zero Suppression B8ZS is a technique de B8ZS Dis line coding signed to meet the spectral density specification This technique creates an intentional double bipolar violation at the transmitting end when 8 consecutive On Disables B8ZS zeros are detected Bipolar return to zero is the mod line coding ulation technique used in T1 which requires subse quent marks of polarity opposite to the previous marks The bipolar violation is detected and re moved at the receive end of the network 51 2 Off Bit 7 Substitution In B7 substitution ones density is implied This Bit 7 Trans Enabled means that bit 7 for select DSO frames is set to one When B7 is enabled bandwidth available for type subaggregates varies with each DSO slot Selecting On Transparent Trans bypasses
137. able is used connect P1 of the Y cable to this connector Table 2 21 CDA E1 G 732 I O Plug In Card Options Switch S Jumpers X Feature Selection Desig Position Function Receive Line Impedance 75 ohms 75 Setting at 75 provides line impedance of 75 120 ohms 120 ohms for the G 732 Setting at 120 provides a line impedance of 120 ohms Receive Line Impedance 75 ohms 2 75 Setting at 75 provides line impedance of 75 120 ohms 120 ohms for the G 732 Setting at 120 provides a line impedance of 120 ohms Transmit Line Impedance 75 ohms X3 75 Setting at 75 provides a line impedance of 75 120 ohms 120 ohms for the G 732 Setting at 120 provides a line impedance of 120 ohms Receive Shield Ground 75 ohms 4 75 Setting at 75 provides a ground reference on the Recv B lead for unbalanced interfaces normally used with 75 ohm coaxial interfaces Setting at 120 provides for a balanced input normal setting Transmit Shield Ground Ground X9 GND GND selection provides a ground reference on the Open OPEN output port as recommended by G 703 for use with 75 ohm interfaces OPEN selection is for use with a 120 ohm inter face and provides a balanced interface at the out put port CAS Signaling TS16 En 51 1 51 2 Switches 51 1 and 51 2 selects CAS CRC 4 or abled CRC 4 Disabled both for use on the G 732 I O plug in card On On plug CAS Signaling TS16 Off On Disabled CRC
138. abled S4 3 ON Enables signal SERIDTR on serial Port J20 J20 TSET Disabled 54 4 OFF Disables signal TSET on serial Port J20 Enabled 54 4 ON Enables signal TSET on serial Port J20 J20 SERIRDATA Disabled S4 5 OFF Disables signal SERIRDATA on serial Port J20 Enabled 54 5 ON Enables signal SERIRDATA on serial Port J20 J20 SERIDSR Disabled S4 6 OFF Disables signal SER1DSR on serial Port J20 Enabled S4 6 ON Enables signal SERIDSR on serial Port J20 J20LOCKFREQINB Disabled S4 7 OFF Disables signal LOCKFREQINB on serial Port J20 Enabled S4 7 ON Enables signal LOCKFREQINB on serial Port J20 J20 LOCKFREQINA Disabled S4 8 OFF Disables signal LOCKFREQINA on serial Port J20 Enabled S4 8 ON Enables signal LOCKFREQINA on serial Port J20 Not Used Not Used S2 8 S3 ON These option switches must be set in the ON posi 7 S3 8 tion Default selection GDC 036R303 000 2 6 Common Card Installation Table 2 6 ESCC Node Address Option Node Switch Settings Node Switch Settings Address 52 1 52 2 S2 3 S2 4 s2 5 S2 6 82 7 Address S2 1 S2 2 S2 3 S2 4 S2 5 S2 6 S2 7 1 OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON 35 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 2 ON OFF ON ON ON 36 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 3 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON 37 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 4 ON ON ON ON ON 38 ON
139. age Directive LVD 73 23 EEC The affixing of the CE mark is based on compliance with directive 73 23 EEC as amended by directive 93 68 EEC EN 60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment including Electrical Business Equipment EN 41003 Particular Safety Requirements for Equipment to be connected to Telecommunications Networks GDC 036R303 000 E 2 Equipment List TMS Channel Cards 036M078 001 036M078 002 036M078 003 036M078 004 037M078 007 GS936M014 001 GS936M014 002 036P265 003 036M285 002 036M285 003 036M285 004 036M285 005 036P270 001 036M335 001 UDC 232 V 24 V 2036M078 002 UDC 422 V 11 UDC 423 V 10 UDC V 35 UDC X 21 X 27 TDC 2 256K0 TDC 5 512K0 UVC ADPCM CELP Voice Channel w Fax CELP Voice Channel CELP 9 6K Voice Channel w Fax CELP 9 6K Voice Channel Echo Canceller ACM 1 TMS 3000 Options 036M337 001 036P302 001 036P307 002 S 036P042 001 S 036B001 002 S 036P001 001 039P002 001 ESCC Enterprise System Control Card RCC Redundancy Control Card ECC II Expansion Common Card Sync Status Module CP 12 Adapter Expansion Shelf CP 422 423 449 Ext Adapter DLD M Ext Line Driver CM TMS 2000 Feeder 036M486 002 036M48 1 001 036M48 1 002 036M482 001 2121 Standalone Enclosure w CCM N R 2220 Shelf w CCM N R 2320 Shelf w CCM Redundant 2230 Shelf w CCM NR 48VDC OCM 1000 Point to Point 036M488 002 036M484 001 036M484 002 1120 Stan
140. age present and delete them after display You may read these messages without de leting them by pressing F1 before pressing the F9 key With either display method the green alarm line is eventually returned to the screen As many as 40 such messages may be accessible through this line Lines 24 and 25 report the two most recent alarm messages received from the network by the Controller Screen Colors Colors in the Controller screen display reflect the type of information provided by the Controller or the type of entries required by the Controller The screen may display text presented in a single color or in a combination of a highlighted field color and a text color The color arrangements used on TMS 3000 Controller displays are White Text on Blue Field Display Headers Blue Text on White Field Limited Range Entry Black Text on Blue Field String Entry Black Text on White Field Cursor Selection Pokepoint Red Text Indicates failure condition for alarms status or diagnostics Green Text Indicates normal operating condition for alarms status or diagnostics Yellow Text Indicates warning potential problem condition for alarms status or diagnostics General Operating Procedures TMS 3000 Controller operation is characterized by Menu Driven Selection of Operating Routines Cursor Position Selection Method Prompt Message System Responses Predefined Key Functions
141. als are generated during power up down switching These circuits are designed to protect the electronics from lock ups and memory loss for ac transients and power on off conditions Switching power on off via a branch circuit breaker can generate unpredictable transient conditions since inductive and or capacitive loads connected to the branch affect the voltage on off sensing cir cuits To ensure reliable operation use the following procedure to turn TMS 3000 power on 1 Turn the branch circuit breaker on first This gives transients due to heavy inductive and ca pacitive line loads time to settle 2 If the communication product is mounted in a cabinet equipped with a local circuit breaker such as a GDC EP 4 cabinet turn the local breaker on next 3 Turn off the dc power supplies mounted in the node To turn TMS 3000 Power off reverse the power on procedure by first turning off the dc power sup plies TMS 3000 Controller Initialization For information on the installation and initialization of the TMS 3000 Controller refer to Chapter 5 of this manual Fused Links Fused links in the interface circuits protect the TMS 3000 from damages during operation To pre vent large circulating currents due to differences in ground potential the TMS 3000 should be pow ered by the same power source as the equipment with which it interfaces If you don t know if the equipment is powered by the same power source confirm that a potential
142. an application exists for a Hyper Plug In Card on a circuit which is configured between a TMS 3000 node and MINIMUX TDM a Hyper Plug In Card should only be installed on the Data III Channel Data IV Channel or UDC Module in the TMS 3000 node Because of increased delay time and translocation of data control signals do not use the Hyper Plug In Card in low speed channel applications or in a polling NOTE environment All software parameters for the Hyper Plug In Card configuration card type status alarms diagnostics etc are the same as for the synchronous Data III Channel Data IV Channel or Universal Data Channel Module The Controller cannot identify the need for this card nor can it read of its presence in the network To the Controller and a user a Data III IV or UDC Module with the Hyper Plug In option appears exactly as a standard Data III Channel Data IV Channel or Universal Data Channel Module GDC 036R303 000 Channel Card Installation 3 23 Part Numbers Part numbers for the Hyper Plug In card for use on a UDC module are listed in Table 3 28 Table 3 28 Hyper UDC Module Parts List Equipment Supplied GDC Part No Hyper UDC Module RS 422 036M078 005 Hyper UDC Module V 35 036M078 006 Installation Procedures Use the following procedures to install the Hyper Plug In Card onto a Data III Channel Data IV Channel or Universal Data Channel Module in the field precautionary p
143. anel indicators Test Points The test points located at the bottom of the ESCC ACM CDA ACC Voice Channel and Data Channel Modules provide immediate indications of TMS 3000 functions By connecting os cilloscope leads between test points and a reference point a technician may observe data and clock signals and identify conditions that characterize proper or improper TMS 3000 operation Chapter 4 of this manual contains descriptions of each module front panel including the test points Pin assignments for the card connectors are defined in Chapter 8 The following para graphs suggest checks and comparisons that may be made with the front panel test points on each module Enterprise System Control Card The ESCC test points provide immediate indications of TMS 3000 timing functions By connect ing oscilloscope leads between test points and a reference point a technician may observe data and clock signals and identify conditions that characterize proper or improper TMS 3000 opera tion Chapter 4 of this manual contains descriptions of ESCC front panel including the test points The following paragraphs suggest checks and comparisons that may be made with the front panel test points on each module Each of the following frequencies is produced by a phase lock loop 18 432 MHz 16 896 MHz and 1 544 MHz After achieving phase lock with the master timing source the 18 432 MHz pri mary frequency is used as a reference to create the other two
144. annel Crossover Cable Male to male connec tor G024H015 Data II V 35 DTE Data Channel IL V 35 DTE applications Male to male con nector G024H016 Data II V 35 DTE Data Channel II V 35 DTE applications Male to female connector Interface Options Option selections required to support each interface type are discussed in Table 3 20 and Table 3 21 The following interfaces be selected not applicable to G 703 channel EIA TIA 232 E ITU T V 28 MIL STD 188C RS 423 MIL STD 188 114 Unbalanced RS 422 MIL STD 188 114 Balanced no cable termination RS 422 MIL STD 188 114 Balanced Transmit Data and Clock cable termination V 35 Balanced Double Current GDC 036R303 000 Channel Card Installation 3 5 A DCE interface may be selected for connection to data terminal equipment a DTE interface may be chosen for connection to data communication equipment Table 3 21 describes the selections Table 3 20 Data Channel Interface Options XRN7 XRN8 Interface S1 1 S1 2 S1 3 X21 XMT RCV Application Selection Pos Pos Pos Pos Resistor Resistor Network Network EIA TIA NORM OPEN OPEN NORM RS 232 RS 232 RCV The channel interface oper 232 E XMT 331 331 002 006 ates according to any of the MIL STD 001 006 interfaces shown inthe table 188 114 To select an interface you V 28 must set Switches S1 1 through S1 4 and Jumper X21 in the positions shown
145. annels Channels Node M Node S A send control at one node becomes a receive control at the opposite node For example Data Terminal Ready is selected as Send Control 4 at Node M Send Control 4 is transmitted across the link and becomes Receive Control 4 at the Node S data channel PP2 at the Node S channel interface selects Receive Control 4 and sends it through the channel interface as Data Set Ready MM02 is hand wired at GDC C MM03 CPU to Modem Figure 3 7 Data Channel Control Program Plugs PP2 Sheet 3 of 5 GDC 036R303 000 3 16 Channel Card Installation Channels Channels PP2 PP2 In In Data Set Ready CC 2 1 Service Service 1 2 Data Set Ready E E Clear to Send CB 4 4 Clear to Send CB E p Send Control 1 Request to Send C 5 12 12 5 Request to Send CA j gt 8 lt Carrier Detect CF 6 11 Control 1 11 6 Carrier Detect gt p Data Channel Data Channel with DCE Interface with DCE Interface Channels Channels Node M Node S A send control at one node becomes a receive control at the opposite node For example Request to Send is selected as Send Control 1 at Node M Send Control 1 is transmitted across the link and becomes Receive Control 1 at the Node S data channel PP2 at the Node S channel interface selects Receive Control 1 and sends it through the channel interface as Carrier D
146. ard DigiChannel PC 4E Overview The DigiChannel PC 4e card mounts inside the TMS Controller to expand the I O port capacity of the controller to four The Digichannel PC 4e card supports the following interfaces Local Terminal Remote Dialin Modem MEGAVIEW Remote Dialin MEGAVIEW and MEGA VIEW PC With the DigiChannel PC 4e card network communications and dial backup com munications are not supported in MSO version 3 0 0 and later software versions y A floppy disk is included in the shipping container that contains your DigiBoard card But you do not need to use this floppy disk because all of the NOTE necessary software is included in the TMS 3000 software DigiBoard DigiChannel PC AE Installation The following procedure describes the installation of the DigiChannel PC 4e card and its DIP Switch settings Install the card as follows 1 Shut down XENIX and turn the power off in the controller 2 Remove the outer casing of the TMS Controller If you intend to use the Digiboard DigiChannel PC 4e card as an additional I O card you only need to install the hardware since software is already installed The following procedure briefly outlines the DIP Switch settings on the Digiboard DigiChannel PC 4e card For more information on the Digiboard DigiChannel PC 4e card refer to the Installation Guide Reference Manual from Digiboard 3 dual port memory starting address to D0000 Hex Configure dual port memory starting addr
147. articularly useful for monitoring accumulated test pattern errors Typing S at the L R S or L R S M prompts terminates the test Table C 3 Diagnostic Error Codes Code Meaning 01 Channel Test Fail 02 Controller Test Fail Hardware 03 Controller Test Fail Aggregate Control or Channel Interface Not Responding or Not In Slot 04 Channel Not In Slot and or Not Configured 05 Channel Tests Already in Progress MFP Modify I O Port Configuration This command is used to set the configuration for the TMS Controller Port J20 on the Main Shelf backplane of the TMS node the Internal External Modem Port J42 and in the future J19 After you select MFP you see Modify Port 0 J20 1 J42 2 J19 Enter Modify Port I O Configuration for J20 Select 0 and press RETURN You see 0 Sync l Async Enter Serial I F Type 1 For sync select 0 and press Return You see Enter Data Rate Ref User Manual for Max allowed Enter After entering a rate at the prompt you see 0 J20 set to loop timing Ext device in loop timing 2 Normal timing After making your choice you are returned to the slave prompt GDC 036R303 000 C 14 TMS 3000 Maintenance Console 2 For Async select 1 and press Return You see 0 Decon 1 300 2 1 2k 3 2 4k 4 4 8k 5 9 6k 6 19 2k figure for communications Entry not valid for J19 Select cho
148. as a node in a TMS 3000 network It is system of modules installed in OCM 2000 Enclosure or OCM 2000 Shelf sep arate from the TMS shelf that multiplexes data from a variety of analog and digital devices then transfers that data to the TMS for further routing May also be referred to as TMS 2000 or OCM TMS OPP OCM Packet Processor A module installed in an OCM 2000 Enclosure or Shelf that interfaces externally with public frame relay networks or frame relay devices such as LAN bridges routers and frame relay PADs OPP is the OCM counterpart to the TPP Packet A sequence of data with associated control elements that is switched and transmitted as a whole refers mainly to the field structure and format defined within the CCITT X 25 recommendation multiple packets may be required to carry one complete document or a lengthy block of informa tion Piggyback Card A card that plugs into a base card The piggyback is a separate assembly that can be tested re moved and replaced as a unit Plesiochronous The essential characteristic of time scales or signals such that their corresponding significant in stants occur at nominally the same rate any variation in rate being constrained within specified times Note that two signals having the same nominal digit rate but not stemming from the same clock or homochronous clocks are usually plesiochronous there is no time limit to the time re lationship between corresponding significant in
149. ate Control Card ACC and the Channel Interface Card CIC After selecting DIA you see 1 Equipment 2 Channel Select 1 or 2 and press lt Return gt If you select 1 Equipment the following prompts are dis played in successive order You must respond to each of these prompts Slot 1 16 1 5 for MEGAMUX TMS Compact Lcl or Rem Lpbk Stop Test L R S If the test is being performed successfully the screen displays an OK If the console outputs an error code instead look up the meaning of the error code in Table C 3 The prompt Lcl or Rem Lpbk Stop Test L R S continually repeats until you press the CONTROL key and the letter X to exit this diagnostic test The gt or slave gt prompt then reappears If you select 2 Channel the following prompts are displayed in successive order You must re spond to each of these prompts Slot 1 16 1 5 for MEGAMUX TMS Compact Lcl or Rem Lpbk Stop Test Monitor BERT L R S M BERT Y N If the test you initiated is being performed successfully the screen displays an OK If the con sole outputs an error code instead look up the meaning of the error code in Table C 3 The prompt Lcl or Rem Lpbk Stop Test Monitor BERT L R S M GDC 036R303 000 TMS 3000 Maintenance Console C 13 continually repreats until you press CTRL X to exit this diagnostic test The gt or slave gt prompt then reappears This feature is p
150. ate parameters are accepted a new prompt sign gt appears GDC 036R303 000 TMS 3000 Maintenance Console Table C 3 Aggregate Interface Selections C 17 Transmit External Interface Type Allowable Data Rates Clock Clock T1 D4 or bps Source Source NTT 64 K Contra 64K I A NO BELL T1 D4 1 536 M I A YES NTT 192 K 1 536 M I A YES BELL 1 1 544 M E A NO CCITT 2 048 M 2 048 M E A NO 64 K Codirectional 64K E A NO CCITT V 35 4800 2 048 M E A NO BELL 303 19 2 K 230 4 E A NO MIL STD 188 114 4800 2 048 M E A NO RS 422 V 11 4800 2 048 M E A NO RS 423 V 10 4800 100 K E A NO EIA TIA 232 E V 24 4800 19 2 K E A NO BELL T1 D4 E 1 472M 1 536M I A YES 64K CONTRA L 64K I A NO G704 CCITT 64K 1 984M N by 64K I A YES TID4 DSO 56K 1 344M N by 56K A YES 64K 1 536M N by 64K GDC 036R303 000 D Agency Rules and Regulations 9 This appendix supersedes any information contained in GDC 036R303 000 Z y NOTE Before installing the equipment refer to the applicable national regulations within this document Part 1 UK Regulations This appendix must be read before connecting the equipment in the United Kingdom and where appropriate overrides any information provided in the text of the international manual Any in quiries should be addressed to GENERAL DATACOMM LIMITED Molly Millars Close Molly Millars Lane Wokingham Berkshire RG11 2QF Equipment t
151. ate piggyback card TID III Data Channel Module and ACM Aggregate Interface Tables 8 1 through 8 8 list the pin assignments of the 25 pin aggregate connectors The func tions listed are determined by the type of aggregate piggyback card used on the associated Ag gregate Control Card Data And Voice II Channel Tables 8 9 and 8 10 list the pin assignments for the Data Channel and Voice II Channel connec tors External Timing Table 8 11 lists the pin assignments for the external timing connector J18 on the TMS 3000 backplane Internal External Modem Table 8 12 lists the pin assignments for the phone jack J41 located on the rear of the TMS 3000 main shelf The phone jack connects to the internal GDC 212A modem on the Redundancy Con trol Card Note that the internal modem is available only on earlier versions of the RCC Table 8 13 lists the pin assignments for the external modem Port J42 located on the rear of the TMS 3000 main shelf External Alarm Relay Table 8 14 lists the pin assignments for the external alarm relay connector J17 located on the rear of the TMS 3000 main shelf Echo Canceller Card Table 8 15 lists the pin assignments for the Echo Canceller piggyback card This card plugs into the Universal Voice Card CDA Module DB25 Output 25 Pin Table 8 16 lists the pin assignments for the Combined Digital Aggregate Module GDC 036R303 000 8 2 Connector Pin Assignments TID III Data Channel Module Table
152. ave hardware option selections The ELA RS 422 423 Aggregate Interface Piggyback card requires selection of options to select an RS 422 balanced interface or an RS 423 unbalanced interface These selections are described in Table 2 12 Option locations are shown in Figure 2 6 All other Aggregate Interface Piggyback Cards used on the TMS 3000 system do not have hardware options except the V 35 Aggregate Inter face Piggyback Rev Revision J A revised V 35 Aggregate Interface piggyback board Rev J contains a jumper labeled X2 The positions are not labeled on the pc board but are shown on the reverse side in Figure 2 7 The card does not function if the jumper is not installed in either position The factory default position for this jumper is the INVERT position In this position the board is backward compatible with all previous revisions of the board The NORM position should be used for all applications where a V 35 piggyback is connected to an RS422 piggyback at a remote location GDC 036R303 000 2 16 Common Card Installation z m 2 8 8 Figure 2 6 RS 422 423 Aggregate Interface Piggyback Option Locations The purpose of this jumper is to correct a problem with the clocks and data being inverted on older revisions of the piggyback card Cable number 027H507 XX X compensates for this If this cable is to be used with Rev J cards set X2 to the INVERT position for proper operation GDC 036R303 000 Common Card Instal
153. ay contain static sensitive devices that are easily damaged and proper handling and grounding is essential Use ESD precautionary measures when installing parts or cards and keep the parts and cards in antistatic packaging when not in use If possible use antistatic floorpads and workbench pads When handling components or when setting switch options always use an antistatic wrist strap connected to a grounded equipment frame or chassis fa wrist strap is not available periodically touch an unpainted metal surface on the equipment Never use a conductive tool like a screwdriver or a paper clip to set switches Safety Guidelines The following symbols are used when unsafe conditions exist or when potentially hazardous voltages are present Caution statements identify conditions or practices that can cause damage to the equipment or loss of data Warning statements identify conditions or practices that can result in personal injury or loss of life Always use caution and common sense To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not operate equipment with the cover removed Repairs must be performed by qualified service personnel only e Never install telephone jacks in a wet location unless the jack is designed for that location e Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line is disconnected at the network interface e Use caution when installing telephone lines and never install telephone wiring d
154. ble in 5 or 15 foot lengths 326H023 TMS 3000 to Tellabs 2366R shelf 12 Used to connect up to 12 channels to Tel voice channels labs 266AR shelf Available in 5 or 15 foot lengths 830 002S008 50 pin Amphenol male to male exten Used to connect 50 pin cables above to sion cable 25 pairs customer voice termination point de mark voice channel to PBX 830 002S007 50 pin Amphenol male to female exten Used to connect Tellabs shelf to custom sion cable 25 pairs er voice termination point demark Tellabs Shelf to PBX G024H012 Voice Channel and E amp M Used for Voice Channel CVSD and ASP module types Also used in E amp M sig naling applications GDC 036R303 000 Channel Card Installation 3 29 S 51 i x n pue 2 2 2 INT GND z X6 H x4 M H E A GND X8 X9 M Fini BUSY IDLE gt 16 B 108 7 1 NORM E NORM E 1 dB 2 gt CE o r x Note that jumper X10 is not used Figure 3 13 Voice II CVSD Channel Module Option Locations GDC 036R303 000 3 30 Channel Card Installation Table 3 36 Voice II CVSD Channel Option Selection Feature Selection Switch S Jumper X Desig Position Application Nominal Input Level 0 dBm 51 1 0 16 dBm 16 The nominal input level is determined by the nominal output level of the tele phone equip
155. bon cable connectors are J17 and J18 When connecting the ribbon cable to the Main Harness Backplane pin 1 should be up Pin 1 is identified by a colored tracer on one edge of the ribbon cabling The ribbon cable connectors are equipped with special latches that lock the cable into place They are used to unseat rather than eject the cable The cable must be removed by hand after it is unseated Also when inserting the cable be sure to close the latches slightly before pushing the cable into locked position otherwise the latches can be damaged The left eight ribbon cables on the Main Harness Backplane must be self clipped to dress to the left and go through the guide The right eight cables dress naturally to the right Two 50 pin ribbon cable connectors are associated with each pair of CICs in a redundant system or each single CIC in a non redundant system In a non redundant system the CIC should be placed in the right hand slot of a pair of slots the left hand slot must be left unoccupied In a non redundant system you may not place an ACC in the slot not occupied by a redundant CIC Table GDC 036R303 000 Common Card Installation 2 39 2 27 lists the association between each pair of TMS 3000 shelf slots and each pair of 50 pin rib bon connectors Table 2 27 TMS 3000 Shelf Channel Interface Ribbon Connectors and Associated Slot Numbers TMS 3000 Shelf Slot Numbers Associated Ribbon Connectors i aR 3 4 J23 J
156. cal connections are made by means of a 13 pin header The Echo Canceller Card contains one right angle DIP switch mounted near its upper edge enabling options to be selected without removing the card from the Universal Voice Card Echo Canceller Options The Echo Canceller Card options are selected using Switches S1 1 through S1 5 on the Echo Canceller Card In the TMS 3000 the Residual Echo Suppressor option on the Echo Canceller Card is no longer supported The use of this option may cause the Universal Voice Card to synchronize incorrectly after a loss of sync due to link errors The Adaptive Bulk Delay feature now has a factory default value of 0 dBm Figure 3 18 locates option selection Switch S1 Table 3 55 defines the option selections Top of Card 13 1 OOOOoogo0o0goo0o000 O XA1P1 Figure 3 18 Echo Canceller Card Option Switch Location GDC 036R303 000 3 48 Channel Card Installation Table 3 55 Echo Canceller Card Option Selections Feature Selection Switch S Desig Position Application Bulk Delay 0 ms fixed delay 7 ms fixed delay 14 ms fixed delay Adaptive Delay 0 ms initially 51 2 51 3 Closed Down Closed Down Closed Down Open Up Open Up Closed Down Open Up Open Up These switch positions control the length of the bulk delay The bulk de lay is required to enable echo cancel lation on tail circuits with a delay in excess of 16
157. cation modes If there are TID III Data Channel Modules at both ends of the link you can select any of the five application modes or three operating sub modes What are the characteristics of the input and output clocks Since all clocks exhibit varying degrees of inaccuracy this answer allows you to select a mode submode which optimizes communications with respect to clock accuracy and stability Are there any special communications requirements such as nonstandard rates or automatic alternate rates on system configuration changes If there are consider the applicability of the automatic mode of operation Are there any special module interface requirements for example a requirement to convert encoded data from one standard to another before channel input If there are consult GDC regarding the applicability of our optional interface adapter piggyback Having reviewed the system application requirements and options proceed with TID III Data Channel Module setup TID III Module Setup Configure the TID III Data Channel Module with both hardware and software options The TID III Data Channel Module is first configured by setting DIP switches on the transmitter board and several jumpers on the receiver board The location of these devices is shown in Figure 3 9 and Figure 3 10 Also refer to GDC 036R469 000 Instruction Manual for TID Application and operation mode settings are accomplished through software for the TMS 300
158. cation Bus and the Clock Bus Maintenance Console A software package that allows you to interact with the TMS 3000 on a local level This software is designed to work with any terminal that runs at 1200 to 9600 baud ASCII on an EIA TIA 232 E interface The terminal is connected to the TMS 3000 main shelf backplane MINIMUX A self contained TDM capable of multiplexing and de multiplexing as many as six channels of synchronous asynchronous isochronous or anisochronous data or voice grade telephone sig nals Module An assembly which has definable performance characteristics so that it can be tested removed and replaced as a unit In a TMS 3000 system each card on the Main Shelf and Expansion Shelves is a module A module can have other cards called piggybacks or plug ins installed on it In most cases in this manual the terms module and card are used interchangeably For example Channel Interface Card and Channel Interface Module refer to the same component Network Term used to refer to a group of three or more nodes connected together with aggregate trunks Not all the nodes in a network will necessarily be TMS 3000 nodes GDC 036R303 000 Preface Node Any addressable location within a network capable of carrying a TMS 3000 circuit In a network a TMS Compact in Philadelphia or an OCM 2000 in Boston are nodes also see Tail Node OCM 2000 Office Communications Manager A feeder multiplexer that is used
159. ced Receive Data A from one side of T1 line input 38 XMTDATA A Balanced Transmit Data A from one side of T1 line output 39 XMTDATA B Balanced Transmit Data B from one side of T1 line output 40 PROT GND Protective ground output from G 704 Aggregate Interface Piggy back to equipment cabinet Pin numbers 7 10 12 14 17 21 23 25 30 32 34 and 37 are not used Note that Connector XP2 on the G 704 Aggregate Interface Piggyback is used on a later version of the Aggregate Control Card GDC 036R303 000 Connector Pin Assignments 8 11 Table 8 19 704 Aggregate Interface Piggyback Card Connector Pin Assignments 2 Pin Description Signal Description 1 45V Positive 5 volt input 3 SIG GND Signal Ground 4 BDO Microprocessor Data Bus 0 5 BD1 Microprocessor Data Bus 1 6 BD2 Microprocessor Data Bus 2 7 BD3 Microprocessor Data Bus 3 8 BD4 Microprocessor Data Bus 4 9 BD5 Microprocessor Data Bus 5 10 BD6 Microprocessor Data Bus 6 11 BD7 Microprocessor Data Bus 7 12 WRSTB Write Strobe when low condition is true 13 RDSTB Read Strobe when low condition is true 14 CSN Board Select when low condition is true 15 BA0 Microprocessor Address Bus 0 16 1 Microprocessor Address Bus 1 17 BA2 Microprocessor Address Bus 2 18 BA3 Microprocessor Address Bus 3 Note that plesiochronous buffers introduce unwanted end to end delay on the ag
160. ch of normally open and normally closed contacts Relay Type 2 Form C Appropriate relays are energized to signal alarm conditions Connections are made to a 15 pin connector J17 on the TMS 3000 main harness card Table 1 3 lists the J17 pins used to connect the normally open or normally closed contacts of the relays to the external equipment Do not exceed maximum ratings of the relay contacts 3 W 0 25 A 28 V GDC 036R303 000 Shelf Installation 1 9 Table 1 3 Alarm Relay Connections Rear Panel Connector J17 Pin Number Function Relay State 1 Minor Alarm 2 Common CO 2 Major Alarm 2 Common CO 3 Spare 4 Spare 5 Major Alarm 2 Deenergized NO 6 Major Alarm 1 Deenergized NO 7 Minor Alarm 2 Deenergized NO 8 Minor Alarm 1 Deenergized NO 9 Major Alarm 1 Common CO 10 Spare 11 Minor Alarm 1 Common CO 12 Major Alarm 2 Energized NC 13 Major Alarm 1 Energized NC 14 Minor Alarm 2 Energized NC 15 Minor Alarm 1 Energized NC The main harness backplane current rating is 1 4 A maximum Any dc or ac voltage supplied by a power supply through the alarm port connector J17 should be fused accordingly Failure to fuse the alarm port connector can result in severe damage to the TMS 3000 main harness backplane GDC 036R303 000 1 10 Shelf Installation TMS 3000 Controller Interface Connections Asynchronous GDC 028H303 cable connects serial Port 1 of the Controller to connector J20 on the TMS 3000
161. ches in the OFF position Note S1 7 should be On if using GTS V2 2 0 or later Off if using an earlier version For 2 version cards the factory setting is Off For 3 version cards the factory setting is On GDC 036R303 000 Common Card Installation 2 43 Figure 2 20 Channel Interface Card Option Location The CIC GDC 036P304 002 003 assembly contains a factory adjustment Switch S2 that is used only for production testing Use of the S2 may cause erroneous data transfers or complete node failure Switch S2 should never be changed in the field It controls a critical factory adjustment option which is set only when the PCB assembly is installed in a specialized test fixture at the factory The purpose of Switch S2 is to fine tune the turn on and turn off times of the fast bus circuit Improper adjustment of this switch can cause erroneous data transfers between common cards and possible node failure Channel Module Installation All Data and Voice Channel Modules are installed in Expansion Shelves Channel connections are made to 25 pin channel connectors J1 through J16 at the rear of the expansion shelf Refer GDC 036R303 000 2 44 to the Network Documentation Package supplied with your system to determine the placement of each channel module in the Expansion Shelf Expansion Module The Expansion Module has one option that selects which shelf
162. cified voltage levels The control signals operate at E A TIA 232 E levels If your channel application requires RS 422 or RS 423 level control signals you need an external Channel Interface Adapter Option selections for the Channel Interface Adapter are described in Table 3 22 Table 3 22 EIA RS 422 423 Channel Interface Adapter Option Selection Feature Selection Switch S Jumper X Desig Position Application Data Communication Equipment DCE or Data Terminal Equipment DTE Connections Adapter Connected to Data Communication Equipment 51 1 51 2 DCE DCE Adapter Connected to Data Terminal Equipment DTE DTE When this adapter is connected to data communication equipment modems mul tiplexers etc Switches S1 1 and S1 2 must be set in the DCE position When the adapter is connected to data terminal equip ment CRTs printers CPUs etc Switches S1 1 and S1 2 are set in DTE position NOTE These designations are the re verse of the DTE and DCE designations for the Data II Channel module Program plug PP1 must also be positioned for DTE or DCE This is done by position ing the plug so that the notch in the plug is adjacent to the DTE or DCE silkscreen markings on the card The Data Channel module must be set for a DTE interface EIA RS 422 or EIA RS 423 Inter face RS 422 422 422 422 RS 423 423 423 423 To select an RS 422 s
163. connects and a minimum controller configuration that includes the local controller and the master controller This dummy network serves as a token to receive download from the master The name of the dummy network must be the same as the current on line net work at the master Controller configuration contains the following information Name of each controller in the network Name and address of the node to which each controller connects Controller priority for each controller Controller priority number defines the order in which a subordinate controller can become the new master controller in the event of a network separation Phone numbers used for dial backup functionality if required GDC 036R303 000 6 2 Redundant Controllers Primary User vs the Master Subordinate Controller The primary user of a TMS 3000 network can relocate the mastership from one controller to an other From the master controller you can Modify on line configuration data Initiate a download On either the master or subordinate controller the following tasks can be performed provided that access is granted via the log in user password protection Modify off line network configuration data Examine configuration data either on line or off line network Examine status of controllers Examine network status Run diagnostics Use the mail facility to pass information between users at different controllers
164. contains two ports Each port is dedicated to a backplane connector using a specific pinout arrangement Since these ports are separate they do not provide a diverse backup to each other In a redundant situation the ACM I O ports are dedicated to one of the DB 25 connectors on the backplane A redundant or non redundant ACM in any slot has a standard aggregate pinout Refer to Table 2 10 to see the ACC connections The ACM aggregate pinout is Pins 2 and 14 Transmit Data and Pins 3 and 16 Receive Data GDC 027H201 provides a standard connection to T1 lines Figure 2 16 shows how the DB 25 aggregate pinout configuration appears for a pair of redundant ACMs Table 2 26 provides DB 25 aggregate pinout connectors for a pair of redundant ACMs Upper DB 25 Slots 1 15 Odd Connector J1 Slots 2 16 Even gt 14 3 VO Port 16 RCVB A ACMs configured as a redundant pair or one non redundant ACM with adjacent slot empty Upper DB 25 Connector J1 XMT A RCV B Lower DB 25 Connector J2 B ACMs configured as a non redundant ACM with the adjacent slot occupied Figure 2 16 DB25 BP Connector for ACM Module GDC 036R303 000 Common Card Installation 2 37 Table 2 26 Aggregate Cable Connections Configuration Connector Pins Y Cable ACM Port Redundant Upper DB 25 2 14 3 16 Not Used Even or Odd Slot Port A Non Redundant Upper DB 25 2 14 3 16 Not Used Even slot Lower DB 25 2 14 3 16 N
165. ct a limited range entry move the cursor to the desired field and press the Enter key re peatedly until the desired parameter appears When you move the cursor to a limited range entry field the field is highlighted in white and the characters are displayed in blue CRT Link An interactive control port for the TMS 3000 Controller may be extended to a remote site This application uses the CRT link facility to control TMS 3000 through a remote operator s CRT Connections at the TMS 3000 Controller site are made to Serial Port 1 at the back of the control ler Typically amodem link connects the port to a NETCON I O or MEGAVIEW port at another site Refer to NETCON CRT Link GDC 058R675 for detailed information concerning NETCON CRT Link The remote operator terminal supports all functions of the Controller keyboard Keys F1 through F10 and F12 on the remote keyboard perform operations equivalent to those of the Controller keyboard when used with the Controller The Controller is a single user system You cannot use the Controller interface and the CRT Link interface simultaneously If you log in through a CRT Link interface while another person is using the Controller console the screen indicates that the software is busy on tty GDC 036R303 000 4 12 Operation To ensure that only one user is logged in to the controller at one time follow these procedures when using the CRT Link to operate the TMS 3000 network 1 Selec
166. ct to your TMS Controller through your LAN by typing telnet address You see a login prompt Log in as GTS This immediately kills GTS on the TMS Controller and GTS runs on your remote terminal session Once the title screen appears on your remote terminal you have three minutes to log into a network When you are done log out to the GDC title screen Your remote session is killed and the TMS Controller once again gains control Additional Printer Port Installation To use two printers simultaneously with the TMS Controller add the optional Serial Parallel Card HP 24540B GDC S 076P022 001 To install this card perform the following steps 1 2 3 4 Remove jumpers on P1 P4 serial A B C D Place jumper for PAR 2 on P 2 Place mode jumper on AT Install the HP 24540B card in the Controller Alternatively you may use the BOCA I OATSS serial parallel adapter To install this card per form the following steps 1 2 3 4 5 Ensure that all jumpers are removed from header J5 On J4 place a jumper on the pins labeled LPT and 0278 On J4 place a jumper on the pins labeled LPTINT and IRQS Remove the the supplied DB 25 cable and bracket assembly not used Install the IO AT55 card in the Controller To utilize this port inthe Controller Maintenance screen select Configure Parallel Ports and configure LP2 GDC 036R303 000 B Technical Characteristics Table B 1 Technical Characteristics
167. cted to any modification in any material way not au thorised by British Telecomm or Telecomm Eireann Misuse of the equipment by external software control or unconventional interconnection of auxiliary equipment in such a way as to contravene relevant designated standards and regulatory specifications shall invalidate the at tachment approval Part 3 Attachment Information UK When completing the enclosed form for telecommunications attachment the following details must be inserted for this equipment MODEL NUMBER TMS 3000 ATTACHMENT APPROVAL No NS 1132 123 H 452743 AUTHORISED FOR CONNECTION Megastream 2 private circuits Kilostream X21bis V 28 private circuits Kilostream X21bis V 35 private circuits Kilostream X21 V 11 private cir cuits The PSTN utilising PCM and AD PCM encoding GDC 036R303 000 D Agency Rules and Regulations D 3 Part 4 Attachment Information Republic Of Ireland MODEL NUMBER TMS 3000 ATTACHMENT APPROVAL NO AUTHORISED FOR CONNECTION TELECOMMUNICATION ATTACHMENT DETAILS GENERAL DATACOMM LIMITED Molly Millars Close Molly Millars Lane WOKINGHAM Berkshire RG11 2QF Telephone Wokingham 0734 774868 Facsimile 0734 774871 SUBSCRIBER S PROCEDURE IF THERE IS NO APPROPRIATE TELECOMMUNICATION CONNECTION POINT WITH IN 3 METERS OF THE SITING OF THIS EQUIPMENT DISPATCH THIS FORM TO YOUR LOCAL TELEPHONE AREA OFFICE AS A REQUEST FOR SERVICE CONNECTION FOR GENERAL DATACOMM PRODUCT SUPPOR
168. ction for each application Options are described in Table 2 13 Figure 2 8 shows the physical location of the jumpers on the card The primary functions of the T1 D4 piggyback include the transmission and reception of the aggre gate data stream as well as the insertion and detection of the D4 framing and synchronization pat terns The T1 D4 piggyback is also capable of local and remote alarm status reporting These alarm status lines are currently monitored on the TMS system GDC 036R303 000 Table 2 13 Common Card Installation 2 19 T1 D4 Piggyback Card 036P315 003 Option Selections Feature Clock Selection External Internal Jumper Desig Jumper Pos EXT INT Application The EXT position selects the external clock supplied directly from the aggregate inter face of the TMS 3000 ACC The phase lock loop of the T1 D4 piggyback card is by passed in EXT mode With X1 in the INT position timing is selected from the output of the phase lock loop on the T1 D4 piggyback card When is used in a TMS 3000 leave X1 in the EXT mode Master Slave Timing Master Slave 2 2 This option selects an input to the phase lock loop on the T1 D4 piggyback card At a mas ter timing node select M so that the external timing signal from the node is applied to the phase lock loop Ata slave timing node se lect S so that timing from the aggregate link is applied to the phase l
169. cularly important in rural areas Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate Deutschland Installations Anweisungen Installieren Sie die Telefonleitungen nicht w hrend eines Gewitters Installieren Sie die Telefonleitungen nicht in einem feuchten Raum aufer die Dose entspricht den Vorschriften f r Feuchtr ume Ber hren Sie unisolierte Telefonleitungen oder Einrichtungen nicht aufer diese sind vom Telefonnetz getrennt Vorsicht bei der Installierung oder Anderung von Telefonleitungen Achtung Es gibt keine durch den Benutzer zu wartende Teile im Ger t Wartung darf nur durch qualifiziertes Personal erfolgen Registration Status Port ID SOC FIC USOC Preface Scope This manual describes how to install and configure a Transport Management System TMS 3000 and explains how to monitor and manage network devices This documentation is written for operators and installers and assumes a working knowledge of data communications equipment Organization There are major organizational revisions to this issue of the manual Overview material that was previously in Chapter 1 has been put in anew manual Technical Overview for TMS 3000 GDC 036R304 000 System Initialization information including TMS Controller setup XENIX loading and GTS software loading which was in the 0
170. d automatically XX XX XXXX month 0 12 day 01 31 year 199X The rest of the Setup Configuration Program reflects settings that were entered at the factory If these settings agree with your system configuration there is no reason to change them Change only the reverse video selections that do not reflect your system configuration Also if you add to your system these settings must be changed to reflect the additions In the remaining fields use The arrow keys to move from one field to another The Space Bar and Backspace keys to make a selection in the field Your selection is locked in when you move to a new field The Esc escape key to exit from the program when you are finished These are the choices you can make DST Daylight Savings Time Select Enabled Base Memory Size Choose 640K of base memory Expansion Memory Choose 4096K of expansion memory Floppy Drive 0 Indicates the size of the first floppy drive Your computer is shipped from the factory with a 1 44 Megabyte 3 5 inch drive Floppy Drive 1 Optional an extra drive can mount here Boot Drive Choose Floppy then Hard Disk Video Display Select Enhanced Graphics Video Refresh Rate Select the entry that describes the power line frequency in your area In the United States it is typically 60 Hz If you have the wrong setting the video screen flickers Speed Select Fast mode Hard Disk Drive 0 This sec
171. d for the channel the external timing signal from pin 24 of the channel connector appears here If DTE interface is selected the receive timing signal from pin 15 of the chan nel connector appears here Signal Ground for all measurements Figure 4 10 Data III Channel Module Front Panel GDC 036R303 000 Operation 4 21 In Svce Chan Alm Out Int Ext Gnd g me LED LED LED LED Test Point Test Point Test Point Test Point Test Point Description Amber LED lights when transmit data into a channel is a space Amber LED lights when receive data out of the channel is a space Green LED lights when the channel is entered in the currently active TMS configuration This indicates that the card is either operating or prepared to operate according to the parameters entered for that channel in the active con figuration Red LED lights when an alarm condition exists in the channel Alarm descrip tions are in GDC 036R603 Vnnn Test point for transmit data into the channel Test point isolated through a 10K ohm resistor Test point for receive data out of the channel Test point isolated through a 10K ohm resistor Test point for internal clock used to process and transfer data between the channel card and the CIC Test point for external clock If DCE interface is selected for the channel the external timing signal from pin 24 of the channel connector appears h
172. d the CIC Ext Test Test point for external clock If DCE interface is selected for the channel the Point external timing signal from pin 24 of the channel connector appears here If DTE interface is selected the receive timing signal from pin 15 of the chan nel connector appears here Gnd Test Signal Ground for all measurements Point Figure 4 9 Data Channel Module Front Panel GDC 036R303 000 4 20 Operation Out In Svce Chan Alm Out Int Ext Gnd ro i LED LED LED LED Test Point Test Point Test Point Test Point Test Point Description Amber LED lights when transmit data into a channel is a space Amber LED lights when receive data out of the channel is a space Green LED lights when the channel is entered in the currently active TMS configuration This indicates that the card is either operating or prepared to operate according to the parameters entered for that channel in the active cont figuration Red LED lights when an alarm condition exists in the channel Alarm de scriptions are in GDC 036R603 Vnnn Test point for transmit data into the channel Test point isolated through a 10K ohm resistor Test point for receive data out of the channel Test point isolated through a 10K ohm resistor Test point for internal clock used to process and transfer data between the channel card and the CIC Test point for external clock If DCE interface is selecte
173. dalone Enclosure w CCM N R 1220 Shelf w CCM N R 1320 Shelf w CCM Redundant OCM TMS 1000 2000 LIM Cards 036M410 002 036P436 002 036P436 001 036P437 001 E 1 V 35 LIM V 11 LIM Subrate LIM RS232 V 28 Expansion Shelf OCM TMS 1000 2000 010M065 001 010M066 001 GDC 036R303 000 MS 1 AC Expansion Shelf 220 240V MS 1 DC Expansion Shelf EC Declaration EC Declaration Data Channel Cards 036P413 001 036P410 001 036P410 002 036P410 003 036P410 004 DDC RS 232 HS SDC RS 232 HS SDC V 35 HS SDC RS 422 HS SDC RS 423 LAN Frame Relay Cards 036M450 003 036M450 004 036M451 001 036M45 1 004 OPP Ethernet OPP Ethernet w o Packet Bus OPP Token Ring 003 non existent P N OPP Token Ring w o Packet Bus Voice Signaling 2W 4W E amp M 036M420 006 PCM ADPCM No Echo 036M420 003 PCM ADPCM w Echo 036M420 028 CELP No Fax 036M420 025 CELP w Fax Voice Signaling 2W FXS 036M420 004 2W FXS ADPCM No Echo 036M420 001 2W FXS ADPCM w Echo 036M420 026 036M420 023 Spares and Options 036M040 004 CCM 4 036M040 005 CCM 5 TMS 3000 Compact Shelf 036M357 001 036M357 002 TMS Compact w ESCC N R TMS Compact w ESCC Redundant Module Interface 036P041 001 EIF E RS232 V 24 TMS 3000 Channel Cards 036M078 005 Hyper UDC 422 036M078 006 Hyper UDC V 35 TMS 3000 Options 036P365 001 Universal I O red 036P351 001
174. dded controller is not recognized by its local node then you need to login To remove a controller from the network 1 Disconnect the target controller from the network 2 Delete the target controller from the controller configuration on the master controller Moving a Controller from one Node to Another To move a controller from one node to another node in the same network as long as both nodes are configured as controllers in the network configuration do the following 1 Unplug the controller from the node 2 Wait forthe Controller Link Level port 0 10 inoperative alarm 3 Logout of the on line network GDC 036R303 000 6 6 Redundant Controllers 4 Connect the controller to the new node 5 Log into the on line network Changing a Network TMS 3000 supports three networks Only the CCN Current Control Network has automatic en forcement of data consistency among controllers CCN is defined as the current on line network at the master When you change the on line network from the CCN to another on the master a message appears on the screen It warns that a massive download may follow between the master and subordinate controllers when such a switch 1s made When the subordinate detects the on line network is being changed on the master it logs you off automatically A message appearing on the screen warns you anetwork change is in progress and to wait for its completion When the network change has comple
175. ddress Type no andpress Enter At the prompt Interface 3comBO0 broadcast address Z 9 This default address is derived from what you entered for an IP address NOTE Press Enter or change to suit your system At the prompt Interface 3comBO0 netmask 255 255 255 0 Press Enter or change to suit your system At the prompt Would you like TCP started automatically when the system goes multi user Type no andpress Enter Remove the floppy disk from the drive You must now doa Normal Controller Shutdown in order for these changes to take effect The installation is now complete Contact your Network Administrator to arrange for a physical hook up to your LAN After the Controller has rebooted press lt ALT F2 gt and log in as root Type tcp start andpress Enter If the card is installed correctly and your network is working you see no error messages If there are error messages you must resolve them with your Network Administrator before continuing You must always type tcp stop before shutting down the TMS Controller Z 9 using the Controller Maintenence functions You must be loggedinas root to do this on the ALT F2 screen NOTE GDC 036R303 000 Options Using Your Ethernet Connection to run GTS Remotely 9 You If you have previously disabled Autologin on the TMS Controller you must re enable it before performing the following steps NOTE Leave your TMS controller on the GDC title screen Conne
176. de Nominal Input Levels 16 dBm or 0 dBm switch selectable 6 0 to 1 5 dB of compensation available in 0 5 dB steps switch selectable Nominal Output Levels 0 dBm or 7 dBm switch selectable 6 0 to 1 5 dB of compensation available in 0 5 dB steps selected through su pervisory port interface This is an operating parameter not a transient parameter GDC 036R303 000 Technical Characteristics Table B 1 B 5 Technical Characteristics Cont Voice Channel Module Cont Voice Channel Performance PCM mode Signal to total distortion ratio as function of input level noise 3 dBm0 6 to 27 dBm0 34 dBm0 40 dBm0 55 dBm0 Signal to total distortion ratio as function of input level sine wave to 30 dBm0 40 dBm0 45 dBm0 Idle Channel Noise Cross Talk Loss Intermodulation Level Stability Frequency Response 300 to 3000 Hz 3000 to 3400 Hz Channel Gain at 800 Hz Cross Talk Loss Envelope Delay Envelope Delay Distortion 500 to 600 Hz 600 to 100 Hz 1000 to 2600 Hz 2600 to 2800 Hz Voice Channel Performance ASP Mode Signal to Total Distortion Ratio Sine wave input 700 to 1100 Hz Idle Channel Noise Cross Talk Loss 26 3 dB 33 9 dB 32 2 dB 27 6 dB 12 6 dB 33 dB 27 dB 22 dB 67 dBm0p ITU T Weighted 23 dBrncO C Message Weighted 65 dB minimum 1 5 dB channel gain 35 dB maximum 10 minutes 0 2 dB 1 year 0
177. de RS 422 423 channel to aggregate interface of another TMS 3000 or TDM for mux to submux applica tion Available in 5 15 25 100 250 or 500 foot lengths 027H511 EIA TIA 232 E to Used when RS 422 423 interface is required but with EIA RS 422 423 adapter TIA 232 E controls only Cable is one foot long 027H407 RS 422 423 Tandem Used for back to back RS 422 423 or ITU T G 703 channels ITU T G 703 where channels of two tandem TDMs or TMSs are directly connected Available in 5 15 25 or 50 foot lengths 027H513 ITU T V 35 to DB 25 Used for ITU T V 35 channels Available in 15 25 or 50 cable Male Male foot lengths 027H514 ITU T V 35 to DB 25 Used for ITU T V 35 channels when V 35 cable is custom adapter er supplied Available in 1 foot length 028H311 EIA TIA 232 E Crossover Cable used to connect EIA TIA 232 E channel to a modem 027H410 ITU T V 35 Crossover Cable used to connect V 35 channel to business equipment connector on DS 1 Shelf 027H518 RS 422 Crossover Cable used to connect an RS 422 channel to business equipment connector on DS 1 Shelf 027H521 ITU T V 35 Crossover Cable used to connect V 35 channel to a mo dem Connects to 027H514 adapter 028H415 V 54 unbalanced Used for V 54 modem application with 54M8 interface G023H004 V 28 Used for data sync channel Male to male connector G023H010 1 19 Way D M M 1 19 Way D cable Male to male connector G023H019 V 28 Sync M M V 28 Sync Ch
178. de of the transmit data pair 15 XMT CLK A Transmit clock for A 16 RCV DATA B The B side of the receive data pair 17 RCV CLK A The receive clock for A 19 XMT CLK B The transmit clock for B 20 V 5V 24 EXT TIMA The external transmit clock for A GDC 036R303 000 Connector Pin Assignments 8 4 Table 8 7 RS 422 423 MIL 188 114 Interface To Aggregate LineTransceiver 25 Pin Connector Pin Assignments Pin No Signal Name Description 1 Gnd Chassis Ground 2 XMTDATA A The A side of the transmit data pair 3 RCV DATA A The A side of the receive data pair 4 V 5V 12 EXT TIM B External transmit clock for B 13 RCV CLK B The receive clock for B 14 XMT DATA B The B side of the transmit data pair 15 XMT CLK A Transmit clock for A 16 RCV DATA B The side of the receive data pair 17 RCV CLK A The receive clock for A 19 XMT CLK B The transmit clock for B 20 V 5V 24 EXT TIM A The external transmit clock for A Table 8 8 EIA TIA 232 E Interface To Aggregate LineTransceiver 25 Pin Connector Pin Assignments Pin No Signal Name Description 1 Gnd Chassis Ground 2 XMT DATA Transmit data 3 RCV DATA Receive data 4 V 12V 7 SIG Gnd Signal Ground 15 XMT CLK Transmit clock 17 RCV CLK Receive clock 20 V 12V 24 EXT TIM External terminal timing 25 V 12V GDC 036R303 000 Connector Pin Assignments 8 5 Table 8
179. difference of less than 0 25 V rms as measured by a high impedance digital multimeter or equivalent exists between the grounding circuits of the respective power outlets GDC 036R303 000 1 6 Shelf Installation TMS 3000 incorporates internal fused links which may open if the ground potential exceeds 0 25 V rms between this unit and equipment interfaced with this unit Do not apply power to the TMS 3000 until you have finished connecting it to peripheral equipment Fused links on the TMS 3000 are located on the rear of the harness card Each interface circuit both channel and aggregate contains a fused link between the chassis ground earth connector pin Pin 1 of the 25 pin connector and the chassis ground circuit of the TMS 3000 Each link is located directly below each 25 pin connector Each link appears as an extremely thin solder line with one end connected to the chassis ground plane on the harness card Fused links that have opened because of excessive ground currents between equipment can be restored as follows 1 Normalize the potential difference between associated grounding circuits to less than 0 25 V rms as measured with a high impedance digital multimeter or equivalent 2 Disconnect all power connections 3 Restore fused link with a single strand of No 32 to 40 AWG gauge copper wire No 32 is the standard strand of seven strand No 24 gauge wire Solder the single strand to the appro priate terminals on the r
180. displayed and used concurrently with other MEGAVIEW operations and allows the TMS Controller to be an Element Manager that may also provide management of Virtual Private Networks VPNs The primary benefit to you is that training on the original TMS system is not wasted as the TMS related routines operate exactly as before An additional benefit is that the control of both MEGAVIEW and TMS routines is consolidated onto one display Centralized Network Management MEGAVIEW maintains a centralized approach to network management in which one or more TMS controllers are used as Element Managers or for VPNs and can be displayed on the MEGAVIEW console You benefit by constructing a centralized management scheme yet still allowing TMS network visibility from a secondary console Concurrent Views of Network Events by deploying the MEGAVIEW graphics interface and the TMS text oriented screens such as Network Diagnostics you can simultaneously monitor a network problem from two perspectives You gain a more thorough analysis of intermittent prob lems affecting network performance Enhanced Security Access TMS provides security access as before At the MEGAVIEW lev el you have additional security access by function s very similar to the security access capabil GDC 036R303 000 Options A 5 ities provided in TMS The resultant benefit to you is that operators can be assigned access to functions in a virtually unlimited fashion
181. dress Switches SW 9 through SW 11 as follows SW 9 SW 10 SW 11 ON ON ON 6 Set the Interrupt IRQ at IRQ11 You have to set Switch SW6 of DS2 to ON the rest of the switches remain OFF SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW 4 SW 5 SW 6 SW 7 SW 8 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 7 Install the card in any 32 bit slot Install the fastening screw 8 Replace the outer casing of the TMS Controller 9 Turn the power on and respond to the boot prompts 10 Install the TMS 3000 software according to the installation instructions in Chapter 6 of this manual Digiboard DigiChannel MC 8i Overview IBM PS 2 19 2K Hz synchronous communications between the TMS Controller and the Enhanced System Control Card ESCC is supported in GTS software The DigiChannel MC 8i is an expansion I O card which when installed in an IBM PS 2 Controller provides eight asynchronous commu nication ports and one synchronous communication port DigiBoard DigiChannel MC 8i Installation The following procedure describes the installation of the DigiChannel MC 8i card and its DIP switch settings Install the card as follows 1 Shut down XENIX and turn the power off in the controller 2 Remove the outer casing of PS 2 GDC 036R303 000 A 4 Options 3 Jumper settings are briefly described here For more detailed information refer to the In stallation Guide Reference Manual from DigiBoard 4 There are two sets of jumpers on the card One set consists of o
182. dules Table 3 31 Voice II ADPCM 036M200 004 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No ADPCM 2 PCB Assembly ADPCM 2 036M251 002 PCM 2 PCB Assembly PCM 2 036P250 002 Table 3 32 Voice II ADPCM With E And M 036M201 004 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No ADPCM 2 PCB Assembly ADPCM 2 036M25 1 002 PCM 2 PCB Assembly PCM 2 036P250 002 EAM 1 PCB Assembly EAM 1 036P252 001 Table 3 33 Voice II ASP 16K 036M259 001 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No ASP Base Card 036P255 002 ASP Piggyback 036P259 001 Table 3 34 Voice II ASP Multi 036M259 002 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No ASP Base Card 036P255 002 ASP Piggyback 036P259 002 Voice II CVSD and ASP Channel Interface Connections Connections for voice channels are determined by the type of telephone equipment with which the voice channel interfaces The requirements of various voice termination systems are too detailed to be covered thoroughly by this manual use information from the Network Documentation Package and manuals for associated telephone equipment to determine the connection requirements of your system In this manual telephone equipment that connects to voice channels falls into three basic categories Automatic Ringdown Circuits Direct Connections to PBX Circuits Tellabs and Other Voice Termination Systems Tellabs is the standard
183. e ACM Framing method Frame structure ACM Port Capability ACM module compatibility ACM channel capacity ACM line rate PLL Jitter Tolerance ADPCM voice rates Input Output Ports Signaling Types Network Channel Signaling Conditioning Types Bit oriented proprietary to Byte oriented DSO D4 T1 D4E CEPT G 732 DPBX DACS Network or D4 devices Full TMS 3000 compatibility Up to 24 voice circuits compressed via GDC ADPCM compression techniques across a single DS 1 line Up to 30 voice circuits E1 only compressed via GDC ADPCM compression techniques across a single DS1 line T1 DS1 1 544 Mbps ACM EI G 704 and G 732 2 048 Mbps Meets ATT Pub 62411 specification 64 32 24 and 16 Kbps One DS1 port supports up to 34 DSO channels per ACM TI One DS1 port supports up to 30 DSO channels CEPT G 732 per ACM E1 Robbed Bit G 704 CAS Channel 16 Message Oriented Common Channel Signaling CCS In Band Signaling SF Tone type No ABCD Signaling Inband or CCS 2 State Signaling A or E M ACM or UVC 4 State Signaling A B to ACM 16 State Signaling A B C D to ACM only A0 B0 On Hook A0 B1 On Hook No ringing for FXS Loop Start and FXO Ground Start 0 1 0 1 On Hook then Off Hook 1 0 1 1 0 1 Off Hook then Hook Flash A1 B1 Off Hook or Disconnect Blocked ITU T A1 0 B1 Off Hook then On Hook No ringing for FXS Ground Start GDC 036R303 000 C TMS 3000 Mainte
184. e One bit of data is conveyed by every clock bit on this bus Physically it spans across the Main Harness Card FX See Foreign Exchange Intelligent Automatic Rerouting IAR A Controller function that automatically determines proper routing of circuits around any failed node or facility IP Internetworking Protocol ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network Isochronous A method for transmitting asynchronous data by synchronous means A transmission format where the asynchronous characters 1 e those delineated with Start and Stop bits are sent with a clocking connection between the transmitter and receiver GDC 036R303 000 viii Preface ITU T International Telecommunications Union Telecommunications Standardization Sector A com mittee that sets international communications standards LAN Local Area Network LAN TMS Local Area Network Transport Management System A network managed system for integrating multiple local area networks LANs into a single communications network Link A transmission path between two stations channels or parts of a communication s system Main Harness Card or Main Harness Backplane This assembly is covered by the back panel of the Main Shelf It contains the external connectors used by all the modules in the Main Shelf Three buses on the Main Harness Card enable the modules to communicate with each other These three buses are the Fast Bus the MP Bus or Communi
185. e cursor reaches the topmost position on the screen it wraps to the bot tom of the screen when you press the key again Cursor Left This key moves the cursor to the left between each modifiable parameter field on the screen When the cursor reaches the leftmost position on the screen it wraps to the right side of the screen and also moves up to the next row of modifiable fields Within a character string field the cursor moves only to the left until it reaches the leftmost char acter position of the field You must use the up or down cursor to exit the field Cursor Down This key moves the cursor down to the next lowest modifiable parameter field on the screen If the cursor reaches the bottom field it wraps to the top of the field when you press the Cursor Down key This key also moves the cursor out ofa character string field When the cursor leaves the field the character string is complete until you reenter that field GDC 036R303 000 4 6 Operation RT PAGE iid as A Figure 4 3 TMS 3000 Controller Editing and Cursor Position Keys Cursor Right This key moves the cursor to the right between each modifiable parameter field on the screen When the cursor reaches the rightmost position on the screen it wraps to the left side of the screen and also moves down to the next row of live fields Within a character string field the cursor moves to the right only until it reaches the rightm
186. e hard disk drive and is referred to as a disk based manual The disk based manual provides Menu driven selection Cursor position selection method Option to have information displayed on the Controller CRT screen or printed from the Controller printer port See Chapter 5 of this manual for instructions on bringing up the system and gaining access to the disk based manual GDC 036R303 000 4 2 Operation Figure 4 1 TMS 3000 Controller GDC 036R303 000 Operation 4 3 Function Keys The function keys located at the top of the keyboard and labeled F1 through F12 are the primary means of selecting and exiting from TMS 3000 routines The keys also step between display pag es within a routine These keys are illustrated in Figure 4 2 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F12 s F1 Next Backup Advance Test Help DEL RD F10 F11 Shut pecial Help Display Display Page Page Function Screen Status Abort Audible Figure 4 2 TMS 3000 Controller Function Keys The following describes each function key F1 Special This key functions similarly to a shift key on a keyboard It selects an alternate function for any function key or keys in the numeric key pad Whenever the Special key must be used to obtain an alternate key function this is indicated F2 Help This key selects Help screens for the function keys and the numeric keypad
187. e lengths and number of connectors on each card are different to accommodate the number of expansion shelves configured for each channel group Figure 2 24 shows two Flex Cards mounted in a TMS 3000 with three expansion shelves Turn the power off in the TMS 3000 when installing the Flex Card To install the Flex Card assembly in the main shelf cabinet first determine the length of ribbon ca ble needed to run from the main shelf to the first expansion shelf Figure 2 24 lists two cable num bers on the first expansion shelf under the main shelf These cables are 2 5 feet long Longer lengths are available if required refer to Table 2 31 Next loosen all the expansion shelves in the cabinet so that the shelves move freely Now determine the length of the Flex Card needed using Figures 2 24 and 2 25 The top number is the assembly that mounts to the left hand side the bottom number is the assembly that mounts on the right hand side GDC 036R303 000 2 48 Common Card Installation FRONT VIEW 029 H61 2 006 029 H61 0 003 03 6P09 0 001 03 6P09 0 001 03 6P09 1 001 03 6P09 1 001 029H61 4 002 036P09 0 001 03 6P09 1 001 029H61 0 002 029H61 6 006 Main Shelf 03 6P09 0 001 03 6P09 1 001 02 6P09 2 001 03 6P09 3 001 03 6P09 2 001 03 6P090 001 036 09 1 001 03 6P09 4 001 02 6P09 5 001 029 H61 3 009 029 H61 1 005 036P093 001 03 6P09 0 001 03 6P09 0 001 03 6 09 4 001 03 6P09 1 001 03 6P09 1 001 02 6
188. e packages List the available packages List the files in a package Install a single file Select a new set to customize Display current disk usage OF MN Help GDC 036R303 000 5 30 System Initialization Select an option or enter q to quit Select option 1 A list appears Using uppercase letters type BASE LPR DOS LINK PressEnter The installation program prompts for the necessary volume numbers Insert the appropriate diskettes and follow the screen prompts 4 Afterthe last package is loaded select option 3 to list the packages that have been installed Verify that all three packages were successfully loaded If one or more are missing try re installing the appropriate packages Complete your hard disk initialization by entering q at the main menu A message appears about booting the system You then see no Normal System Shutdown EK Safe to Power Off WU Hit Any Key to Reboot The system shuts down Remove any floppy that is in the drive If you have engaged the Caps Lock key to type the preceding upper case package names disengage the Caps Lock key now 5 Press any key to reboot the system and press Ent er when the boot prompt appears XENIX System V Boot Loading Informix Software You must now install the INFORMIX data base package 1 Simultaneously hold down the Control key and D key Ctrl D 2 Enter the correct time in the proper
189. e with RS 422 Interface 036M048 002 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Interface Set RCV XMT RS 422 036M047 002 Data II Channel PC Assembly 036P236 001 Table 3 3 Data II Channel Module with RS 423 Interface 036M048 003 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Interface Set RCV XMT RS 423 036M047 003 Data II Channel PC Assembly 036P236 001 GDC 036R303 000 Channel Card Installation Table 3 4 Data II Channel Module with V 35 Interface 036M048 004 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Interface Set RCV XMT V 35 Data Channel PC Assembly 036M047 004 036P236 001 Table 3 5 Data Channel Module with EIA TIA 232 E Interface 036M058 001 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Interface Set RCV XMTR EIA TIA 232 E Data III Channel PCB Assembly 036M047 001 036P236 004 Table 3 6 Data III Channel Module with RS 422 Interface 036M058 002 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Interface Set RCV XMTR RS 422 Data III Channel PCB Assembly 036M047 002 036P236 004 Table 3 7 Data III Channel Module with RS 423 Interface 036M058 003 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Interface Set RCV XMTR RS 423 Data III Channel PCB Assembly 036M047 003 036P236 004 Table 3 8 Data III Channel Module with
190. ear when using the 81 or 81 card If only one serial port is installed in the Controller the Digiboard port numbers begin at 01 Port 01 on the Digiboard cable corresponds to either Port 02 or Port 01 on the screen If installed Ports 00 and 01 are used for the TMS Controller and other functions such as VT100 dial backup TTY login etc Digiboard ports are used for other applications Application Defines what the port is being configured for Port 0 selections are Network I O or Not in Use Port 01 selections are Dial Backup Local TTY Dialin TTY and Not in Use The choices you can select for Ports 02 07 are Dial Backup Local TTY Dialin TTY Not in Use MEGAVIEW MEGAVIEW DU Audible Alarm Sync and VT100 Communication Mode Defines the serial communication parameters of the I O port Chooses if this is asynchronous 7 or 8 data bits 1 or 2 stop bits and even odd or no parity GDC 036R303 000 Operation Data Rates Defines the speed bits per second in which the I O port communicates to an external device Se lections are 300 1200 2400 4800 and 9600 Hz Ports configured for Network I O cannot be modified Security This field defines an error checking method the controller uses You have two methods CRC 16 Cyclic Redundancy Check 16 bits and LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check More information on configuring the serial I O ports is found in Chapter 42 of GDC 036R603 Vnnn Installation and configuration of a MEG
191. ear of the harness card 4 Reconnect power connections and resume normal operations When several cabinets are installed together use a copper braided ground strap be tween the cabinets to ensure sufficient grounding Compliance With Subpart J Part 15 of FCC Rules For full compliance with Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC rules governing radiated RF energy from computing devices use shielded cables with metal hooded connectors for all TMS 3000 aggregate and channel connections Each cable hood must make firm contact with TMS 3000 frame ground At the end of the cable hood are two screws that should be screwed in firmly to make ground con tact The hooded cable grounding arrangement is illustrated in Figure 1 4 Follow this procedure when using customer supplied cables Unshielded cables or improperly in stalled shielded cables may interfere with nearby radio communications GDC 036R303 000 Shelf Installation 1 7 Su L e 6oooooooocoosS O p Figure 1 4 Typical Hooded Cable Grounding Arrangement Power Supply to TMS 3000 Alarm Connections Any TMS 3000 node can report power supply failures as an alarm condition to the Controller Two separate power supply failures Primary and Secondary are reported To enable node report ing of power supply failures make the following connections the metal backplane shield on the main shelf must be removed to make these connections Primary power supply Alarm
192. eature not boot software If NOTE you are not contact GDC for further instructions In the TMS Compact J6 replaces J20 and J8 replaces J42 After power up on the ESCC do not type any console keys until the in service or standby LEDs are on Hitting a key could cause an error causing the ESCC to restart again Startup with Node Control Software In this situation the node and the aggregate contain a complete set of software but do not have the correct configuration information to communicate across the aggregate In this case the con sole does not need to be booted up GDC 036R303 000 TMS 3000 Maintenance Console C 3 When either of these procedures is performed an operator at the TMS controller site should mon itor network status to confirm that the TMS Controller is communicating with the node once the procedure is complete Console baud rate is set automatically by autobaud By typing a Carriage Return the ESCC au tobauds to console rates of 1200 2400 4800 or 9600 baud By typing the Break key the ESCC autobauds again when the Carriage Return is typed The following procedure should be used if the node has loadable software and you want to recon figure the aggregate 1 Press the Return key on the console The prompt ESCC gt is displayed 2 Type and press lt Return gt The following menu is displayed HEL View Help VCH View Chan VEQ View Equipment VPT View Port Configuration MNT Re Se
193. ected selection If you have to move left to right to multiple selections you need to use the TAB key In some selection lists like the memory screen you may need to scroll up and down using the arrow keys After highlighting the entry you want press Enter 13 After all changes have been made press the F10 key At the top of the screen use the arrow keys to highlight System and press Enter At the exit window highlight Exit using the arrow keys and press Enter Highlight Save Configuration and Exit and press Enter If you were satisfied with all the selections and did not change anything exit through the Exit no change menu selection to be safe 14 Atthe yellow window press Ent er to reboot If no configuration error messages appear at the top of the screen place the SCO XENIX NI boot disk in Drive 0 and reboot Additional Notes If an optional DIGIBOARD 4E is installed it is not seen by the EISA configuration utility When you boot up after installing GTS software you see a message that the board is or is not installed It is a good idea to make a copy of this disk and use that copy to configure the system Use the DOS diskcopy utility Continue with the procedure Starting XENIX From The Boot Floppy Set Zenith 433Dh 33 MHz Setup Procedures The Zenith 433Dh comes with only one serial port For an additional serial port Com 2 you must add the HP24540B Serial Parallel Interface Card This card a
194. ed among connected redundant con trollers Currently available key features are MEGAVIEW XNET ISDN DRR OCM OPP TPP and X 50 Switching Support Utilities for Multiple Users Several screens provide communications between users in the same network A Read Controller Mail display contains information such as which node the mail originated from a date time stamp when the message was sent and the subject ofthe message Additional information on Controller Mail facilities is presented in Controller Mail Although the Controller is capable of downloading configuration data from one controller to an other the system does not support downloading of actual operational software from one control ler to another GDC 036R303 000 Redundant Controllers 6 7 Summary In this chapter we covered the use of redundant PC controllers in a TMS 3000 network What s Next The next chapter covers routine and corrective maintenance for the TMS 3000 GDC 036R303 000 7 Maintenance Overview This chapter provides routine maintenance and troubleshooting procedures for the TMS 3000 The troubleshooting information describes sequences of tests and other troubleshooting proce dures which isolate TMS 3000 failures to a single replaceable module For detailed instructions on performing a particular test refer to the Status and Diagnostics chapters in GDC 036R603 Vnnn Refer to the front panel drawings in Chapter 4 of this manual to help you develop
195. el is busy LED In Svce O In Svce Signal Green LED lights when the channel is entered in the currently active TMS LED configuration This indicates that the card is either operating or prepared tp operate according to the parameters entered for that channel in the active configuration When off the channel is out of service and the control leads are conditioned Chan LED Red LED lights when an alarm condition exists in the channel Alarm mes Alm sages are described in GDC 036R603 Vnnn VFIn Test For bridged measurement of voice channel VF input level to the transmit Point section Isolated through a 10K ohm resistor Input levels should be 0 dBm or 16 0 dBm This test point is a high impedance input and 15 not for injec tion of tones VF Out Test For bridged measurement of voice channel VF output level from the receive Point section Isolated through a 10K ohm resistor Input levels should be 0 dBm or 7 0 dBm Gnd Test Analog ground point for VF input and VF output measurement Point Figure 4 20 CELP Voice Channel Module Front Panel Summary In this chapter we covered the use of the Controller screen and keyboard Also discussed were the front panels of the TMS cards What s Next In the next chapter we cover the procedures for the initial setup of your controller Procedures for loading XENIX Informix and GTS software are also provided GDC 036R303 000 5 System Initialization Overview This chapter covers the procedur
196. ements have been met 1 Connect dc power harness on rear of main shelf assembly to the GPS 8A GPS 8B or DPS 8A The drawing package includes a wire list for the harness where you see the terminal con nections for each wire Connections to the power supply are made by inserting the wire into the appropriate power supply terminal and tightening the screw that fits into the terminal Alarm connections between the power supplies and the TMS 3000 main shelf is described later in this chapter Location of power supply connectors on the TMS 3000 Harness Card are shown in Figure 1 3 Table 1 1 lists the wire color coding for the power supply harness 2 Check that power supply Power On Power Off switch is Off If GPS 8A or GPS 8B is being used connect power cord to grounded ac outlet if DPS 8A connect to 48 V battery Refer to Instruction Manual for DPS 8A GDC 04 IR162 000 Do not apply primary power until all connections have been made and all options implemented Table 1 1 Power Supply Harness Color Codes Power Supply Harness Wire Terminal Connection Orange 12 V dc Purple 12 V dc White Red 5 V dc White Black GND GDC 036R303 000 Shelf Installation 1 5 o 50 J18 50 J17 O E HE og c NEN Figure 1 3 Power Supply Connectors on TMS 3000 Expansion Harness Card AC Power On Off Procedure for a TMS 3000 GDC products contain voltage sensing circuits that ensure that proper reset sign
197. en the TMS node and the Controller is disrupted Dial Backup establishes the link using the internal GDC 212A modem on the Redundancy Control Card or an external modem Digital Bridging A function that provides for a single channel to broadcast to multiple channels and for those chan nels to respond to the single channel In TMS 3000 the Digital Bridging Card DBC is used for this function Diversity The term for two aggregate trunk lines between the same nodes if one trunk is operational and the other is in stand by in case the first goes down Both lines are monitored for serviceability by firmware on the Aggregate Control Card Switching of the line is controlled independently at both ends by the Aggregate Control Card DLC Data Link Connection DSO Digital Signal Level 0 A single 64 kbps channel The data stream is divided into 8 bit bytes DSO is a byte oriented environment DS1 Digital Signal Level 1 A combination of 24 DSO channels and 8000 framing bits into a 1 544 Mbps data stream DSX 1 Interface An electrical interface that converts a formatted data signal into the proper signal levels for the digital 1 network Also called a cross connect DTE Data Terminal Equipment ESCC Enterprise System Control Card A card that is installed in the TMS shelf to monitor and control the activities other cards in the shelf The ESCC is responsible for several functions Permanent storage of software programs for all of t
198. ere if DTE interface is selected the receive timing signal from pin 15 of the channel connector appears here Signal Ground for all measurements Figure 4 11 Data IV Channel Module Front Panel GDC 036R303 000 4 22 Operation In Svce Chan Alm Int Ext Gnd LED LED LED LED Test Point Test Point Test Point Test Point Test Point Amber LED lights when transmit data into a channel is a space Amber LED lights when receive data out of the channel is a space Green LED lights when the channel is entered in the currently active TMS configuration This indicates that the card is either operating or prepared tb operate according to the parameters entered for that channel in the active configuration Red LED lights when an alarm condition exists in the channel Alarm de scriptions are in GDC 036R603 Vnnn Test point for transmit data into the channel Test point isolated through a 10K ohm resistor Test point for receive data out of the channel Test point isolated through f 10K ohm resistor Test point for internal clock used to process and transfer data between the channel card and the CIC Test point for external clock If DCE interface is selected for channel the external timing signal from pin 24 of the channel connector appears here If DTE interface is selected the receive timing signal from pin 15 of the channel connector appears here Signal Ground for all meas
199. es data S16 Off S16 Time slot Time Slot 16 is skipped by data 52 3 PLE On Plesiochronous Place the G 704 in the Plesiochronous Clocking Clocking Mode Mode if clocks at either end of an aggregate link are synchronized by two different master clocks or com municating via a satellite link The elastic buffer depth is set by the TER SAT S2 4 switch opera tion SYN Off Synchronous Place the G 704 in the Synchronous Clocking Mode Clocking Mode if at both ends of the aggregate link the transmit and receive clocks are synchronized to the same master clock The elastic buffer depth is set by hardware 52 4 TER On Terrestrial Elastic Only used in the plesiochronous clocking mode Se Buffer lects 256 bit elastic buffer SAT Off Satellite Elastic Used in the plesiochronous clocking mode Selects 2048 bit elastic buffer 52 5 75 On 759 Impedance Setting to 120 provides a receive data line imped ance of 120 ohms for the G 704 Setting at 75 pro 120 Off 1200 Impedance vides a receive line impedance of 75 ohms 52 6 75 On 759 Impedance Same as 52 5 120 Off 120Q Impedance S2 7 120 On 120Q Impedance Setting to 120 provides a transmit data line imped ance of 120 ohms for the G 704 Setting at 75 pro 75 Off 75Q Impedance vides a receive line impedance of 75 ohms 92 8 UNB On Unbalanced Setting to UNB provides an unbalanced line condi tion BAL Off Balanced Setting to BAL provides a balanced line condition GDC 036R303 000 2
200. es for the initial setup of your controller Procedures for loading XENIX Informix and GTS software are also provided Initial Setup The following procedure should be followed only when you first receive your controller or after moving it If software is already loaded refer to Chapter 1 System Startup in manual GDC 036R603 V220 1 Set up the Controller in accordance with the instructions from the manufacturer 2 Connect GDC 028H303 to Slot 1 of the Controller and connector J20 of the TMS 3000 Main Harness Card Youmay need to add a GDC shielded EIA TIA 232 E extension cable GDC 028H506 XXX or other that carries Pins 2 3 and 7 The two cables are combined in GDC 028H320 XXX The TMS Controller be connected directly to a modem through which it 2 communicate with NETCON at remote node ANETCON CRT link NOTE is described in GDC 058R675 and Chapter 4 of this manual When the PC is connected to the TMS 3000 through Serial Port 0 Serial Port 1 can be used to link amodem on NETCON to the PC only if the PC monitor and keyboard are not used to operate Controller software and you are logged off of the controller Serial Port 1 on the back of the PC is the leftmost I O port Serial Port 0 is to the right of Serial Port 1 3 Apply power to the Controller when all previous controller component connections are completed See Steps I and 2 Move the ON OFF switch located in the back of the system unit to ON
201. ese keys are illustrated in Figure 4 3 Insert This key functions exactly like the Ent er key in the main section of the keyboard It may be used to Select a menu item with the cursor positioned at that entry Step forward through a limited range of values Enter a response to a prompt such as Y for Yes GDC 036R303 000 Operation Home This key restores a previously entered character string to a string field while the cursor is posi tioned at that field Page Up This key deletes an entire character string in a field when the cursor is positioned at that field Delete This key deletes a single character within a character string entry The character at the current cursor position is deleted Characters to the right of the cursor shift one position to the left End In a limited range entry this key steps backward that is the reverse order from that obtained by the Enter Step Forward key through the list of selections Page Down This key when pressed alone deletes all characters from the right of the cursor to the next space in the field When pressed simultaneously with F1 it restores a word previously deleted by the Del Wrd key Cursor Position Keys The cursor position keys located below the editing keys move the cursor to desired locations in menus and displays Cursor Up This key moves the cursor in an upward direction to the next highest modifiable parameter field on the screen When th
202. esistor Network RN8 331 002 003 Digital Line Driver Adapter A digital line driver adapter is available for applications where a channel device is separated from the TMS 3000 by some distance All adapters mount in a CP 12 mounting panel and are connected to the back of the TMS 3000 shelf The Data Channel uses a 16 bit transmit and receive buffer Data Channel Module Options The following options may be selected for the Data Channel module Figure 3 1 Refer to Chapter 8 Connector Pin Assignments for Channel Connector Pin assignments NOTE GDC 036R303 000 Data IV and UDC channel modules contain several features that are available in later releases of TMS 3000 software Channel Card Installation 3 9 XPP1 XRN7 00000000 00000000 422 188 TERM DTE D T 74 OPEN OPEN DCE 422 X21 gt lt 422 8 2 oooooooo 00000000 00000000 00000000000000 o00000000000000 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1 5 O Figure 3 1 Data Channel Module Option Locations GDC 036P236 007 For the G 703 channel Figure 3 2 there are two option Jumpers X1 is OCTETALM which allows bipolar violations to be discontinued when the recei
203. ess Switches SW 1 through SW 8 of DS1 Dip Switch 1 as follows GDC 036R303 000 A 2 Options Z When the switch is closed it is ON When the switch is open it is OFF NOTE SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW 4 SW 5 SW 6 SW 7 SW 8 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 4 I O port address to 320 Hex Configure I O port address Switches SW 9 through SW 11 as follows SW 9 SW 10 SW 11 ON ON ON 5 Set the Interrupt IRQ at IRQ11 You have to set Switch SW6 of DS2 to ON the rest of the switches remain OFF SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW 4 SW 5 SW 6 SW 7 SW 8 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 6 Install the card in any 32 bit slot Install the fastening screw 7 Replace the outer casing of the TMS Controller 8 Turn the power on and respond to the boot prompts 9 Install the TMS 3000 software according to the installation instructions in Chapter 5 of this manual DigiBoard DigiChannel PC 8i Overview 386 486 19 2K Hz synchronous communications between the TMS Controller and the Enterprise System Control Card ESCC is supported in GTS software The DigiChannel 81 15 an expansion I O card which when installed in a 386 486 Controller provides eight asynchronous communica tion ports and one synchronous communication port The ESCC provides the clock for the DigiChannel PC 8i for synchronous communications DigiBoard DigiChannel PC 8i Installation The following procedure describes the in
204. etect The MM05 plug is basically the same as the MMO plug except that Data Set ready CC is held high locally whenever the channel card is in service D 05 CPU to Terminal Local CTS Wrap Figure 3 7 Channel Control Program Plugs PP2 Sheet 4 of 5 GDC 036R303 000 Channel Card Installation 3 17 Channels Channels Test Mode TM Test Mode TM p 8 Send Control 4 Send Control 4 PP2 a PP2 Carrier Detect CF 5 12 Send Control 1 Send Control 1 12 gt Carrier Detect CF In In Data Term Ready CD 2 1 1 2 Data Term Ready CD Service N l Service Request to Send CA 6 11 Rev Control 1 Rev Control 1 11 6 Request to Send CA Remote Loopback RL 13 Rcv Control 2 Rcv Control 2 13 3 Remote Loopback RL i p Local Loopback LL 8 9 Rev Control 3 Rev Control 3 9 8 Local Loopback LL 4 Data Channel Data Channel with DTE Interface with DTE Interface Channels Channels Node M Node S A send control at one node becomes a receive control at the opposite node For example Carrier Detect is selected as Send Control 1 at Node M Send Control 1 is transmitted across the link and becomes Receive Control 1 at the Node S data channel PP2 at the Node S channel interface selects Receive Control 1 and sends it through the channel interface as Request to Send E MM08 V 54 Modem to
205. etwork management control from interruption because of the single controller failure Lets you access the network from different node localities In a TMS 3000 multi controller environment only one master controller serves as the point of control for the entire network All other controllers referred to as subordinates serve as back ups and as additional access points to the network The master controller responsibility is to syn chronize its on line network configuration including data with all subordinate controllers TMS 3000 software supports up to five subordinate controllers and one master controller 9 Some performance degradation occurs as the number of subordinate controllers increases NOTE Controller and Network Configuration To start a network with multiple controllers a pre configured master and subordinate controller are required The Controller initially designated as the master should contain a complete net work and controller configurations for at least one of the three supported networks You must select the desired network as the on line network at the master After the master has finished downloading its configuration to all nodes in the network it connects the subordinates to their designated nodes A dummy network may be created at the subordinate while off line This dummy network con tains a minimum network configuration that includes the local node and remote node to which the master controller
206. f channel cards GDC 036R303 000 3 Channel Card Installation Overview The following sections describe the methods of option selection and the options provided for each TMS 3000 channel card Detailed information concerning specific positioning of option selection devices is given in anumber of tables in this chapter Individual option tables for each module have been grouped with the drawings concerning that module As with the common cards optional configurations are implemented on a channel card by means of program plugs switches jumper plugs or resistor networks Note that several channel modules are covered in separate publications Refer to the Preface for a complete list of those manuals Data Channel Modules Data Channel Module interface connections options and the TID HI module are presented in the following paragraphs figures and tables Part Numbers Connections for data channels vary according to the type of interface required for that channel i e EIA TIA 232 E RS 422 RS 423 V 35 etc Table 3 1 through Table 3 18 lists the assembly part numbers for the different interfaces Table 3 19 lists the cables provided for each interface type Table 3 1 Data II Channel Module with EIA TIA 232 E Interface 036M048 001 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Interface Set RCV XMT EIA TIA 232 E 036M047 001 Data II Channel PC Assembly 036P236 001 Table 3 2 Data II Channel Modul
207. figuration screen appears To install the hardware cables to the TMS 3000 proceed as follows GDC 036R303 000 A 6 Options 1 Locate Port 1 at the rear of the Controller Install one end of cable GDC 027H223 XXX to this port The opposite end of this cable contains a 25 pin connector that mounts into Digiboard Port 3 on the Sun Workstation This cable functions as the terminal emulator window interface Configure Port 01 on the I O Port Configuration screen as a local or remote TTY Select the baud rate on this screen 2 Locate Port 02 through 07 on the TMS 3000 Digiboard Multiport Card If you are using a DCE adapter from the TMS 3000 to the MEGAVIEW select the cable GDC 028H507 XXX If you are using a DTE adapter from the TMS 3000 to the MEGAVIEW select the cable GDC 028H313 025 Connect the RJ 45 end of the cable into the selected port The other end of the cable contains a 25 pin connector that mounts into the Digiboard Port 4 of the Sun Workstation This cable functions as the MEGAVIEW alarm interface Configure the port on the I O Port Configuration screen as MEGAVIEW Select the baud rate on this screen As an alternative an external modem can operate between the MEGAVIEW and TMS 3000 for the alarm sessions interface To connect the external modem proceed as follows 1 Locate an unused Port 02 07 on the TMS 3000 Digiboard Multiport Card Install the RJ 45 connector side of the cable GDC 027H236 XXX into this
208. format followed by Enter orjust press Enter if the time is already correct The time is based on a 24 hour clock 3 message saying cron started appears followed by xenix386 login Enter root When the password prompt appears enter your super user password 4 You see Welcome to SCO Xenix System V from The Santa Cruz Operation Inc GDC 036R303 000 System Initialization 5 31 is the super user prompt When you see this enter mkuser 5 The system prompts you with the following message Do you require detailed instructions y n q Respond n to this message 6 Enter new user login name or enter q to quit 7 Type informix followed by Enter The next prompt that appears is Do you wish to use the next available user id y n q 8 Enter y followed by Enter The next prompt that appears is Do you wish to use the default group y n q 9 Respond n followed by Enter The following prompt appears Existing groups are Group group 50 Do you want to use one of these groups 10 Respondn followed by Enter You are asked Pleas nter the name for the new group or enter q to quit 11 Type informix The new group name is informix The next prompt that appears asks Please enter number for new group press ENTER for default number or enter q to quit 12 Press Enter This selects the next default group The following menu appears 1 sh Standard
209. formix in response to this prompt The computer responds with the message Removing user CONFIRM Enter y The next message appears Do you want to remove another Enter n At the prompt simultaneously press the Ctrl and D keys to logout Follow the instructions Loading INFORMIX Software as decribed earlier in this chapter GDC 036R303 000 5 36 System Initialization Maintenance Console At a remote TMS 3000 node or any TMSC node that does not house the Controller you may need to use a separate Maintenance Console to initialize the node The Maintenance Console is used to set up a single aggregate that communicates with the master TMS 3000 node or with another node that is already communicating with the master node Once you have established communi cation configuration information can be downloaded to the node Z 9 Some of the TMS common cards ESCC ACM CDA TPP and OPP have a front monitor port for connecting the Maintenance Console The cable required for this NOTE connection is GDC 024H140 Refer to Appendix C of this manual for complete instructions on the use of the Maintenance Console Summary In this chapter we covered the procedures for installing the TMS Controller hardware and soft ware What s Next In the next chapter we cover the use of redundant controllers GDC 036R303 000 6 Redundant Controllers Overview Redundant PC controllers in a TMS 3000 network do two things Prevent the flow of n
210. frames instead of On Selects D4 twelve ESF is known as Extended Superframe Framing 51 5 LEN2 S1 5 51 6 51 7 Selects line length Clock and data extraction are improved by cable S1 6 LEN1 On Off Off 0 220 ft length transmit equalization This feature allows line lengths of up to 655 feet to be used without the SEEN VOLES customary line build out networks With line trans On Off On 440 655 ft mit equalization the pulse shape and amplitude at On Off Off 0 133 ft properly terminated receiving equipment conforms Off On On 266 399 ft to AT amp T standards The line length selections sup port a three partition arrangement for MAT and Off On Off 399 533 ft ICOT and a five partition arrangement for ABAM Off Off On 533 655 ft PULP and PIC cables Configure S1 5 6 7 to the Off Off G 704 G 732 proper length and cable type On On On 2 048 MHz CEPT NOTE 51 2 should always be in the ON position Only B8ZS or Bit 7 substitution can be enabled at a time Se lecting both functions simultaneously is not allowed NOTE S1 8 is not used and should remain in the OFF position Table 2 19 Base Card Options Switch S Jumpers X Feature Selection Desig Position Application Redundant Redundant X15 RED Proper system operation requires that the CDA module knows whether it is redundant or not Non Redundant Non Redundant X15 NON RED prior to program or configuration download CDA Module If using t
211. from the front Use the bottom number if the CIC you are connecting is on the left side of the main shelf To connect the expansion shelves in an independent cabinet From the front of the cabinets finds the cabinet and expansion shelf that corresponds to the one you are installing The number in the box is the GDC cable that you need The position of the CIC on the main shelf does not matter when installing ribbon cables Be sure to observe right and left position in relation to the main shelf cabinet Figure 2 19 TMS 3000 Ribbon Cable Configuration GDC 036R303 000 2 42 Common Card Installation Channel Interface Card Options There is only one option on the CIC It should be left in the NORM position It is described in Table 2 29 and its location is shown in Figure 2 20 Table 2 29 CIC Options Switch S Jumpers X Feature Selection Desig Position Application Watchdog Watchdog This selection is for in house testing It should be left in the NORM position Inhibit Inhibit XI INHBT Watchdog WDOG Frame Switching for frame S1 7 don t care CIC cannot switch at end of frame required software changes S1 8 Factory set See note below 51 7 Off can switch at end of frame but this capability S1 8 Factory set has been disabled S1 7 On CIC can switch at end of frame 51 8 Factory set S1 1 6 These switches are reserved for future use Leave all swit
212. g S2 Several different types of switches may be used on TMS 3000 modules Each type of switch is illustrated in Figure 2 1 A vertical or right angle switch must be set up Off or Open or down On or Closed A DIP switch must be placed On Closed or Off Open A double pole latch switch has no On or Off position Both the DIP switches and the double pole latch switches are set according to silkscreen markings on the pc card simply move the switches to the marking that indicates the desired function The option tables indicate the silkscreen marking for each option selection For vertical or right angle switches the option tables indicate On Closed or Off Open positions to select each option Jumper Plugs Jumper plugs complete different circuits when placed over certain pins of headers on a compo nent board Silkscreen markings on the board indicate the selections made by different jumper plug positions The option tables for each module provide information on the features obtained by each selection Jumper plugs are designated by the letter X and a number e g X1 Resistor Networks The Data Channel module uses resistor networks to develop the signal voltage levels required by different interface standards These networks must be changed when a channel is configured for a different interface standard Table 2 28 describes the switch jumper and resistor network re quired for each interface p oron 2 or nd ON OFF FIGURE
213. ge with the cursor and press En ter This brings you to a sub menu Use the tab and arrow keys to change the selections When changes are completed press Esc Escape key and then F10 Select Save Con 2 3 4 ay figuration and reboot the PC Settings System Board Speed Cache Boot Device System Board Video Video Settings System Board Memory Hard Drive System Controller Enabled Floppy Drive System LAN System Windows Accelerator SCSI Port Serial Port Parallel Port PS 2 Mouse Optional Serial Port V1 07 may differ Fast Cache On Floppy then Hard Drive Video Enabled EGA VGA 60HZ Slushed 8m gt 640K 7 may differ Controller Enabled Sub Menu Drive O Drive 1 Auto IDE None Floppy Drive Controller Enabled Disabled Not Present SCSI Disabled COM1 LPT1 Disabl Disabl ed ed Note that if a second serial port is added it should always be disabled Continue with the procedures Starting XENIX From The Boot Floppy Set Zenith 486DX 66MHz Z Select 100 Setup Procedures When loading software on a Zenith 486 be aware that these computers are equipped with IDE Intelligent Drive Electronics hard drives The drives are low level formatted at the factory by the manufacturer You do not have to perform a XENIX badtrack scan as the badtracks have already been identified and flagged at the factory To bypass this step type Q
214. gregate link Keep their size to a minimum when configuring the system Table 8 20 DB25 Output 25 Pin Connector Pin Assignments Pin Number Signal Name Description 1 Gnd Chassis Ground 2 XMT DATA A The A side of the transmit data pair 3 RCV DATA A The A side of the receive data pair 14 XMT DATA B The side of the transmit data pair 16 RCV DATA The B side of the receive data pair Summary This chapter provided the connector pin assignments for the various TMS 3000 cards GDC 036R303 000 A Options Overview The TMS 3000 supports both asynchronous and synchronous network communications in the GTS version 2 2 0 and later software It continues to support ASYNC Network I O through a standard serial card Port 0 or through the DigiBoard DigiChannel PC 4e card or the DigiBoard DigiChannel 81 card It supports other asynchronous applications as well such as Dial Backup Local TTY Dialin TTY and Megaview Alarm Interface These applications are sup ported through the standard serial card Port 1 or through the expansion I O card The expansion I O card could be the DigiBoard DigiChannel PC 4e card DigiBoard DigiChannel PC 8i card or DigiBoard DigiChannel MC 8i card The Synchronous Network I O is supported only by the DigiBoard DigiChannel PC 81 or MC 8i This chapter provides an overview of these cards and a description of the installation procedure DigiBo
215. gs must be manipulated from the original settings to make the drive appear that is less than 1024 cylinders This is necessary for XENIX to recognize the hard drive If these changes have been made the parameters appear below this field NOTE Below is a suggested setup These settings allow XENIX to recognize the drive but give you about 503 Mbytes of useable space on a 1 Gigabyte hard drive Number of cylinders 1022 Number of heads 16 Number of sectors 63 Maximum capacity 503 Press ESC to return to MAIN menu After returning to the main menu the following drives should be listed as Not Installed Primary IDE Slave Secondary IDE Master Secondary IDE Slave GDC 036R303 000 5 4 System Initialization Language English lt Grayed Out gt Boot Options lt Press Enter First Floppy Second Hard drive All others Disabled System prompt Enabled Type matic programming here for sub menu gt rate Default Hit lt ESC gt to return to Video Mode EGA VGA Mouse Not installed Base Memory 640KB Extended Memory 15360K the MAIN menu B May Differ 4 Press the right arrow and highlight ADVANCED on the top menu line Check the following fixed entries Processor type Pentium Family Processor speed 100 MHZ Cache size 256K Peripheral configuration Press enter here for sub menu gt Configuration mode Auto
216. he CDA as a redundant pair set this jumper to RED If using the CDA as a non redundant pair set this jumper to NON RED GDC 036R303 000 2 28 Common Card Installation a LLI oc od Lej LLI a Figure 2 11 CDA Base Card Option Locations In aredundant situation the CDA Module Input Output ports are dedicated to one of the DB25 con nectors on the backplane Port 1 goes to the upper connector of the backplane Port 2 to the lower connector Use GDC 027H201 which provides a standard connection to T1 lines If non redundant CDA Modules are used in adjacent slots the Input Output ports of each module use different pins of the same DB25 connector They split externally through a Y cable GDC 027H316 attached to the backplane The module in the primary slot uses the upper portion of the upper connector for Port 1 and the upper portion of the lower connector for Port 2 The module in the secondary slot uses the lower portion of the lower connector for Port 1 and the lower portion of the upper connector for Port 2 DB25 Pinout Configuration for a Redundant CDA Module is given in Figure 2 12 along with con figuration for a non redundant CDA Module in adjacent slots Table 2 20 contains the CDA aggre gate cable connections GDC 036R303 000 Common Card Installation 2 29 DB 25 SLOTS 1 15 ODD UPPER CONNECTOR J1 SLOTS 2 16 EVEN XMT A CDA Module DB 25 CDA Module LOWER CONNECTOR J2
217. he Ctrl and X keys simul taneously Refresh Screen Control W To refresh the screen press the Ctrl and the W keys simultaneously The reverse video disappears except when the cursor is in a prompt or string field until the next keystroke is entered Screen Format and Colors All displays of the TMS 3000 Control System are framed within a screen format and include cer tain display colors The intent of the format and color combination is to provide as much infor mation as possible concerning the current status of the system regardless of what routine is running Screen Format The Controller screen is 80 characters wide There are 25 lines from the top of the screen to the bottom of the screen The top line of the display is highlighted in green and reports the following Name of Currently Displayed Menu or Routine Current Software Version or Network Currently Displayed Current Time Date The next 20 lines are the display window or page for the TMS 3000 operating routines All menus and displays occur on these 20 lines Any display that contains too much information to fit into this window is divided into two or more pages You use the Advance Page F6 and Back up Page F5 to change pages for these displays Line 22 is reserved for system messages and prompts from the Controller The messages report error conditions and indicate intermediate processes such as Searching For Node that may delay initiation of a rou
218. he ac power cord or battery connections for system using DPS 8A dc power supply Check the power supply for a blown fuse GDC 036R303 000 Maintenance 7 5 2 Inspect tightness and integrity of all connections such as channel device cables and aggre gate line connections 3 Ifthe TMS 3000 communicates at the aggregate level but channels seem unable to pass data check the configuration entries for those channels This problem is most likely to oc cur when a new configuration is being activated 4 If channels are correctly configured and appear to function normally but do not seem to be communicating with connected channel devices check the fused link located beneath the channel connector See Chapter 1 for more details on fused links Alarms Alarms are the first indication of problems in the TMS 3000 system Alarms are divided into two categories major alarms representing failures which could disrupt system operation and minor alarms representing failures which could affect a single channel Generally common module failures are reported as major alarms and channel module failures are reported as minor alarms Alarms are reported through the Controller the Maintenance Console CRT or front panel LEDs You can also connect an additional alarm to the external alarm connector on the Main Shelf back plane For a comprehensive evaluation of the condition of a system you should note both the CRT reported alarm messages and front p
219. he common cards in the TMS 3000 network communi cations with other ESCCs and SCCs in neighboring nodes communications within the node communications with the Controller if locally connected and control of all customer traffic with in the node Supports non disruptive software downloads expanded non volatile memory better Fastbus select resolution MicroCell Transport and additional features GDC 036R303 000 Preface vii ESF Extended Superframe A modified D4 framing format The basic D4 framing structure contains 1 frame bit followed by 24 eight bit time slots or a 193 bit frame An ESF contains 24 193 bit frames ESF allows a great er amount of access to digital network services See Superframe Ethernet A LAN for connecting devices within the same building operating over twisted pair wire or co axial cable at speeds up to 10 Mbps It operates at the Physical and Data Link layers of the OSI model specifying CSMA CD Expansion Shelf Shelf that holds up to 16 Channel Modules and 2 Expansion Modules one primary one redun dant Since one Channel Interface Card can interface up to 64 channels at maximum a Channel Interface Card is connected to 4 Expansion Shelves Fan A type of full duplex circuit topography typified by multiple terminations on one end and a single termination on the other end Fast Bus The Fast Bus carries controls and data between the Channel Interface and the other common mod ules in the nod
220. he minimal XENIX system the Run Time System To install Operating System packages select option 2 and press Enter You can now proceed to the next subject Installing the XENIX Distribution Installing the XENIX Distribution This stage involves customizing your system adding only those parts of the Operating System distribution that are useful to you Choosing Packages to Install The BASE LPR LINK and DOS packages are required for the TMS 3000 installation 9 When choosing the TERMINF package you are prompted as to whether you want the terminfo data base compiled at this time a somewhat lengthy NOTE process If you choose to defer this until later you are given instructions for doing so This process takes approximately five to ten minutes to complete Installing Your Packages and Applications To install your XENIX packages proceed as follows 1 The main custom menu is displayed 1 Operating System 2 Development System 3 Text Processing System 4 Add a Supported Product Select a set to customize or enter q to quit 2 Select option 1 Operating System The following messages appear Installing custom data files Insert Operating System extended utilities Volume X1 and press Enter or enter q to quit Remove diskette B1 1f not already done and insert the diskette X1 as instructed and press Enter 3 following submenu appears Install one or more packages Remove one or mor
221. hree letter command and pressing Return Whenever a selection is made the screen is not cleared the previous displays are scrolled up ESCC gt is the normal prompt While in boot the prompt is ESCC b gt The HELP screen can be displayed with a new prompt at any time by typing HEL and pressing lt Return gt Should an unknown command or invalid data be entered and a new prompt appears 2 If you want to go to the help menu hit the and keys simultaneously NOTE System Startup This section describes the initial power up of the Console including the procedure for setting up the preliminary configuration if there is no node control software or if there has been an unex pected memory loss Node Control software is downloaded via an aggregate or J42 from the TMS Controller or directly from the TMS Controller through J20 or J42 Node Startup Procedures Two different startup procedures are described in the following paragraphs startup with boot firmware and startup with node control software Startup with Boot Firmware In this situation the program and configuration information that was factory loaded into the node has somehow been erased or for some reason was never loaded into the node In this case you must configure the aggregate sufficiently to allow the node to communicate so program and configuration information can then be downloaded 2 For the you are normally always be in full f
222. ical in a digital network Iftoo many consecutive zeros are in the aggregate data stream the system may lose synchronization B8ZS is a method used to meet the ones density constraints by taking strings of zeros converting them to ones and zeros and placing them back into the aggregate bit stream bps Bits per second transmitted or received Also referred to as Hz Bridge A device for connecting similar LANs using the data link layer MAC source and destination ad dresses contained in the data frames of all LAN traffic Buffer A storage device used to streamline data transfer when there is a slight difference in data rates caused by for example doppler shift or separate clock sources Card An assembly of components that can be tested removed and replaced as a unit A card usually refers to a single unit without piggybacks connected to it although in this manual card is usu ally used interchangeably with module GDC 036R303 000 Preface CDA Module The CDA T1 Combined Digital Aggregate Module allows the TMS 3000 using DS1 framing to operate on a DACS Network byte oriented Also available in a ITU T 2 048 Mbps version CDA E1 CELP The CELP Channel Module provides Codebook Excited Linear Prediction CELP voice encod ing algorithms that maximize voice channel bandwidth utilization The voice is compressed at rates of 4 8 Kbps 6 4 Kbps or 9 6 Kbps Channel Endpoint of a circuit path The channel is the
223. ication by a user voids the FCC registration and the warranty Canada DOC Notification The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be parti
224. ice 0 6 for rate and press Return You see 0 8 bits 1 8 bits 2 8 bits 3 7 bits 4 7 bits Enter Slave no parity even parity odd parity even parity odd parity Modify Port I O Configuration for J42 After you select MFP you see Modify Port 0 J20 1 J42 2 J19 Enter Select 1 and press RETURN You see 0 Passthru 1 Int Modem 2 Ext Modem Pulse Dial 3 Ext Modem Tone Dial If you select 0 2 or 3 and press Retum By selecting 1 the internal modem baud rate is automatically set to 1200 You see 0 Deconfigure for communications 1 300 2 1 2k 3 2 4k 4 4 8k 5 9 6k 6 19 2k GDC 036R303 000 Entry not valid for J19 TMS 3000 Maintenance Console C 15 Make selection and press lt Return gt You see 0 8 bits no parity 1 8 bits even parity 2 8 bits odd parity 3 7 bits even parity 4 7 bits odd parity Enter After selecting the parity and bits you are sent to the Slave gt prompt Modify Port I O Configuration for J19 is currently not allowed but may be available in a fu ture release To deconfigure Port J20 select Async 1 and enter 0 for the rate To deconfigure the Port J42 select either Passthru or Ext Modem and enter 0 for the rate You are then returned to the Slave gt prompt CFM Configure the External Modem This command is used to configure an external dial back modem on Port J42 After you select CFM the current configuratio
225. ier Detect CF 6 11 Rev Control 1 Rev Control 1 Carrier Detect CF aan 6 Data Channel Data Channel with DCE Interface with DCE Interface Channels Channels Node M Node S A send control at one node becomes a receive control at the opposite node For example Request to Send is selected as Send Control 1 at Node M Send Control 1 is transmitted across the link and becomes Receive Control 1 at the Node S data channel PP2 at the Node S channel interface selects Receive Control 1 and sends it through the channel interface as Carrier Detect A MMO1 CPU to Terminal Local CTS Wrap Figure 3 7 Data Channel Control Program Plugs PP2 Sheet 1 of 5 GDC 036R303 000 3 14 Channel Card Installation Channels Channels Data Term Ready CO Data Term Ready CO lt gt 1 PP2 PP2 Send Control 4 he Send Control 4 Rcv Control 4 Data Set Ready CC 15 Rev Control 4 15 2 Data Set Ready CC Clear to Send CB 4 13 Rev Control 2 Rcv Control 2 13 4 Clear to Send CB Request to Send CA 5 12 Send Control 1 Send Control 1 12 5 Request to Send CA Carrier Detect CF 6 11 Rev Control 1 Rev Control l 11 6 Carrier Detect c 10 Send Control 2 p gt Send Control 2 10 Data Channel with DCE Data Channel with DCE Interface Interface Channels Channels Node M Node
226. imes of the fast bus circuit Improper adjustment of this switch can cause erroneous data transfers between common cards and possible node failure Table 2 11 Aggregate Control Card Options Switch S Jumpers X Feature Selection Desig Pos Application Watchdog In Watchdog This selection is located the Ag hibit gregate Control Piggyback It is for Inhibit Watch XI INHIB in house testing only It should be dog W DOG left in the NORM position Redundancy Redundant X9 RED Redundancy is selected ifthe ACC is part of a redundant pair RED is se Non redundant X9 lected if the module is not part of a re dundant pair Diversity Diversity X8 DIV Diversity is selected if the ACC is in terfacing two aggregate trunks DIV Single Aggre X8 is selected if the module is interfac gate ing one aggregate trunk NOTE Jumper X1 is located on the Aggregate Control Piggyback Card When configuring a non redundant 128 ACC w diversity place the redundancy Jumper X9 into the redundant position Otherwise a configuration error appears on the Controller Anytime the diversity Jumper X8 is selected on the ACC check that the redundancy Jumper X9 is in its correct position NOTE GDC 036R303 000 Common Card Installation 2 15 Figure 2 5 Aggregate Control Card Option Locations Aggregate Interface Plug In Card Options Three of the Aggregate Interface Plug In Cards h
227. int is the 8 kHz clock that is phase locked to the node reference Ref Test Point Test point is the incoming reference clock from a master timing source Gnd Test Point Test point is the ground reference for the other two test points Maint Jack Connector is used to connect a monitoring device to the ESCC Refer to Operation Manual for TMS 3000 Controller GDC 036R603 Vnnn for information as to how the Init Stand By and File State LEDs interact to provide status information Figure 4 4 Enterprise System Control Card Front Panel GDC 036R303 000 Operation d ALARM Major O Minor O 4 15 Name Part Description Major Alarm Red LED lights when there is a hardware failure of one of the common LED cards Minor Alarm Red LED lights when there is a hardware failure of one of the channel LED cards InSvce LED Green LED lights when power is applied to the RCC Figure 4 5 Redundancy Control Card Front Panel GDC 036R303 000 4 16 Operation STATUS Stand By InitO St In SYNC in O Ou tO Rmt Out Rmt OutO ALARM LocalQ Rm tO Rmt LOOPBACK Intl L Ge a Intl Local Inti O Rmt T Intl Rmt Rm O Rmt AGGR DIVERSITY A Fail O From Rmt A Sv ce O Fa A Fail B Sv R Data RCV x Clk RCV T Sync RCV CONTROL Gnd Data XMT Clk XMT Sync XMT Part Status LED Status
228. isplay Selects a video scroll mode required by your video monitor and video card Contains a debugging routine for machine language programmers To access the monitor program press the Ctrl control and Alt alternate keys and then press the Insert key Depending on the configuration of your particular Zenith system there is a time delay The following message appears on the screen FM 300 Monitor Version emory Size 640 K Enter for help gt Press the question mark key and ENTER A summary of the ROM monitor commands ap pears and their syntaxes are displayed Here are six commands used most frequently Help B Boot C Color bar V Set Video Scroll TEST SETUP The command displays the Help menu The B command manually boots any drive installed in your system The syntax involved in the boot command follows B F W 0 1 2 3 lt partition gt lt Enter gt where B stands for Boot F for Floppy and W for the Winchester hard disk drive Reference num bers 0 1 2 or 3 refer to the drive numbers to boot from Partition function specifies the par tition number from the hard drive To boot from the hard disk drive type BW The computer boots from the default partition To boot from a hard disk drive partition type BW followed by 0 or 1 if you have more than one hard disk drive a colon and the partition number you want to boot from The C command display
229. itialization You then see Are you in North America y n If you are not in North America enter n and proceed to Step 3 If you are in North America enter y You see the following menu px NST Newfoundland Standard Time 252 AST Atlantic Standard Time 34 EST Eastern Standard Time 4 CST Central Standard Time D ST ountain Standard Time 6 PST ss Pacific Standard Time d XO e ue Yukon Standard Time 8 HST Hawaiian Alaskan Standard Time 92 NST Nome Standard Time Enter the number that represents your time zone If for example your time zone is Nome Standard Time you would enter the number 9 and press Enter 2 You see the following Does daylight savings time summer time apply at your loca tion y n If daylight savings standard time changes occur in your area enter y Ifnot entern In either case skip Steps 3 through 8 and proceed to Step 9 3 You see the following What is the abbreviation of your standard time zone Enter 1 9 characters or enter q to quit Enter the abbreviation of your time zone See above for instance EST 4 For areas not in North America you see How many hours west of Greenwich Mean Time are you Enter hh mm ss e g 10 30 00 or 10 30 use negative num bers or locations east of GMT or enter q to quit GDC 036R303 000 5 28 System Initialization 10 Enter a number You see Does summer time daylight savings time apply at yo
230. k Cards on board the Aggregate Control Card then prepare the data to comply with transmission standards EIA or ITU T The receive section locates the frame sync bits in the receive aggregate data stream and using these bits as a refer ence disassembles the remainder of the data stream into channel data channel controls and over head bits Aggregate Trunk A full duplex communication line which transports data between two nodes GDC 036R303 000 iv Preface Alarms These are raised when a malfunction is detected in the system Major alarms need immediate at tention Minor alarms are not immediately detrimental to the working of the system Major alarms indicate that hardware on a Common Module is malfunctioning Minor alarms indicate that the malfunction is in one of the Data or Voice Channel Cards Anisochronous The essential characteristic of a time scale or a signal such that the time intervals between signif icant instants do not necessarily have the same duration or durations that are integral multiples of the shortest duration Backplane This is the back panel of TMS 3000 s Main and Expansion Shelves It holds the external connec tors used by all the modules and covers the Main Harness Card Base Card A board that can have one or more cards called piggybacks plugged into it It can be tested removed and replaced as a unit independent from the piggyback card s B8ZS Binary Eight Zero Suppression Timing is crit
231. king modifications enter 3 from the first menu 6 The installation program prepares to partition the hard disk After a moment you see this partitioning menu 1 Display Partition Table 2 Use Entire Disk for XENIX 3 Create XENIX Partition 4 Activate Partition 5 Delete Partition Enter your choice or q to quit Select option 2 and press Enter The following partitioning table displays Current Hard Disk Drive dev XYZ Partition Status Type Start End Size Total disk size nnnn tracks mreserved for masterboot and diagnostics GDC 036R303 000 5 22 System Initialization 10 11 If you have previously installed an operating system on your disk the partitioning table contains information If not it is empty If any other operating systems were previously installed on your system you also see the following warning message Warning All data on your disk will be lost Do you wish to continue y n Enter y and press Enter This ensures that there is one partition on the whole disk for XENIX The new partitioning table is then displayed Press Enter and you see the partitioning menu You have now set up the XENIX partition on your hard disk To continue with the next step in the installation procedure enter q and press Enter Now you see a menu for verifying disk integrity Using this menu you can scan your hard disk for defective tracks A
232. l the transmit clock is the same as provided on the external clock inputs EIA pins 4 and 5 FRONT OF BOARD TDM Selection S1 4 Pos TDM Type TMS 3000 TMS Compact MEGAMUX PLUS IMUX TDM 1257 1258 Note that with the exception of 51 4 all other DIP switches must remain in the OFF position Figure 3 9 TID III Data Channel Module Transmitter Assembly Option Locations GDC 036R303 000 3 22 Channel Card Installation a Automatic Module Reset for FIFO Buffer Overflow Underflow Jumper Modes Application E1 E2 1 4 Automatic Module Reset Re Jumper 5 Automatic Tracking Mode Front of G Eaernatinterra Clock Board Jumper Application X2 E3 E4 External Clock E3 E5 Internal Clock X1 p E4 a E2 E3 ET N E5 D Figure 3 10 TID III Data Channel Module Receiver Assembly Option Locations Hyper Plug In Card The Hyper Plug In Card is a plug in option on the TMS 3000 and mounts onto a Data III Channel Data IV Channel or Universal Data Channel UDC Module In the TMS 3000 the Hyper Plug In Card option allows data channels to operate error free in the presence of up to 32 bits of frame jitter If an application exists for a Hyper Plug In Card on a circuit which is configured between two TMS 3000 a Hyper Plug In Card should be installed on the Data III Channel Data IV Channel or UDC Module at both ends If
233. l 12000 24 Aggregate Channel 14000 25 Aggregate Channel 14400 26 Aggregate Channel 16000 27 Aggregate Channel 19200 28 Aggregate Channel 24000 29 Aggregate Channel 25000 30 Aggregate Channel 28000 31 Aggregate Channel 28800 32 Aggregate Channel 32000 33 Aggregate Channel Note that special rates entered from the Controller appear as rates 240 249 on the maintenance console VEQ or VCH screens GDC 036R303 000 TMS 3000 Maintenance Console C 7 Table C 2 Aggregate Channel Rate Code Digits Cont Rate Number to Enter Usage 36000 34 Aggregate Channel 38400 35 Aggregate Channel 48000 36 Aggregate Channel 50000 37 Aggregate Channel 56000 38 Aggregate Channel 57600 39 Aggregate Channel 64000 40 Aggregate Channel 72000 41 Aggregate Channel 76800 42 Aggregate Channel 96000 43 Aggregate Channel 100000 44 Aggregate Channel 112000 45 Aggregate Channel 115200 46 Aggregate Channel 128000 47 Aggregate Channel 144000 48 Aggregate Channel 153000 49 Aggregate Channel 192000 50 Aggregate Channel 224000 51 Aggregate Channel 230400 52 Aggregate Channel 256000 53 Aggregate Channel 288000 54 Aggregate Channel 384000 55 Aggregate Channel 460800 56 Aggregate Channel 512000 57 Aggregate Channel 576000 58 Aggregate Channel 768000 59 Aggregate Channel 1024000 60 Aggregate Channel 1152000 61 Aggregate Channel 1536000 62 Aggregate T1 D4 1544000 63 Aggregate 2048000 64 Aggregate 66000 65 Channel PCM 3400
234. lashing stops if the download resumes within the download failure timeout pet riod the flashing resumes as the next download packet is received Minor Maint Red LED is on when the ACM is performing channel loopbacks only The LED Test LED goes off when tests are completed Dsbl Maint Pressing the switch isolates the ACM from the port and the node Press the Switch switch before the board is removed from the shelf This minimizes problems caused by the line drivers on the backplane If the switch is toggled again before removing the card the ACM reverts to a boot program In a redundant system toggling causes a redundant switch by forcing the ACM out of service When the ACM is disabled all front panel LEDs are off ACM Maint Red LED lights when the ACM fails a self diagnostic test or when it is unable Fail LED to function properly in the boot program In Svce LED Green LED lights to indicate that the card is in service Rev Clk Test Point Receive Aggregate Clock isolated through a 1K ohm resistor Gnd Test Point Ground Xmt Test Point Transmit Aggregate Clock isolated through a 1K ohm resistor Clock MAINT Jack Port for connecting a maintenance terminal Figure 4 18 ADPCM Compression Module Front Panel GDC 036R303 000 Operation 4 29 SIGNAL In Svce Chan Alm VF In VF Out Gnd Signal LED Signal LED LED LED Test Point Test Point Test Point Amber LED lights when the E
235. lation 2 17 Table 2 12 RS 422 423 Aggregate Interface Piggyback Option Selections S1 1 Thru 52 1 2 5 52 6 7 S28 X2X3 Feature S1 4 Pos S3 1 4 Pos Pos Pos Pos Pos Application EIA RS 422 BAL Off BAL Off BAL NOR BAL BAL _ This piggyback ITU T V 11 On M may be set to op Balanced Off erate in an RS Interface 422 mode equivalent to ITU T V 11 bal anced mode or a MIL STD 188 114 balanced mode MIL STD 188 BAL Off BAL Off BAL 18 It may be set to 114 Balanced 8 operate in an RS Interface On 423 mode equivalent to ITU T V 10 un balanced mode or a MIL STD 188 114 unbal anced mode EIA RS 423 UNB On UNB On UNB NOR UNB NOTE ITU T V 10 off M Berg Header X4 Unbalanced Off on this card is Interface used for test pur poses only MIL STD UNB On UNB On UNB MIL18 UNB UNB Do NOT place a 188 114 Off 8 jumper in either Unbalanced On position on this Interface header GDC 036R303 000 2 18 Common Card Installation x 036P042 001 REV J FACTORY DEFAULT SHOW i INVERT NORM X2 COMPONENT SIDE Figure 2 7 V 35 Aggregate Interface Piggyback Card T1 D4 Aggregate Interface Piggyback The latest version of the T1 D4 Aggregate Interface Piggyback card GDC 036P315 003 can be used in a TMS 3000 It is installed on the ACC of the TMS 3000 shelf Jumpers provide option sele
236. lation Switch Positions Voice Card Type S1 1 51 2 51 3 51 4 UVC Used GDC Part S1 5 S1 6 S1 7 S1 8 No Application PCM PCM ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 036 265 002 036P265 003 Provides PCM encoding at 64 Kbps with 2 kHz over head for com patibility with P N 036P250 Voice II PCM cards PCM T LO HPCM VF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 036P265 002 036P265 003 Provides PCM encoding at 64 Kbps with 800 Hz overhead ADPCM ADPCM ON ON ON ON ON ION ON OFF 036P265 003 Provides AD PCM encoding at 32 KHz with 2 kHz overhead for compatibility with P N 036M200 and 036M201 cards UADPCM UADPCM IF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 036P265 003 Provides AD PCM voice en coding with variable rates and 800 Hz overhead ASP ASP OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 036M265 001 Provides ASP en coding at a rate of 16 KHz A law PCM with PCM T fallback mode ASP MASP OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 036M265 001 Provides variable rate ASP TOR TOR VF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 036P265 002 036P265 003 Provides TOR encoding CADM CADM VF OFF ON ON ON ON ION OFF ON 036P265 012 Provides CADM encoding Mu law PCM at 16 KHz G
237. le for E lead operation following either a loss of synchronization or an out of service condition The available options are shown in Table 3 54 Echo Canceller Option Header X12 See Figure 3 17 is provided for use with the Echo Canceller Piggyback Card Header X12 allows selection between the incoming transmit PCM from the Codec NORM or the PCM with echo cancellation from the Echo Canceller Piggyback Card ECH Place Jumper X12 in the ECH position if you are using the Echo Canceller Piggyback Card otherwise it should be left in the NORM position GDC 036R303 000 Channel Card Installation 3 43 Voice Channel Configuration Selections The Universal Voice Card voice channel software configuration parameters are selected using the Controller for the Transport Management System The available selections are VF dB Levels ADPCM Selection of a reduced rate or the PCM T 64 Kbps pass through mode Detailed configuration instructions are provided in GDC 036R603 Vnnn FL 1 e e FL2 e e FL 3 e e FUSIBLE LINKS X6 X5 GND BUSY X1 M IDLE p INT VE xa EM B BATT VE X9 x3 X7 X8 NORM ECH BATT n n UK B US In Us UK INT B xa O o u LVL OUT Figure 3 17 Universal Voice Card Option Switch and Jumper Locations GDC 036R303 000 3 44 Channel Card Installation Table 3 49 Universal Voice Card Voice Encoding Option Selections Modu
238. lead pin 11 on the DB 25 EIA connector is in a Busy state during loss of power This selection is generally made for connections between the voice channel and automatic ringdown circuits Idle Busy Busy With these three jumpers set in the position shown the E Lead pin 24 on the DB 25 EIA connector is in a Busy state during loss of power The E lead pin 11 on the DB 25 EIA connector is in an Idle state during loss of power This selection is generally made for connections between the voice channel and PBX systems or Tellabs and other voice ter mination systems Table 3 40 Voice II CVSD Channel E Lead Out of Service Option Selection Feature tion X2 Posi X3 Posi tion Application Service Interruption Loss of Sync Signal Response NORM NORM If TMS 3000 synchronization is lost or the channel is placed out of service the E Lead is forced to the Idle state for 2 5 seconds and then reverts to the Busy state INH NORM If TMS 3000 synchronization is lost or the channel is placed out of service the E Lead is forced to the Busy state 2 5 seconds after synchronization is lost NORM INH If TMS 3000 synchronization is lost or the channel is placed out of service the E Lead is forced to the Idle state immediately INH INH The E Lead state is not changed due to loss of synchronization or channel placed out of service GDC 036R303 00
239. lead of the voice channel is busy Output from the VLBRV is in the form of a solid state switch Low resistance equals a busy condition E lead to ground Amber LED lights when the M lead ofthe voice channel is busy E signal is a product of the remote channels M signal Green LED lights when the channel is entered in the currently active TMS configuration This indicates that the card is either operating or prepared to operate according to the parameters entered for that channel in the ac tive configuration Red LED lights when an alarm condition exists in the channel Alarm messages are described in GDC 036R603 Vnnn For bridged measurement of voice channel VF input level to the transmit section Isolated through a 10K ohm resistor Input levels should be 0 dBm or 16 0 dBm For bridged measurement of voice channel VF output level from the re ceive section Isolated through a 10K ohm resistor Input levels should be 0 dBm or 7 0 dBm Analog ground point for VF input and VF output measurement Figure 4 19 VLBRV Voice Channel Module Front Panel GDC 036R303 000 4 30 Operation Name LED Description SIGNAL E Signal Amber LED lights when the E lead of the voice channel is busy Output is LED in the form ofa solid state switch Low resistance equals a busy condition E lead to ground E signal is a product of the remote channels M signal M Signal Amber LED lights when the M lead of the voice chann
240. lections 3 40 Voice Channel Modules 3 24 Echo Canceller Card 3 45 Part Numbers 3 24 Voice II CVSD and ASP Channel Interface Connections 3 24 Voice II CVSD Channel Module Options 3 25 Input and Output Signal Levels 3 25 E and M Signaling Interfaces 3 25 Filter Clock 3 25 Universal Voice Card Channel Options 3 39 ADPCM Voice Encoding 3 39 E and M Signaling Echo Canceller 3 40 Idle Busy E lead and Voltage Polarity Input and Output Signal Level 3 40 PCM Voice Encoding 3 39 Service Interruption 3 40 Common Logic GDC 036R303 000 Index Voice Channel Configuration Selections 3 40 Voice Channel Module Options 3 36 E and M Signaling Interfaces 3 36 Input and Output Signal Levels 3 36 Variable Rate ASP Piggyback Card 3 47 Voice 036M200 004 3 24 Voice With E And M 036M201 004 3 24 Voice Channel E Lead Polarity Option Selection 3 38 Voice Channel E Lead Service Interruption Options 3 39 Voice II ASP Channel E Lead State During Loss Of Power Option 3 39 Voice Channel Input Level Adjustment Option 3 38 Voice II ASP Channel Module Option Locations 3 37 Voice II ASP Channel Module Options 3 36 Voice II ASP Channel Module Front Panel 4 25 Voice II ASP Channel Option Selection 3 37 Voice II ASP VF Channel E And M Signaling Type Selection 3 38 Voice II ASP 16k 036M259 001 3 24 Voice II ASP Multi 036M259 002 3 24 Voice II CVSD And ASP
241. link xenix and press Enter Type cd dev and press Enter Type mkdev 3comB and press Enter At the prompt Do you wish to install or delete 3comB driver Type i andpress Enter You are then shown a paragraph on 3comB 503 setup and a prompt Do you wish to continue Type y andpress Enter Answer the questions board0 Interrupt vector number 2 7 Type 5 andpress Enter board0 Network type thin or thick thin This connection type depends on the connection type available for your local area network Ask your network administrator I O Base address in hexidecimal 000 310 300 Type 2e0 andpress Enter Do you have another 503 board Type n and press Enter Do you wish to re link the kernel now Type y andpress Enter Do you wish to use the kernel by default Type y andpress Enter At prompt type mkdev tcp You see a short paragraph about TCP setup Ifyou are unsure of what your local host name and domain name are ask your network administrator You see the prompt HOST host Type your host name and press Enter Next you see the prompt DOMAIN UUCP GDC 036R303 000 A 12 Options Type your domain name and press Enter You see some information about Ethernet configuration If you do not know your IP address contact your system administrator At the prompt Interface 3comBO IP address Type your local IP address and press Enter At the prompt Does interface 3comBO0 use all Os for its broadcast a
242. llowing instructions are for loading TCP IP and STREAMS software on your TMS con troller The purpose of this software is to allow remote access to a TMS Controller through your Local Area Network LAN This remote access allows you to log into the TMS controller from anywhere on your LAN It functions the same as a remote dial up modem but at a faster screen refresh rate Although following these directions helps you load the software into your TMS controller you or your Network Administrator are required to resolve configuration issues that are specific to your local network addressing scheme You must also supply the remote access terminal such as PC NFS running on a DOS machine Key mapping for the function keys on your local machine are listed in the following table Your network administrator can customize your machine so you may easily use the TMS Controller remotely with the function keys GDC highly recommends the use of key mapping since using the TMS Controller without the full set of function keys is awkward 1 lt ESC gt M CURSOR UP lt ESC gt A PF2 lt ESC gt N CURSOR DOWN lt ESC gt B lt ESC gt O CURSOR RIGHT lt ESC gt C PF4 lt ESC gt P CURSOR LEFT lt ESC gt D 5 lt ESC gt Q_ BACKSPACE lt ESC gt J PF6 lt ESC gt R PF7 lt ESC gt S PF8 lt ESC gt T PF9 lt ESC gt U PF10 lt ESC gt V 11 lt ESC gt W PF12 lt ES
243. lso supports an additional printer port Before inserting the card verify that the following jumpers are set correctly Jumpers P1 P4 set for SER B Jumpers P1 P2 set for PAR B Mode jumper set for AT When loading software on an IDE or ESDI hard drive be aware that these computers are equipped with IDE Intelligent Drive Electronics hard drives The drives are low level formatted at the factory by the manufacturer You do not have to perform a XENIX badtrack scan as the badtracks have already been identified and flagged at the factory To bypass this step type Q The Zenith 433Dh PC has an ISA bus The Configuration Utilities Disk is marked as ISA There is no longer a ROM setup screen available to configure the computer from the ALT CTRL INS key sequence To configure the computer you must use the ISA configuration utility disk that is supplied with the instruction manual Here is a brief description of how to use this configuration utility This must be done before SCO XENIX is loaded on the hard drive GDC 036R303 000 5 16 1 Power off the PC System Initialization Insert the ISA Configuration Utilities disk into the boot drive and apply power to the PC The Zenith Logo screen comes up press Enter When the list of configurations appears select it and press Enter The configuration screen appears Ensure that each parameter is set as described below To change settings highlight the setting you wish to chan
244. ly the M Lead detector of the channel equipment pro Polarity vides only a negative voltage and requires a negative polarity E Lead setting But if the M Lead detector pro vides a positive voltage the E Lead polarity should be set to positive GDC 036R303 000 Channel Card Installation 3 41 Table 3 47 Voice Channel E Lead State During Loss Of Power Option Feature E Lead X4 X5 Position Application State Position Loss of Power Idle 2 3 2 3 With this selection the E Lead is in an Idle state dur E Lead ing loss of power Signaling State Busy 1 2 1 2 With this selection the E Lead is in a Busy state dur ing loss of power Table 3 48 Voice II ASP Channel E Lead Service Interruption Options Feature Jumper Application ASP Positions E Lead State Upon Loss X7 1 2 The E Lead is forced Idle 0 5 seconds after sync of X8 1 2 loss and then reverts to the Busy state after two sec Sync Service Interrup onds tion X7 2 3 The E Lead is forced Busy two seconds after sync X8 1 2 loss X7 1 2 The E Lead is forced to the Idle state 0 5 seconds af X8 2 3 ter sync loss X7 2 3 The E Lead is not affected by loss of sync X8 2 3 Universal Voice Card Channel Options Option selection switches and headers are used to configure the various Universal Voice Card configurations to provide the desired voice encoding techniques input and output levels signaling
245. me a master of the network unless it successfully seizes the local node connected to it NOTE Network Restoral When the links between isolated sub networks are restored the polling message from the master reaches controllers previously isolated from the network When a master receives polling mes sages from other masters the network restoral process begins GDC 036R303 000 Redundant Controllers 6 5 Without intervention the master which has a better switchover priority becomes the new master of the merged network In the event that more than one master controller has the best controller priority operator intervention becomes necessary to facilitate network restoral Such interven tion is accomplished by either changing the switchover priority of the local master controller or switching mastership via the Controller Diagnostic screen If you choose the first method after the local master controller priority value is changed the mas ter with the best controller priority is then allowed to take over the network Ifthe new selected master is not the controller you desire you can perform a mastership switchover when the merge is completed making the target controller the master We recommend that the controller priority not be set to either its largest 10 or smallest 1 value for controllers in the network This leaves room for you to be able to force the local controller to become either a subordinate or master by either lowering
246. ment connected to the channel Most systems specify either 0 dBm or 16 dBm as their nominal output PBX sys tems generally require selection of 0 dBm automatic ringdown or Tellabs and other voice termination systems generally re quire selection of 16 dBm If actual out put levels of connected equipment vary from the nominal levels of 0 dBm or 16 dBm Switch S2 may be set to achieve some level of compensation Nominal Out put Level 7 dBm 7 0 dBm The nominal output level for the Voice II Channel is either 0 dBm or 7 dBm This selection depends on the nominal in put level specified for the telephone equip ment connected to the channel PBX systems generally require selection of 0 dBm automatic ringdown or Tellabs and other voice termination systems generally require selection of 7 dBm Adjustments to the actual measured output level of the voice channel may be made through the CRT interface by setting a de gree of attenuation or amplification The output selected by S1 2 may be varied from 1 5 dB above the nominal level to 6 dB below the level in 0 5 dB steps Filter Clock 128 kHz X11 128 kHz This selection should be made whenever the data clock for the voice channel select ed through the supervisory port interface in the Configuration routine is greater than 32 kHz The 128 kHz selection ensures that the frequency range of the voice output does not exceed telephone line limits
247. ments the channel configuration NOTE selected through the Controller holds control signals On or Off as part of the GDC 036R303 000 3 12 Channel Card Installation DTE DTE Z PIN 1 PIN 1 Z DCE DCE x DATA SET READY READY OUT DATA SET READY READY OUT DATA TERM READY READY IN DATA TERM READY READY IN EXTERNAL TIMING EXTERNAL TIMING EXTERNAL TIMING EXTERNAL TIMING RECEIVE TIMING RECEIVE TIMING RECEIVE TIMING RECEIVE TIMING CARRIER DETECT REQUEST CARRIER DETECT REQUEST TO SEND REQUEST TO SEND CARRIER DETECT REQUEST TO SEND CARRIER DETECT TRANSMIT DATA RECEIVE DATA TRANSMIT DATA RECEIVE DATA RECEIVE DATA TRANSMIT DATA RECEIVE DATA TRANSMIT DATA CHANNEL lt q ge DATA CHANNEL et p gt DATA INTERFACE CHANNEL INTERFACE CHANNEL A DCE B DTE SOME PLUGS MAY NOT INCLUDE NOTCH POSITION WITH PIN 1 ADJACENT TO APPROPRIATE SELECTION Figure 3 5 Data Channel Program Plug PP1 Positions DCE DTE PIN 1 Figure 3 6 Plug PP3 Positions GDC 036R303 000 Channel Card Installation 3 13 Channels Channels Data Term Ready CO Data Term Ready CO gt PP2 Send Control 4 PP2 Be Send Control 4 Data Set Ready CC m p Rcv Control 4 Rcv Control 4 is 2 Data Set Ready CC 4 Clear to Send CB 4 Clear to Send CB Request to Send CA 5 12 Send Control 1 Send Control 1 12 5 Request to Send CA lt Carr
248. ms In most situations the bulk delay value can be deter mined by trying the three possible set tings 0 ms 7 ms and 14 ms and then selecting the setting that provides the best results In cases where the length of the tail circuit varies greatly with different call routings then the Adaptive Delay setting should be selected to allow the length of the bulk delay to adapt itself to the opti mum value for each call The Echo Canceller Adaptive Bulk Delay Algo rithm may not function properly if the digital transmit and receive levels on the voice channel card are not set to be the same and the Echo Canceller may not converge to this situation It is essential to adjust the gains and losses in the analog circuitry so that a 0 dBm signal at each end of the link results in the same signal level mea sured in dBm at the analog input out put of the PCM CODEC Therefore the factory default setting of Bulk De lay option is now 0 ms External Line Enable Disable Disable Always Enable Always Disable when external control line is grounded Closed Down Closed Down Open Up Open Up Closed Down Open Up These switch positions control the op eration of the external control line The control line is used by external equipment to enable or disable the Echo Canceller when required With the switches set to the external control line Disable or Enable position the Echo Canceller is
249. munication does not pass between networks maintaining independent control of each network A network operator will be allowed to configure an XNET node and aggregate The operator can then configure circuits to traverse the XNET aggregate The operator running the other network must also configure a matching XNET node aggregate and circuits XNET allows limited diagnostic tests loopbacks to be performed GDC 036R303 000 1 Shelf Installation Overview This chapter contains information on the installation of the TMS 3000 Unpacking shelf mounting cable and wire connections option selection and system timing are all discussed here Figure 1 1 shows the rear panel of the TMS 3000 shelf Many tables and diagrams are required to provide sufficient installation information for the TMS 3000 system Most of the tables and diagrams in this chapter appear with the TMS 3000 module with which they are associated SHELF ASSY 036B300 001 MODEL No TMS 3000 Serial No DataComm PRI PRI PRI PRI OPT PRI PRI PRI PRI J15 J13 J11 J9 443 47 05 03 J1 SEC SEC SEC SEC EXT TMG SEC SEC SEC SEC J16 014 012 010 018 017 08 J6 J4 J2 NETCON PRINTER VDU J20 J19 ee CHANNEL INTERFACE ao a CHANNEL INTERFACE 4 J40 J39 J38 J37 J36 J35 J34 J33 J29 J28 J27 J26 J25 J24 J23 J22 J21 PHONE JACK J41
250. n DS4 DS3 XPP1 XRN7 DS2 422 188 TERM 2 8 4 051 OPEN OPEN DCE X25 422 REV X21 von ser P lt NOR 422 XRN8 XPP2 XPP3 O CTL 1 RTS Figure 3 4 UDC X 21 GDC 036M078 007 Controls Program plug PP2 PP1 on G 703 Data Channel card selects interface control signals to be multiplexed by the TDM and passed to the remote channel interface Different plugs are used to support the control signal requirements of various communication circuits Figure 3 5 illustrates program plug PP1 positions not applicable to G 703 channel card while Figure 3 6 illustrates PP3 positions Figure 3 7 A E shows each control plug and the channel interfaces implemented by installation of the plug Table 3 27 lists the part numbers for the program plugs Table 3 27 Program Plugs Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Resistor Network Special MM 01 PP2 331 001 010 Resistor Network Special MM 02 PP2 331 001 016 Resistor Network Special MM 05 PP2 331 001 015 Resistor Network Special V 54 MM 08 PP2 331 001 017 Resistor Network Special X 21 PP3 209 014 116 channel control scheme 9 Control signals for a data channel may be forced On or Off through the Controller interface In some channel control arrange
251. n F7 Test Function This key is used in status and diagnostic routines for channels In specific applications it is pressed to start a test or select a display the screen directs you whenever this key is required F8 Help Screen This key selects the Disk Based Manual topic that is most relevant to the current operating rou tine F9 Del Read Status This key steps through the status messages displayed on the Status Line the lower green line in all displays Each message is deleted after it appears unless you press the F1 key before pressing the F9 key The message queues can hold up to forty messages The messages report important events oc curring in the system When such an event occurs the normal alarm information is overwritten by the resulting status message and the line becomes yellow You must then press the Status Message key up to forty times to return the normal alarm information to the status line F10 Abort This key aborts the retrieval of active or historical alarm messages from the alarm data base F12 Shut Audible This key lets you turn off the terminal beep for the current alarm When a new alarm is received the beep resumes To shut off the beep permanently select NO for terminal beep in the Modify Alarm Handling screen Editing Keys The editing keys located in the block of keys at the right side of the keyboard provide utilities for entering and changing information within configuration displays Th
252. n Locations 2 36 ACM Option Selections 2 35 2 37 ACM 2 34 ACM EI ITU T Module 036M335 001 2 35 ACM T1 I O Plug In Card Option Selections 2 37 ACM T1 I O Plug In Card Option Locations 2 36 ACM TI Module 036M335 002 2 35 Adding Removing a Controller 6 5 Additional Printer Port Installation A 13 ADPCM Compression Module ACM 2 34 ADPCM Compression Module ACM Front Panel 4 28 ADPCM Voice Encoding 3 39 Agency Rules and regulations D 1 Aggregate Connector Functions Redundancy and Diversity 2 10 Aggregate Connector Functions 2 13 Aggregate Control Card Assembly 036M313 003 2 9 Aggregate Control Card Option Locations 2 15 Aggregate Control Card Options 2 14 Aggregate Control Card 2 8 ACC Options 2 14 Aggregate Connector Functions Redundancy and Diversity 2 10 Aggregate Interface Connections 2 9 Aggregate Interface Plug In Card Options 2 15 G 704 Aggregate Interface Piggyback 2 21 Part Numbers 2 8 T1 D4 Aggregate Interface Piggyback 2 18 T1 D4E Aggregate Interface Piggyback 2 21 T1 DS0 Aggregate Interface Piggyback 2 23 T1 FT1 Aggregate Interface Piggyback 2 23 Index Aggregate Control Card Front Panel 4 16 Aggregate Interface Cables 2 10 Aggregate Interface Connections 2 9 Aggregate Interface Piggyback Placement For Diversity 2 12 Aggregate Interface Plug In Card Options 2 15 Aggregate Interface 8 1 Aggregate Performance Installation A 6 Aggregate Channel Rate Code Digits C 6 AGR
253. n for J42 is checked If Port J42 is not configured as an external dial back modem the message Not Cfg d for Ext Modem is displayed The external modem is then checked to make sure it is currently on line If it is on line the mes sage On Line is displayed and the modem is not allowed to be configured until the current call is terminated The console I O is then internally routed to the external modem and the modem s help menu is displayed on the screen Please refer to the appropriate modem manual for a detailed description of the modem commands To terminate the modem configuration session press CTRL X AGR Set Aggregate Parameters This command is used to set minimum aggregate configuration data and force the aggregates to run sync frames Use this command when a node has no configuration or a bad configuration In these cases some of the Aggregate Control Modules at the local node are out of sync with those at remote nodes No communications can be established between these nodes When the AGR command is used the TMS Controller can then download a more complete configuration After you type AGR and press lt Return gt you see the following prompts in successive order Slot 4 1 16 1 5 for MEGAMUX TMS Compact Agg Rate 1 255 Tx Clk Source I E Ext Clk Source A R 1 4 or NTT Y N Red Agg Y N 1 s density Y N GDC 036R303 000 C 16 TMS 3000 Maintenance Console
254. n redundant system each slot marked SEC on the diagram has a blank filler panel Check that channel cards are in their correct slots Note that instal lation of TPP TMS Packet processor cards is covered in GDC 036R302 A7 Correct aggregate interface piggybacks or interface modules are installed on the ACM AD PCM Compression Module the CDA Combined Digital Aggregate module and the ACC Aggregate Control Card The TMS 3000 is usually shipped already mounted in a GDC EP 2M or EP 4 cabinet If your TMS 3000 is already mounted go to Step 4 below Otherwise follow these directions 1 If the TMS 3000 shelf assembly is not being mounted in a rack install it in a reasonably well ventilated location Do not locate directly above other equipment such as power supplies which generate large quantities of heat The ambient temperature should not exceed 122 F 50 O If the TMS 3000 is being rackmounted install it in a standard 19 inch rack Two GDC cab inets are available for that purpose EP 2T 30 in 76 cm by 23 in 59 cm by 24 in 61 cm with two fans EP 4 76 in 193 cm by 23 in 59 cm by 26 in 66 cm with blower GDC 036R303 000 Shelf Installation 1 3 Power Power Suppies ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC or CIC ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC or CIC ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC or CIC ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC or CIC ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC CIC ACC ACM CDA IAC DBC CIC or TPP ACC ACM CDA IAC DB
255. n the module Position the module in the receptacle guides top and bottom and carefully slide the mod ule into the receptacle until it stops Tilt the top ejector knob up and the bottom ejector knob down and gently push the module into the rear connector The knobs automatically assume their normal position When reinstalling the ESCC make sure the Enable Disable switch is in the Disable posi tion before placing it into the Main Backplane After the module is correctly seated move the switch to the Enable position Maintenance Console The Maintenance Console can set some aggregate parameters and perform basic maintenance functions Refer to Appendix C of this manual for more information on these functions Troubleshooting Procedures The diagnostic features of the TMS 3000 generally allow isolation of a failure to a single com ponent within the system The TMS 3000 has the following diagnostic features Front Panel Alarm Indicators Controller Reported Alarms and Status Displays Data Path Loopback Tests Maintenance Console Diagnostics Front Panel Test Points Preliminary Checks TMS 3000 problems may often be diagnosed by checking the condition of cables power cords and other mechanical connections Incorrect TMS 3000 configuration entries may also be the cause of some problems Perform the following preliminary checks before starting detailed trou bleshooting procedures l If no indicators on TMS 3000 are lit check t
256. nance Console Overview The TMS 3000 and MEGAMUX TMS Transport Management System Maintenance Console hereinafter referred to as the Console is a software package that allows you to interact with the TMS 3000 MEGAMUX TMS system on a local level 1 e at a site remote from the Controller This software is designed to work with any terminal that runs 1200 to 9600 baud ASCII on an EJA TIA 232 E interface The Console terminal is connected to J19 of the TMS 3000 Main Shelf Backplane The 25 pin D type connector should have the pin designations shown in Table C 1 9 2 Some of the TMS common cards ACM CDA TPP and OPP have a NOTE front monitor port for connecting the Maintenance Console The cable required for this connection is GDC 024H140 There are two components of the Console the boot console and the loadable console The boot console is used to initially configure the local node using only the boot firmware located on the Enterprise System Control Module ESCC which establishes a communication link between the local node and the TMS system This communication link allows the TMS to download soft ware to the local node This node control software which is downloaded to the node from the TMS controller gives the Console the ability to configure the local node and diagnose any prob lems The Console can be used to configure the controller port interface J20 and J42 and the aggre gates at the local node The main pu
257. nd supervisory communications and frame synchronization infor mation routed to a single destination One or more subaggregates may be carried on a single physical aggregate and routed to different destinations via a DACS network Subaggregates can be of different types TMS This type carries TMS proprietary data which includes overhead of synchronization and supervisory communication as well as channel data Network This type carries network DSO compatible data This data originates from a non TMS device and terminates on a non TMS device X 50 This type is considered as a network type subaggregate by CDAs and IACs but as a TMS subaggregate to Superframe D4 frame consists of 1 frame bit followed by 24 eight bit time slots A D4 superframe contains 12 consecutive 193 bit frames Supervisory Data Information which travels from the Enterprise System Control Card via the MP Bus It does not have any immediate bearing on the data being multiplexed Instead it keeps supervisory software in various parts of the system up to date Supervisory Pass Through A feature that establishes a supervisory data path to several TMS Compact nodes at a local site This allows an increase in transmission capability from a site by generating more aggregate trunks GDC 036R303 000 Preface xi TCP Transmission Control Protocol TMS 3000 Controller A computer that is connected to the Enterprise System Control Card in
258. ndary Aggregate Aggregate J9 Slot9 10 Slot9 10 Slot 9 or 10 Slot 9 Primary Aggregate Aggregate Primary Aggregate Aggregate J10 Slot9 10 Not Used Slot 9 or 10 Slot 10 Secondary Aggregate Secondary Aggregate Aggregate Jil Slot 11 12 Slot 11 12 Slot 11 or 12 Slot 11 Primary Aggregate Aggregate Primary Aggregate Aggregate J12 Slot 11 12 Not Used Slot 11 or 12 Slot 12 Secondary Aggregate Secondary Aggregate Aggregate J13 Slot 13 14 Slot 13 14 Slot 13 or 14 Slot 13 Primary Aggregate Aggregate Primary Aggregate Aggregate J14 Slot 13 14 Not Used Slot 13 or 14 Slot 14 Secondary Aggregate Secondary Aggregate Aggregate J15 Slot 15 16 Slot 15 16 Slot 15 or 16 Slot 15 Primary Aggregate Aggregate Primary Aggregate Aggregate J16 Slot 15 16 Not Used Slot 15 or 16 Slot 16 Secondary Aggregate Secondary Aggregate Aggregate n this arrangement the ACC cannot be paired with another ACC It must be next to an empty slot GDC 036R303 000 2 14 Common Card Installation ACC Options The options available on the ACC are described in Table 2 11 and option locations are shown in Figure 2 5 ACC GDC 036P313 001 assembly contains a factory adjustment switch SW3 that should never be changed in the field It controls a critical factory adjustment option which is set only when the PCB assembly is installed in a specialized test fixture at the factory The purpose of SW3 is to fine tune the turn on and turn off t
259. nection to run GTS Remotely A 13 TCP IP A 9 Technical Assistance Procedure 7 7 Technical Characteristics 1 B 9 Terminal Type and Keyboard Operation C 2 Test Points 7 5 TID III Data Channel Module Front Panel Switches And Indicators 4 27 TID I ECH 11 Emulation Mode Modes 4 3 18 TID II ECH 2 Emulation Mode Modes 1 3 3 18 Time Independent Data Module Options 3 18 TID III Configuration Requirements 3 19 Data Channel 18607 201 3 3 Data Channel Module EIA RS 422 Interface Connector Pin Assignments 8 10 TID III Data Channel Module Receiver Assembly Option Locations 3 20 Data Channel Module Transmitter Assembly Option Locations 3 20 TID III Data Channel Module 8 2 TID III Module Setup 3 19 Time and Date 5 11 TMS Controller Interface Baud Rate C 3 TMS 3000 25 Pin Connector Functions 2 10 TMS 3000 Controller 4 2 5 1 TMS 3000 Controller Editing and Cursor Position Keys 4 6 MS 3000 Controller Function Keys 4 3 MS 3000 Controller Initialization 1 5 MS 3000 Controller Interface Connections 1 10 MS 3000 Controller Operation 4 1 MS 3000 Expansion Shelf 2 46 MS 3000 Flex Card Configuration 2 49 MS 3000 Front Panel Components 4 13 MS 3000 Main Shelf Slot Locations 2 8 MS 3000 Maintenance Console 5 36 7 4 C 1 MS 3000 Module Locations 1 3 MS 3000 Node External Timing Connections 1 7 MS 3000 Non redundant Expansion Shelf 036M302 001 2 2 jdduddddddudadd
260. nformation about a particular network alarm available on a single console graphical depiction TMS alarm data and MEGAVIEW alarm data On Line HELP In addition to the TMS 3000 on line HELP manual an on line context sensi tive HELP facility is available via MEGAVIEW You benefit by having all HELP documentation available on a single console EMAIL In addition to the TMS EMAIL capability an on line EMAIL application is available on the MEGAVIEW console You benefit by having a full featured MAIL facility for communi cation among multiple MEGAVIEW operators Additionally through the deployment of the terminal emulator window for TMS remote TMS operators can deliver messages to MEGAVIEW operators and vice versa Utilities In addition to the Network and Controller Maintenance routines accessible via the TMS terminal window on MEGAVIEW a Utility application is available for MEGA VIEW re lated maintenance You benefit by having access to all utility functions at both the TMS and MEGAVIEW levels from the MEGAVIEW console MEGAVIEW Installation Hardware connections must be made from the TMS 3000 to the MEGAVIEW The Controller must have the Digiboard Multiport Card already installed in it before any MEGAVIEW connec tions are made If you have not installed the Digiboard Multiport Card in the TMS 3000 return to Page 17 1 From the Controller Maintenance screen select Configure Serial Ports Press Enter The I O Ports Con
261. nical publication nnn a number assigned by Technical Publications 000 identifies a hardware product and does not change Vnnn designates software version associated with a product which may be updated periodically The issue number on the title page changes only when a hardware manual is revised or when a manual is reprinted for some other reason it does not automatically change when the software is updated A new Software Version is always Issue 1 Other specialized publications such as Release Notes or Addenda may be available depending on the product Glossary of Terms ACM The ACM ADPCM Compression Module provides the means for a single DS1 CEPT line containing 24 30 PCM voice circuits to be brought into the TMS 3000 node and compressed via GDC proprietary ADPCM compression techniques The compressed signal is then transport ed across a trunk ADPCM Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation See ACM Aggregate A connection between two TMS nodes where the entire trunk carries a single bundle carrying the data originating from the TMS channels This term has conventionally been used to define the TMS s Aggregate Control Card trunk Also see Subaggregate Aggregate Control Card ACC This module interfaces the 16 896 MHz Fast Bus with a full duplex aggregate trunk connected to a remote node It buffers data from the Fast Bus and reforms it according to the transmit frame by adding overhead and frame sync bits Piggybac
262. ning in progress press q to interrupt at any time 12 After you respond to the above prompts the program scans the XENIX partition for flaws The larger your disk the longer the scanning process takes a 40 megabyte disk takes ap proximately 40 minutes for a thorough scan if the disk has never been initialized before As the disk is scanned the number of each track is examined and the percentage of the disk already scanned is displayed Destructively scanning track nnn n xx of scan completed Pressing the q key at any time interrupts the scan If you press q to interrupt the scan you do not needto press Ent er Youare asked whether to continue scanning or press Enter to return to the main menu Whenever a defective track is found the location of that track is listed using both the sector number and cylinder head conventions Defective track information is entered into the bad track table and appears on the screen An example of a bad track might be wd ERROR on fixed disk ctrl 0 dev 0 47 block 31434 cmd 00000020 status 00005180 sector 62899 cylinder head 483 4 13 When the scan is complete the menu reappears Select option 1 to see the results of the scan Your bad track table might look like this Defective Tracks Cylinder Head Sector Number s 1 818 5 83521 83537 Press Enter to continue Press Enter to return to the main menu 9 If there is a flaw in the fir
263. nly one jumper J1 It is located above the edge connector on the Processor Board Refer to Figure I on Page 2 of the Installation Guide Reference Manual The setting should be Pin 1 and Pin 2 Jumper pin 1 and pin 2 128K Dual Ported RAM 5 5The second set consists of four jumpers J1 J2 J3 J4 that are located above the DB 78 connector on the endplate Refer to Figure 28 on Page 52 Appendix B of the Installation Guide Reference Manual The settings are as follows Jumper Jl pin 1 and pin 2 RTxCA Jumper J2 pin 1 and pin 2 TRxCA Jumper J3 pin 1 and pin 2 DSRA input Jumper J4 pin 1 and pin 2 DSRA input 6 Install the card in any I O slot 7 Replace the outer casing ofthe PS 2 8 Turn the power on and reboot XENIX MEGAVIEW Overview The MEGA VIEW to TMS 3000 Interface is also available MEGA VIEW provides the following features and benefits to the MEGAVIEW user Object Oriented Graphics Interface Alarm information is presented to you in a graphical de piction with color changes indicating the location and severity of problems You benefit by be ing able to react to the graphics interface more quickly than traditional text oriented displays Full TMS Controller Access With our UNIX based terminal emulation program you are able to gain access to all of the features available via the TMS controller configuration routines IAR diagnostics maintenance etc This feature may be
264. ns A password allows access to a routine A symbolic name represents some unique entity in the network including the network itself and functions as an address for that device Some strings function only as reference information for an operator of a TMS 3000 Controller for example names and street addresses for node sites A numerical entry is a form of string entry The only difference between a numerical string and any other character string is that each entry must be within some numerical range For example the node address of a TMS 3000 node must be between 1 and 126 The TMS 3000 Controller does not accept any TMS node numbers higher than 126 or OCM node numbers higher than 9999 To make a string entry move the cursor to the desired field The selected field is highlighted in cyan light greenish blue and the characters are displayed in black Enter the character string and press the Ent er key The TMS 3000 Controller then accepts the string as complete You may also move the cursor out of a string field using the up or down cursor position arrow keys When the cursor leaves the field the string is complete When you have completed an entry by pressing the Enter key or moving the cursor out ofthe field the TMS 3000 Controller checks the entry for correctness A node name for example is not accepted if the name has already been used to identify another node You can however apply the same name to two different logical c
265. ns Available in 5 15 and 25 foot lengths 027H508 EIA RS 422 423 ITU T For EIA RS 422 or 423 ITU T V 10 or V 11 MIL STD V 10 V 11 MIL STD 188C 188C aggregate trunks Available in 5 15 and 25 foot lengths or other lengths up to 500 feet 027H201 ATT DS 1 Standard connector for T1 lines for connection to CSUs or other devices with F DB15 connectors 036H013 ITU T V 35 European For European V 35 applications Available in 5 15 or 25 foot lengths 027H307 T1 or ITU T G 703 25 pin For T1 or ITU T G 703 connections where connections to connector to wire ends trunk equipment are made using wire ends only no connectors Available in 25 or 75 foot lengths 027H408 EIA TIA 232 422 Sig Used for connection of RS 422 Aggregate to 422 Data nals Chan Submux 027H517 EIA TIA 232 E V 35 Sig Used for connection of ITU T V 35 Aggregate Link to nals business equipment connector on the DS 1 shelf 027H531 EIA TIA 232 422 Sig Used for connection of RS 422 Aggregate Link to busi nals ness equipment connector on the DS 1 Shelf 027H316 T1 D4 to T1 D4 Y cable Used for non redundant pairs of CDA modules in adjacent slots Provides two T1 lines with DB 25 connectors Table 2 9 TMS 3000 25 Pin Connector Functions Connector Function J1 J16 Aggregate Cable Connectors J 19 VDU Maintenance Console Terminal J 20 TMS 3000 Controller J 41 Internal VF Modem J 42 External Modem Port J 43 Optional Module Aggregate Connect
266. nter refers to the key that is NOTE labelled Enter 5 Atthe Welcome window press Enter 6 AttheMain Menu screen use the arrow keys to highlight Configure Computer and press Enter 7 AttheConfigure Computer window use the arrow keys to highlight Configure Computer Advanced Method and press Enter 8 Ascreen System Configuration Overview appears then a window saying Loading Configuration Files 9 When the files are loaded from the floppy into memory a window appears with the mes sage Configuration Files Loaded 27 486 System Version 1 Continue Press Enter 10 Atthis point a screen appears showing you the boards installed in the system e g System board monitor card and hard floppy drive controller Use the arrows and highlight 2486 System Boardandpress Ent er You do not have to enter through each slot separately No matter where you enter you can configure the entire system since it is only a starting place So if you start at the system board you start at the beginning 11 Using the arrow keys scroll downward and verify that each entry of each installed option board is the same as the following lists GDC 036R303 000 5 14 System Initialization Z 486 System Board SYSTEM BOARD INTERNALVersion n nn Speed Fast Slow Speed Option AT Compatible for 25 MHZ CPU CACHE QUEUE Cache Options Cache ON Queue 0 BOOT DEVICE Boot Device Floppy Then Hard Disk
267. ny flawed locations are mapped to good tracks elsewhere on the disk It also creates a bad track table which is a list of all the bad tracks on your hard disk You should also have a bad track list from the top of your hard disk drive The main badtrack menu looks like this 1 Print Current Bad Track Table 2 Scan Disk You may choose Read Only or Destructive later 3 Add Entries to Current Bad Track Table by Cylinder Head Number 4 Add Entries to Current Bad Track Table by Sector Number 5 Delete Entries Individually from Current Bad Track Table 6 Delete All Entries from Bad Track Table Please enter your choice or q to quit If using a Zenith 486 or newer model or any PC with an IDE hard drive press q and go to Step 16 Enter 2 then press Enter You see the following submenu 1 Scan entire XENIX partition 2 Scan a specified range of tracks 3 Scan a specified file system Select option 1 After you select the area you want scanned you are given the choice 1 Quick scan approximately 7 megabytes min 2 Thorough scan approximately 1 megabyte min Select option 2 You are prompted Do you want this to be a destructive scan y n Enter y You are warned GDC 036R303 000 System Initialization 5 23 This will destroy the present contents of the region you are scanning Do you wish to continue y n Enter y and press Enter You see the following message Scan
268. o which these regulations apply TMS 3000 Applicable Regulations Safety Aspects Safety protection for this equipment relies on the provision of a protective earth This should be hardwired to the earth stud provided on the rear of the power supply shelf This equipment must be earthed Alternatively the unit must be isolated from the PTO line interface before the mains plug con taining the protective earth is removed In such cases the PTO line interface should not be hard wired Connect only equipment complying with BS6301 to the ports GDC 036R303 000 D 2 Agency Rules and Regulations This equipment does NOT provide an isolation barrier between the PTO digital service and equipment connected to the ports All equipment connected to the multiplexer ports should carry BS6301 approval or be connected via an approved safety barrier It is possible to connect equipment having both BS6301 compliant and non compliant ports to the multiplexer thus creating a non isolated path between hazardous voltages in the connected equip ment and the PTO digital network When connecting equipment of this type to the multiplexer advice should be sought from a competent engineer Part 2 Telecommunication Attachment Details This apparatus is approved for connection to Kilostream and Megastream services The approval of this equipment for connection to circuits provided by a Public Telecomms Op erator is invalidated if the apparatus is subje
269. ock loop When X1 is in the EXT position the position of X2 does not matter in a TMS 3000 Data FIFO Include Bypass Include Bypass X3 X3 INC BYP The INC position includes FIFO buffers in the data path BYP bypasses the FIFO buff ers When the TI D4 piggyback is used in a TMS 3000 node select B YP for X3 Clock FIFO Include Bypass Include Bypass X4 X4 INC BYP The INC position includes FIFO buffers in the timing path BYP bypasses the FIFO buffers When the T1 D4 piggyback is used in a TMS 3000 node select BYP MSW MM MSW MM X54X6 X54X6 MSW MM If the T1 D4 piggyback is used in a TMS 3000 node place X5 and X6 in the MSW po sition GDC 036R303 000 2 20 Common Card Installation Top of Piggyback Card UO ooo X6 X1 x2 x3 X4 X5 CLK FIFO FIFO W 5 E MSay tos Ss zaz Figure 2 8 T1 D4 Aggregate Interface Piggyback 036P315 003 GDC 036R303 000 Common Card Installation 2 21 T1 DSO and T1 FT1 Aggregate Interface Piggyback The 1 080 and T1 FT1 Aggregate Interface Piggyback Cards provide a specific electrical and functional interface on the high speed aggregate port of the TMS 3000 TMSC or MINIMUX TDM The T1 DSO card GDC 036P335 001 is for use in Canada and the T1 FT1 card GDC 036P335 002 is for use in the USA The main difference from other types of T1 interfaces available from GDC is that the 1 serial bit
270. of the voice channel or a 128 kHz clock signal The criteria for selecting one clock or the other are discussed in Table 3 36 GDC 036R303 000 3 28 Channel Card Installation Table 3 35 Voice II CVSD And ASP Channel Connection Cables GDC Description Application Cable No 027H306 Voice Channel DB 25 connector to Single channel connection tip ring E spade lugs lead M lead and ground brought out to spade lugs Available in 5 15 and 25 foot lengths 027H409 Voice Channel DB 25 connector to Single channel connection tip ring E punch down wire leads lead M lead station battery signal and station ground brought out to wire ends for punch down applications Available in 5 15 and 25 foot lengths 326H024 TMS 3000 to PBX DB 25 connector to Used to connect up to eight voice chan 50 pin Amphenol connector Up to 8 nels to private branch exchange 5 foot voice channels length only requires 021H605 025 ex tension cable 326H025 8 channel harness DB 25 connector to Used to connect up to eight voice chan 50 pin Amphenol connector nels to facility Transmit and receive leads crossed over Available in 5 foot length only Requires 021H605 025 ex tension cable 326H026 6 channel harness DB 25 connector to Used to connect up to six voice channels 50 pin Amphenol connector to facility 326H021 TMS 3000 to Tellabs 266R shelf 6 Used to connect up to six voice channels voice channels to Tellabs 266AR shelf Availa
271. omponents A node and a circuit may both be named A for example The editing keys on the keyboard labeled Insert Home Page Up Delete End and Page Down support editing functions for character strings While many of these functions are not required for string entry they may enable greater speed and accuracy in character string entry GDC 036R303 000 Operation 4 11 If you enter a character string field and wish to exit it without entering a string press the key marked Page Up This key is the Delete Field editing key and deletes all characters in the field The TMS 3000 Controller does not let you exit a string field while an invalid entry remains in the field When you highlight a character string field the number of characters that may be included for that particular entry is indicated A password may have up to 16 characters The number of characters allowed for the fields is 16 Network 8 Configuration 16 Node 20 Circuit including the nnn extension 16 Group 16 Trunk Limited Range Entry For many system parameters entered in a routine you must select one of a limited number of en tries For example a node type could be either a TMS 3000 node or a Universal MM V4 node This particular parameter is selected as a limited range entry The field displays sequentially each pos sible entry for the parameter and you step through the range of entries until the proper choice appears To sele
272. on theright Place the piggyback interface card for the upper connector on the left See Figure 2 4 Table 2 10 gives the aggregate connector functions For each pair of slots choose which of the following applies and connect as described Note that odd and even numbered slots are as seen from the front of the TMS 3000 starting at the left with number 1 A redundant pair with diversity The upper connector odd or even slot piggyback A is con nected to the primary aggregate trunk and the lower connector odd or even slot piggyback B is connected to the secondary aggregate trunk A redundant pair without diversity The upper connector odd or even slot piggyback A is connected to the aggregate trunk The lower connector is not used A non redundant pair with diversity The upper connector is connected to the primary aggre gate trunk and the lower connector is connected to the secondary aggregate trunk A non redundant pair without diversity An ACC in an odd numbered slot uses the lower con nector piggyback B for aggregate trunk connections the ACC in an even numbered slot uses the upper connector piggyback A for aggregate trunk connections GDC 036R303 000 2 12 Common Card Installation Do not use diversity in your system if you use AT amp T s Automatic Protection Capability A TPP LAN with two media adapters can draw up to 15 amps from the 5 volt power supplies Consideration must be given to the maxim
273. ontents of your hard disk Do you wish to continue y n If you want to save any files enter n and press Enter If you do not have any files you want to save enter y and press Enter Z 9 If you have files on the hard disk that you wish to save respond n and the installation is aborted and the system shut down automatically You should then NOTE reboot the computer back up any files you want to save and restart the XENIX installation procedure from the beginning 2 When you respond yes you see information about your hard disk and this menu Hard Disk Drive 0 Configuration 1 Display current disk parameters 2 Modify current disk parameters 3 Select default disk parameters Enter an option or q to quit You at this point should select option 3 Select default disk parameters and press Ent er If you have a standard hard disk one that is supported by your computer hardware or special basecard ROM enter q followed by Enter to continue the installation Entering q at this point selects the default parameters for your hard disk Unless you know that your disk is nonstandard assume that it is standard and enter q to continue your installation Skip to Step 6 If your disk is nonstandard you must input information that overrides the ROM disk configuration information replacing it with new information If you are unsure of what parameters to enter for your nonstandard disk contact your disk manufacturer fo
274. or Functions Redundancy and Diversity Two Common Modules are redundant if the primary is in service and its pair is in standby in case the primary fails Aggregate trunks are diverse if the upper aggregate trunk connector on the back plane is in service and the lower connector is in standby Although functionally redundancy and diversity are unrelated a trade off exists between the number of channels and the number of aggre gates that can be accommodated This trade off exists because ofthe number of hardware connec tors on the main shelf backplane As shown previously in Figure 2 3 the TMS 3000 Main Shelf has 20 slot positions Of those 20 the four center slots are reserved for the controlling modules The 16 remaining slots are used for either ACC CDA ACM CIC DBC or TPP modules Note that TPP is covered in GDC 036R302 7 GDC 036R303 000 Common Card Installation 2 11 Think of these remaining 16 slots as 8 pairs because primary and redundant modules must be po sitioned adjacent to one another on the Main Shelf Also each pair of connectors upper and low er on the backplane are associated with each pair of slots they are positioned behind Up to 16 ACM or CDA Modules can be inserted into the TMS 3000 main shelf This provides up to 16 non redundant ACM or CDA Modules or 8 redundant ACM or CDA pairs Any unused module slots can be used by either ACCs or CICs When using 16 ACM or CDA Modules special provisions for
275. osoft Corporation Copyright O 1996 General DataComm Inc All rights reserved P O Box 1299 Middlebury Connecticut 06762 1299 U S A This publication and the software it describes contain proprietary and confidential information No part ofthis document may be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic or ma chine readable format without prior written permission of General DataComm Inc The information in this document is subject to change without notice General DataComm assumes no responsibility for any damages arising from the use of this document including but not limited to lost revenue lost data claims by third parties or other damages If you have comments or suggestions concerning this manual please write to Technical Publications or call 1 203 758 1811 Table of Contents Preface 1 O O U p o oa wo N E Shelf Installation Common Card Installation Channel Card Installation Operation System Initialization Redundant Controllers Maintenance Connector Pin Assignments Options Technical Characteristics TMS 3000 Maintenance Console Agency Rules and Regulations EC Declaration Index GDC 036R303 000 Antistatic Precautions Electrostatic discharge ESD results from the buildup of static electricity and can cause computer components to fail Electrostatic discharge occurs when a person whose body contains a static buildup touches a computer component The equipment m
276. ost character position of the field You must use the up or down cursor to exit the field Alphanumeric ASCII Keys These keys are enabled by the Controller whenever a character string entry or numerical range entry is required When entering a character string you may use any character shown on the main keyboard alphabet characters numbers punctuation marks etc The first character of a char acter string must however be an alphabet character Enter Key The Enter key is used in several ways to select enter and perform Controller operations Select a menu item with the cursor positioned at that entry Step through a limited range of values for a configuration entry Enter aresponse to a prompt such as Y for Yes Control Keys Combinations of the Ctrl Control key and various alphabet keys select specific controller func tions GDC 036R303 000 Operation 4 7 Screen Print Control P To print the current screen press the Ctrl and the P keys simultaneously The screen display is immediately printed to either LPO or LP2 depending on which one was selected in Controller Maintenance Configure Parallel Ports Flow Control Control S To freeze the screen press the Ctrl and the S keys simultaneously The display remains locked after this action To resume normal operation press any key on the keyboard Restore Field Control X This restores the previously stored character string to the field Press t
277. ot Used Odd slot This connector is located on the backplane of the main shelf If a Y cable is used con nect 1 of the Y cable to this connector Channel Interface Card This section covers Channel Interface ribbon cabling module options and installation and the use installation and cabling of Flex Cards Channel Interface Card to Expansion Shelf Ribbon Cabling Refer to your Network Documentation Package for Ribbon Cabling installation instructions for your network The plug in locations for the Ribbon Cables on the Main Shelf Backplane and the Expansion Shelf Backplane are shown in Figures 2 17 and 2 18 J41 8 J 42 J40 J39 J38 J37 J36 J35 J34 J33 J29 J28 J27 J26 J25 J24 J23 J22 J21 O O O O Figure 2 17 Main Shelf Backplane 50 Pin Ribbon Cable Connectors Rear View GDC 036R303 000 2 38 Common Card Installation Figure 2 18 Expansion Shelf Backplane 50 Pin Ribbon Cable Connectors Rear View Ribbon cables are extended from the 50 pin connectors for a CIC to each Expansion Shelf holding the channel modules that communicate through that CIC Expansion shelves can be connected to the TMS 3000 using flex cards Flex cards are described later in this section All channels on an Expansion Shelf must communicate through the same CIC NOTE On the Main Shelf Backplane the 50 pin ribbon cable connectors are J21 through J29 and J33 through J40 On the Expansion Shelf Backplane the 50 pin rib
278. ounting screws into the threaded standoffs located on the Hyper Plug In Card 6 Attach the label over the existing Data Channel or UDC marking located at the bot tom of the Data III Channel Data IV Channel or Universal Data Channel Module The Hyper Plug In Card contains no option settings Once installed it functions transparently A Data III Channel Data IV Channel or Universal Data Channel Module with the Hyper Plug In Card is configured similar to a standard Data Channel Module GDC 036R303 000 3 24 Channel Card Installation 036P244 001 036P236 001 Hyper Plug in card plugs into Data Channel III IV or UDC sync LSI socket Component side faces down towards the Dala Cannel bao UD 40 pin U14 IC socket on Data module Channel III IV or UDC Remove sync LSI IC chip XPP1 DTE XRN7 00000000 00000000 Mounting holes for DCE XMT NTWK Hyper Plug in Card 422 DS1 188 TERM I ond 2 3 4 BB s X21 NORM OPEN DCE XA2 n 422 00000000000000 XRN8 XPP2 m PP2 O 5 HYPER Plug In Card Label Location Figure 3 11 Channel Module with Hyper Plug In Card Mounted GDC 036R303 000 Channel Card Installation 3 25 HYPER PLUG IN CARD 9 Oo U NO Az km o e o gt a O 65 m lt e d lt m Pin 1 of the Hyper
279. password once more as a verification step and press Enter Make sure you enter it correctly otherwise the program prompts you to enter the password again When you have entered the password correctly you see some information about XENIX passwords and how to change your super user password in the future The super user password is now in place From now on the password is required whenever you attempt to access the system as super user The super user password keeps the system safe from unauthorized use It is important that you create a super user password during system initialization to ensure maximum protection of the system and to prevent unnecessary use of the super user also known as root account Z 9 It is very easy to make errors when you are logged in as super user that could destroy files Log in as super user only to install programs do system NOTE maintenance tasks and change the super user password GDC 036R303 000 System Initialization 5 27 Do not forget the super user password To restore a forgotten super user password you must reinstall the XENIX system If necessary keep a copy of the super user password in a safe place Proceed to Establishing the Time Zone Establishing the Time Zone The procedure is simple if you are in North America In countries in other areas read this entire section carefully and obtain the necessary information before continuing 1 The first thing you see is Time zone in
280. primary frequencies of the clock bus ofthis node The 18 432 MHz primary frequency is further divided to create the slower channel and aggregate frequencies The ESCC test point labeled Test is the 8 kHz prescaled frequency after it has been fed back to the phase detector from a phase locked voltage controlled oscillator The test point labeled Ref is the incoming frequency produced by a master timing source The test clock must be syn chronized to the Ref clock GDC 036R303 000 Maintenance Z y Use this procedure for the in service ESCC only An out of service ESCC shows erroneous results if the node is configured for aggregate or external tim NOTE ing Place oscilloscope leads on the Test point and the Ref point If they are frequency locked the incoming clock from the master timing source is successfully being phase locked at this node Place oscilloscope leads on the Test point and the Aggregate Control XMT CLK test point If they are frequency locked the clock rate for that Aggregate Control Card s aggregate trunk has successfully gone through the ESCC divider circuits and the clock bus to the Aggregate Control Card Place oscilloscope leads on the Test point and a Channel Module XMT CLK test point If frequency locked the clock has made it through the ESCC divider circuits the clock bus and the Channel Interface divider circuits O Z e A few incoming frequencies may not be an even multiple of the test signal and
281. put and output levels for the voice input and output as described in Table 3 50 Nominal input level may be adjusted to compensate for cable losses or other irregularities as described in Table 3 51 The nominal output level may also be adjusted to achieve additional compensation but the adjustments are software selectable only The output level adjustments have the same dBm range as the input level adjustments E and M Signaling Options The E and M signaling subsystem gives you a means of supervisory pulse communications between local and remote telephone networks The signaling data is transmitted over the same path as the voice data But additional bandwidth is used for the E and M signaling information By selecting various options the PCM or ADPCM versions of the Universal Voice Card can be configured to support seven types of E and M signaling as described in Table 3 52 The M Lead signaling interface circuits created by the jumper plug positions were previously shown in Figure 3 14 Idle Busy E Lead and Voltage Polarity Options E Lead inversion and loss of power states are selected by Jumpers X5 and X6 on the Universal Voice Card These options select the state BUSY or IDLE that the E Lead reverts to when TMS 3000 power is lost Jumpers X7 and X8 on the Universal Voice Card select the voltage polarity for the E Lead The option selections are shown and described in Table 3 53 Service Interruption Options Four options are availab
282. r Variable Rate ASP Piggyback Card Option Switch S1 Selection Fixed Rate ASP Variable Rate ASP ASP Piggyback Card ASP Piggyback Card Switch 036P259 001 036P259 002 Application S1 1 ON ON Fixed rate ASP switch posi S1 2 OFF OFF tions provide fixed rate ASP at S1 3 OFF OFF 16 Kbps S1 4 ON OFF Variable rate ASP switch posi I OFF tions provide software select S1 5 OFF OFF able variable rates of 10 11 12 or 16 Kbps GDC 036R303 000 3 50 Channel Card Installation Other Channel Cards There are several other channel cards that can be used in the TMS 3000 The technical manuals that contain detailed information about these cards are listed in the Preface For OCM channel cards refer to GDC 036R340 000 and associated addendums Summary This chapter provided information on the installation and optioning of the TMS 3000 channel cards Part numbers and option selection were discussed in this chapter What s Next In the next chapter we cover the procedures for operating the TMS Controller hardware and software GDC 036R303 000 4 Operation Overview The chapter provides information on the TMS Controller keyboard screen format and colors general operating procedures multiport cards printer options and the front panels of TMS cards TMS 3000 Controller Operation ATMS Controller is pictured in Figure 4 1 A software version of the Operation manual for the TMS 3000 Controller is installed on th
283. r a u user file system you see the prompt Do you want a separate u filesystem y n Respond n You see the statement The layout of the file systems and swap area is now prepared 17 You are asked Do you wish to make any manual adjustments to the sizes or names of the filesystems or swap area before they are created on the hard disk y n Enter n and press Enter On older versions of XENIX Step 18 appears Newer versions of XENIX bypass Step 18 especially when the Autologin feature is enabled 18 Ifyouhavea large root file system you may be asked if you want to allocate an additional small portion ofthe disk as scratch space for the fsck program This scratch space is needed for temporary storage when checking large file systems Respond y and press Enter 19 The system now loads a rudimentary XENIX file system onto your hard disk This takes several minutes You see the message Making filesystems GDC 036R303 000 System Initialization 5 25 20 The Restricted Rights Legend is displayed followed by the message Operating system serialization Enter your serial number and press Enter Enter your XENIX Operating System serial number exactly as shown on your serialization card and press Enter Then you see the message Enter your activation key and press Enter Enter your XENIX Operating System activation key exactly as it is shown on your serialization card and press Enter 21
284. r this information 3 Ifyour disk is nonstandard select option 1 to view the current disk parameters Next select option 2 to modify them as necessary When you enter either 1 2 you see the fol lowing display Disk Parameters Values I Cylinders value 2 Heads value Si Write Reduce value 4 Write Precomp value Ds ECC value GDC 036R303 000 System Initialization 5 21 6 Control value Landing Zone value 8 Sectors track value In the actual display value is replaced with the default value for that variable Z 9 The Cylinders value refers to the number of cylinders on the entire hard disk and should not be confused with the number of cylinders allocated or intended NOTE to be allocated to a given partition 4 If you entered a 1 you now see the first menu again If you entered a 2 you are now prompted Enter a parameter to modify or q to return to the main menu Enter a number 1 8 to change the disk parameters or q to return to the previous menu Enter the new value or press Enter to use the existing value If you wish to change the value enter a new value now or press Ent er to use the existing value 5 After you finish changing the disk parameters enter q to return to the main menu Next enter q again to save the changes you made Exiting by entering q overwrites any parame ters you have changed with the new values To restore the default parameters after ma
285. reen prompts for floppies Note that you are not prompted to insert all the volumes in your distribution at this time GDC 036R303 000 5 26 System Initialization If you insert a floppy in the wrong order you see this prompt Error incorrect volume in drive Make sure you are using the correct diskette Make certain the door of the floppy drive is completely closed Enter y and press Enter If there is an error with the extraction procedure you see the message Extraction error try again y n Remove the floppy from the drive insert the correct volume and press Enter Continuous extraction errors on the same disk may indicate that you either have a defective SCO XENIX disk or your floppy drive is malfunctioning Setting the Root Password To set a new password proceed as follows 1 When the last of the B diskettes is installed you see Please assign a password for the super user account root Enter new password minimum of 5 characters Please use a combination of upper and lowercase letters and numbers New password The new password can be any combination of letters numbers and punctuation marks but should be at least five characters long e g meansquare Enter the new password and press Enter The system does not display the password as you enter it so type carefully After you press Enter the system displays the message Re enter new password Enter the new
286. regate Control modules Slot 2 contains the third Aggregate Control module which provides the 1 of 2 redundant backup for the other two Aggregate Control modules The Aggregate Control module in Slot 2 is currently set to back up the Aggregate Control module in Slot 1 in the event of a failure VPT View Port Configuration This command is used to view port information If you select VPT a screen similar to the follow ing is displayed 120 342 Port Rate Data Type Parity Timing Modem Data Bits J20 4800 Async Even 8 J42 1200 Async Even 8 J19 Auto Async Even 7 GDC 036R303 000 C 12 TMS 3000 Maintenance Console MNT Set or Reset Maintenance Mode This command is used to tell the network controller that a technician is on site The on site user must set maintenance mode to on before the console software allows diagnostics During main tenance mode no alarm messages are sent to the network controller After you select MNT you see Current Mode Normal Change Y N By entering Y for yes the current mode changes to Maint If you select MNT again you see Current Mode Maint Change Y N By entering Y for yes the current mode returns to Normal DIA To Perform Diagnostics This command is used to initiate Diagnostic tests only after the MNT command is used to change the console to maintenance mode Maint 9 From the Maintenance Console diagnostics may only be performed on the NOTE Aggreg
287. regate In terface Plug In 120 ohm G 704 2 048 Mbps Aggregate In terface Plug In 75 120 ohm Expansion Data IVIII IV Channel EJA TIA 232 E Interface RS 422 Interface RS 423 Interface V 35 Interface Voice H PCM Channel ADPCM Plug In Voice II CVSD Channel Voice II ASP Channel GDC 036R303 000 Maximum 9 2 Watts 1 83 amps 5 V dc 412 V dc Maximum 20 Watts 4 amps 5 V dc 0 06 amps 12 V dc Maximum 4 1 Watts 0 55 amps 5 V dc 0 10 amp 12 V dc 0 01 amp 12 V dc Maximum 20 0 watts 4 0 amps 5 V dc 0 5 amps 12 V ac Maximum 75 Watts 15 amps 45 Vdc Maximum 50 Watts 10 amps 5 Vdc Maximum 18 5 Watts 3 6 amps 5 V dc 0 10 amp 12 V dc Maximum 2 8 Watts 557 milliamps 45 V dc 12 V dc 0 5 Watts 1 2 Watts 0 7 Watts 1 5 Watts 1 0 Watts 0 4 Watts 2 0 Watts 1 9 Watts 1 5 Watts 0 2 Watts 1 9 Watts 1 8 Watts 1 7 Watts 1 7 Watts 1 4 Watts 0 42 Watts 2 1 Watts 1 9 Watts 1 6 Watts Technical Characteristics B 9 Table B 1 Technical Characteristics Cont Item Specifications TMS 3000 Power Requirements Cont Universal Voice Card PCM 0 69 Watts Voice Universal Voice Card ADPCM 0 81 Watts Voice Maximum Power Consumption 350 Watts for TMS 3000 node with 96 local data channels 4 redundant Chan nel Interface Cards 4 redundant Aggregate Control Cards redun dant ESCCs and 1 Redundancy Control Card ADPCM Compression Modul
288. requency due to the clock inaccuracies or instability To select TID I Emulation Mode configure the TID III Data Channel Module for Mode 4 Automatic Tracking Mode Mode 5 Operation in the automatic tracking mode supports communications where input rates are subject to change in response to system configuration requirements To operate in the automatic mode select a maximum predetermined input rate and the TID III Data Channel Module supports all channel rates up to this pre selected maximum Operation in the automatic mode is supported only by the TID III Data Channel Module therefore the remote end of the link must also be a TID III Data Channel Module To select Automatic Tracking Mode configure the TID III module for Mode 5 The TID III Data Channel Module can support special interface applications via an optional interface or data conversion requirement can be accommodated to customer specifications Contact GDC with your specific requirements GDC 036R303 000 3 20 Channel Card Installation TID III Configuration Requirements With the variety of features and operation flexibility available with the TID III Data Channel Module it is important to review system communications requirements and constraints before attempting module set up Factors to consider are Which type of TID III Data Channel Module is on the remote end of the link e g TID I IL or HD The answer to this question directs you to one of the system appli
289. rnal Timing EXT TMG to RCV TMG RDY IN Ready In to RDY OUT Ready Out RDY OUT to RDY IN NOTE If the system uses an EIA TIA 232 E or RS 423 inter face and a synchronous modem is connected to a data channel interface select the DTE positions for S1 4 and PP1 Also dis connect the lead connected to pin 15 of the data channel connec tor If the system uses a balanced RS 422 or V 35 interface and a synchronous modem is connected to a Data channel interface se lect the DCE positions for S1 4 and PP1 Additionally a cross over cable must be used to complete the interface connections to the modem The crossover cable serves to cross the data timing and control signals for compatibility with the synchronous mo dem pins thereby eliminating potential timing problems NOTE GDC 036R303 000 For the Data Channel Module DTE DCE component board designations are usually the opposite of the equipment to which the channel is connected If you are connecting data terminal equipment CRTs printers etc to the channel with a straight through cable place switches and program plugs in the DCE position If you are connecting data communication equipment modems multiplexers etc to the channel place switches and program plugs in the DTE position Channel Card Installation 3 7 When RS 422 or RS 423 is selected for a channel the Data Channel module supplies only the data and timing signals at RS 422 or RS 423 spe
290. rocedures when removing or inserting parts or printed circuit pc cards Keep parts and pc cards in their antistatic packaging material until ready to install This equipment contains electrostatic sensitive devices Use ESD You should use an antistatic wrist strap connected to the grounded equipment frame or chassis when handling pc cards during installation removal or setting of on board option switches Do not use a conductive tool such as a screwdriver or paper clip to set the position of the option switches l Remove IC chip U14 40 pin sync LSI from its socket on the Data III Channel Data IV Channel or Universal Data Channel Module See Figure 3 11 for location of the sync LSI chip Store the sync LSI chip in conductive foam for future use 2 Remove the two mounting screws from the threaded standoffs on the Hyper Plug In card 3 Place the Hyper Plug In card with the component side facing down towards the Data III Channel Data IV Channel or Universal Data Channel Module Carefully align Pin 1 of A1P1 on the Hyper Plug In Card with Pin 1 of the 40 U14 IC socket the vacated sync LSI chip With all pins aligned carefully press the Hyper Plug In Card onto the Data III Channel Data IV Channel or Universal Data Channel Module See Figure 3 12 4 The mounting holes on the Hyper Plug In Card should align with the holes on the Data III Channel Data IV Channel or Universal Data Channel Module 5 Re install the two m
291. rpose for this ability is to communicate with the network con troller either directly via J20 or J42 if an external modem is selected or indirectly via an aggregate or J42 if it is a pass through port to another node Once communication is established software and configuration information can now be obtained The Console can also assist in diagnosing local problems Through the console you can display status for all common and channel modules Diagnostic loopbacks can be invoked for the Ag gregate Control and Channel Interface Modules You can invoke loopbacks for the channel mod ules with an optionally injected BERT test pattern Accumulated test pattern errors can be monitored Table C 1 EIA TIA 232 E Pin Designations Pin No Symbol Direction Description 2 TXD Out Transmit Data RXD In Receive Data Sig GND Signal Ground GDC 036R303 000 C 2 TMS 3000 Maintenance Console Terminal Type and keyboard Operation The Console software is designed to operate with an ASCII terminal that runs between 1200 and 9600 baud and uses an EIA TIA 232 E interface The character format is asynchronous with 7 data bits 1 start bit 1 stop bit and even parity The data rates are 9600 4800 2400 or 1200 baud Console baud rate is set automatically when you press Return After powering up the maintenance console is booted through firmware After the console is booted select a menu item by typing the associated t
292. rroneous data transfers between common cards and possible node failure The CDA I O cards operate in two modes hardware and software On power up the I O card comes up in the hardware mode The DIP Switch S1 on the I O card establishes the configuration of the card The I O card continues to operate in hardware mode until the CDA receives config uration data from the Controller At that time the I O card switches to software mode using the settings defined in the configuration Figure 2 10 shows the location of DIP Switch S1 on the T1 I O card and Table 2 18 defines the switch settings for the T1 I O Figure 2 11 shows the base card and Figure 2 12 shows redundant and non redundant cable connections The E1 I O card also provides the means to select the line impedance of the aggregate at either 75 or 120 ohms Jumpers X1 X4 The TMS 3000 does not supply a coaxial connection to provide a 75 ohm un balanced interface Figure 2 13 shows the location of DIP Switch S1 and Jumpers X1 X4 on the E1 I O card and Table 2 21 defines the settings The CDA microprocessor card contains one Jumper X9 This is the watchdog enable disable and should always be set to enable GDC 036R303 000 2 26 Common Card Installation CDA T1 E1 Aggregate Interface Cable Connections The CDA Module has two Input Output cards Each Input Output card contains one port Each port is dedicated to a specific backplane connector using a specific pinout arrangement
293. s 8 4 SCO Streams A 8 Screen Colors 4 8 Screen Format and Colors 4 7 Screen Format 4 7 Screen Print Control P 4 7 Security 4 13 Service Interruption 3 40 Setting the Root Password 5 26 Shelf Channel Interface Ribbon Connectors And Associated Slot Numbers 2 41 Shelf Installation 1 1 Shelf With Non redundant Common Logic 036M56 001 2 1 Shelf With Redundant Common Logic 036M56 002 2 2 Shelf Rear Panel 1 1 Software Options A 1 Starting XENIX From the Boot Floppy Set 5 17 Starting XENIX on the Hard Disk 5 25 String Entry 4 10 Supervisory Pass Through Installation 1 12 Support Utilities for Multiple Users 6 6 Switches 2 3 Synchronous 1 10 System Initialization 5 1 System Startup C 2 Inqex T1 D4 1 544 Mbps Interface To Aggregate Line Transceiver 25 Pin Connector Pin Assignments 8 2 T1 D4 Aggregate Interface Piggyback 036P315 003 2 18 2 20 T1 D4 Piggyback Card 036P315 003 Option Selections 2 19 T1 D4 E Aggregate Interface Piggyback Card 8 2 T1 D4 E Card Connector Pin Assignments 8 9 T1 D4 E Card Option Switch Locations 2 23 T1 D4 E Piggyback Card Option Selections 2 22 T1 D4E Aggregate Interface Piggyback 2 21 T1 DS0 Aggregate Interface Piggyback 2 23 T1 FT1 Aggregate Interface Piggyback 2 23 TCP IP and Streams A 7 Ethernet Device Configuration A 10 Loading Ethernet Software A 8 Loading GTS A 8 Loading SCO Streams A 8 Loading TCP IP A 9 Using your Ethernet Con
294. s 1 3 and 5 1 Kbps Output Clock Jitter 25 ms bit to bit jitter at 1024 to 512 Kbps Less than 0 75 at all other data End to End Channel Delay Acquisition Time rates With 384 bit output FIFO Buffer Delay Setting 527 135 bits With 96 bit output FIFO Buffer Delay Setting 239 50 bits Maximum of 512 bits with no errors detected and 768 bits with detected errors Transparency Transparent to any data pattern Channel Capacity Requires 2 contiguous channel card slots of a TDM Multiplexer shelf Power Requirement 5 A Temperature Operating 0 C to 50 C derate by 1 C 1000 ft above sea level Storage 40 C to 85 C Humidity Up to 95 without condensation Altitude Operating 10 000 ft Storage 40 000 ft Voice II CVSD Channel Digital Interface Synchronous Impedance 600 ohms resistive 10 Return Loss 15 dB minimum 300 to 3400 Hz Longitudinal Balance Usable Bandwidth Input Levels Output Levels Performance Levels at 32 Kbps Idle Channel Noise Cross Talk Loss Harmonic Distortion at 1004 Hz Intermodulation Distortion For input rate tracking mode 1 the output FIFO settles to almost full 27 bit delay for 96 bit tap and buffer ex cursion is limited to 10 bits 60 dB minimum 300 to 3300 Hz 300 to 3300 Hz 3 dB points 16 or 0 dBm at transmitter input switch selectable 6 0 to 1 5 dB of compensation available in 0 5 dB steps or 7 dBm at receiver output switch selectable 6 0
295. s a 16 bar color pattern to adjust the contrast and brightness of the dis play To access this program type C and press Enter The V command is used to set both the video mode and scroll mode The video mode deter mines the number of characters per line and the number of lines per screen and whether the dis GDC 036R303 000 System Initialization 5 11 play is color or monochrome The scroll mode determines how information is scrolled or moved on and off the screen To access type V and press Enter The TEST command runs a series of built in tests that diagnose problems you may be having with your computer To access type TEST and press Enter The SETUP command accesses the Setup Configuration Program To access this program type SETUP and press Enter To access the rest of the ROM monitor commands follow the same syntax procedure as discussed in the SETUP command Zenith 386 Setup Configuration Program The Setup Configuration Program lets you tell the computer how your system is configured The following procedure is only for a Zenith 386 You can set the time and date enter the amount of memory installed in your computer choose the drive you want your computer to boot from when you first turn it on enter the type of video card you have and tell the computer the number and type of floppy and hard disk drives you have so it recognizes them You can slow down the computer for special applications You can enter
296. s in a TMS 3000 that utilizes redundant common modules In a TMS 3000 not all NOTE failures of the out of service module are detectable Certain conditions may prevail causing disruption of the network when that module is placed into service Effects of Module Removal and Replacement Removal of most common modules or in service common modules in a redundant system stops data traffic through the system or through some segment of the system Removal of any module may cause temporary disruption of the node The following describes the effect of the removal of each of the common modules be sure that you understand these consequences before remov ing a module from the shelf Enterprise System Control Card Before removing the Enterprise System Control Card place the Enable Disable switch in the Dis able position In many instances removing and replacing an ESCC corrects a problem as de scribed below ESCC Removal To remove an ESCC from its assigned receptacle in the TMS 3000 shelf pro ceed as follows 1 If the ESCC is the in service ESCC of a redundant pair place it in the standby mode by using the diagnostics function of the Controller 2 Place the ESCC front panel Enable Disable switch in the Disable position 3 Grasp the ejector knobs on the top and bottom of the ESCC front panel Tilt the top knob up and the bottom knob down to unhook the ESCC then guide it straight out from the re ceptacle O Z Removing
297. s when the A B aggregate is passing data Receive aggregate data isolated through a 1K ohm resistor Receive aggregate clock isolated through a 1K ohm resistor First bit of Frame Receive Not This bit marks the beginning of each ag gregate frame received from the remote aggregate interface isolated through a 1K ohm resistor Ground Reference Point Transmit aggregate data isolated through a 1K ohm resistor Transmit aggregate clock isolated through a 1K ohm resistor End of Frame Not This bit marks the end of each frame transmitted to the remote aggregate interface isolated through a 1K ohm resistor Figure 4 6 Aggregate Control Card Front Panel GDC 036R303 000 Operation 4 17 id STATUS Init O Stan 30O ALARM MajorO MinorO LOOPBACK Intl O Local CHANNEL INTFC Name Part Description Init Status Red LED lights during initialization sequence The board cannot operate dur LED ing this time LED blinks when a local or remote software transfer takes place Stand By Status Green LED lights if this is the standby card of a redundant pair LED Major Alarm Red LED lights if there is a hardware failure on this CIC LED Minor Alarm Red LED lights if there is a failure in one of the data or voice channel cards LED interfaced by this CIC Intl Local Loopback Red LED lights if there is an internal local loopback Data received from a LED channel card is looped back to
298. s which ACM is attached to the aggregate The LED is active after initialization and is controlled by a microprocessorACM self diagnostic tests are described in Chapter 2 If lit during a configuration download it indicates g the ACM is unconfigured or the out of service card is ready to go in service STATUS Rmt Maint Yellow LED lights when a receiving ACM has detected a yellow carrier fail LED alarm signal The minimum detection time is 335 msec for a superframe format Maximum detection time is 1 second LED is disabled when the ACM is not in service The remote alarm is the equivalent of the yellow CFA alarm Local Maint Red LED is triggered by continuous loss of framing or by an intermittent out LED of frame condition in an incoming signal The local alarm is the equivalent of the AT amp T red alarm The LED is disabled when the ACM is not in service dur ing configuration download When the Stand By LED and Local Alarm LED are both lit it indicates incorrect configuration loaded due to incorrect hardware PC board or software version Minor Maint Red LED lights when status transitions are reported from various areas in the LED ACM are detected e g any channel having any type of fault Major Maint Red LED informs you that a power on self test is in progress The LED flashes Test LED during a program download The flashing persists as long as download packets are received from the node If packets are not received for two seconds the f
299. st a switchover of the mastership to a subordinate After the master has received a mastership switchover request it honors the request and prepares for the control trans fer Butifthe request is received at the master while IAR is still in progress the master maintains its mastership until IAR is completed Before transfer of the mastership a warning message appears on the status line on the master in dicating a switchover At alternate subordinate a message indicates whether the transaction is successful At the new master warning messages which indicate that the Controller is becom GDC 036R303 000 6 4 Redundant Controllers ing a master appear on the screen The switchover takes place immediately at the desired subor dinate when it receives the request from the master Therefore before a primary user issues the request you should inform the subordinate controller about the switchover O 4 e If a controller is configured as a Permanent Subordinate it does not take over the mastership of the network NOTE Network Separation The master enforces its mastership by polling subordinates periodically If a subordinate does not receive polling from the master within 210 seconds the subordinate assumes it is separated from the master controller This timing interval is initially set to 210 seconds but can be set at 50 to 900 seconds in 10 second increments based on the size of the network This change may be made
300. st expansion shelf is the GDC flex card you need Figure 2 24 TMS 3000 Flex Card Configuration GDC 036R303 000 Common Card Installation 2 49 Ribbon cables from the main shelf mount to J1 and P1A on flex card first expansion shelf Flex Card Assembly 036P093 001 Flex Card Assembly Expansion Shelf 036P092 001 036B301 001 Expansion Shelf 036B301 001 Expansion Shelf 036B301 001 Figure 2 25 Flex Cards Connecting Three TMS 3000 Expansion Shelves Connect the proper Flex Card assembly to each expansion module connector If connecting two shelves the lower female connector should line up with the second expansion shelf Line up all pins and carefully insert each connector into each expansion shelf Once the Flex Cards are prop erly seated insert the guide pins between the card and the expansion shelf The ribbon cables from the main shelf plug into J1 and P1A of the Flex Card Assemblies Finally tighten the shelf mount ing screws Guide pins not required if using updated TMS 3000 expansion shelf GDC 036R303 000 2 50 Common Card Installation It is not necessary to install the Cable Filter Plug In Cards between the expansion NOTE Shelf and CIC assembly Connecting Flex Cards in an Independent Cabinet When connecting expansion shelves in an independent cabinet you must use a ribbon cable to con nect the first or top expansion shelf to the TMS 3000 main shelf Referring to the expansion shelf cabinet in
301. st few tracks of the XENIX partition you must return to the previous installation step Repartition the disk so that the XENIX NOTE partition no longer includes the defective tracks You have to experiment to determine how many tracks to exclude Leave these defective tracks unassigned to any operating system When you finish repartitioning the disk check the disk integrity again and scan the disk for further flaws Repeat this process until you find no flaws in the first few tracks Because most flaws are marginal or intermittent your disk flaw map probably lists more bad tracks than the scanning process reveals If so you should now add these defective tracks to the bad tracks table If you are using an ESDI hard disk controller it is not possible to enter additional bad tracks to this table The low level format from Step 1 and XENIX bad track scan automatically flags any bad tracks Select either option 3 or option 4 depending upon the format ofthe flaw map furnished with your disk Enter the defective tracks one per line Do not worry about entering a number GDC 036R303 000 5 24 System Initialization that has already been found by the scanning process or accidentally entering a number twice Duplicate entries are ignored If you make a mistake enter q and press Enter You can always delete accidental entries from the bad track menu 14 If your disk is not furnished with a flaw map or you are finished making changes to the bad
302. stallation of the DigiChannel PC 8i card and its DIP switch settings Install the card as follows 1 Shut down XENIX and turn the power off in the controller 2 Remove the outer casing of the TMS Controller 3 There are two sets of jumpers on the card One set consists of three jumpers J1 J2 J3 that are vertically aligned at the left edge of the processor board Each of these jumpers should be set to pins 2 and 3 16K local RAM and 64K dual port RAM Refer to Figure 1 on Page 3 of the Installation Guide Reference Manual from Digiboard GDC 036R303 000 Options A 3 The second set consists of four jumpers J1 J2 J3 J4 that are horizontally aligned at the top of the I O Mate Jumpers J1 J2 and J3 should be set to pins 2 and 3 and Jumper J4 should be set to pins 1 and 2 DSRA input RTxCA and TRxCA Refer to Figure 33 on Page 61 of the Installation Guide Reference Manual from Digiboard The following procedure briefly outlines the DIP switch settings on the Digiboard DigiChannel PC 8i card For more information on the Digiboard DigiChannel PC 8i card refer to the nstallation Guide Reference Manual 4 Set the dual port RAM starting address to OxD0000 by setting SW 1 through SW 8 of DIP Switch 1 as follows SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW 4 SW 5 SW 6 SW 7 SW 8 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 5 Set the I O port address to 320 Hex Configure I O port ad
303. stants PLL Permanent Logical Link Port Any switchable entity A port may be a logical entity that is not necessarily realized through a physical connector For example a single Frame Relay interface can support many Frame Relay ports Traditionally this has referred to a physical and electrical interface point on a TMS net work interface card Printed Circuit Board pcb See card GDC 036R303 000 x Preface Red Alarm A network alarm that is produced by the receiver to indicate that it has lost its input signal frame alignment loss of sync or error rate exceeding a predetermined level A red alarm is considered a network alarm and applies to the following TMS 3000 modules only ACM and CDA Redundant Controllers In the TMS 3000 a network can contain more than one Controller Software allows the use of multiple PC controllers One master controller serves as the point of control for the entire net work All other controllers subordinate function as backups and as additional access points into the network The master controllers responsibility is to synchronize its data base only for the current network configuration data portion with all subordinate controllers Software allows up to five subordinate and one master controller Route A logical path through a network from the transmitting equipment to the receiving equipment The path can go through several nodes Subaggregate A collection of data channels a
304. stream at the data rate of 1 544 Mbps does not have to be fully utilized to carry voice and data information assembled by the associated multiplexer Fractions of the T1 bit rate in multi ples of 56 or 64 Kbps can be used by the multiplexer The T1 DSO and T1 FT1 interfaces may be used for TELCO supplied services that are known as fractional 1 In a fractional 1 application the TDM equipment can be connected to a Digital Access Cross Connect DACS to provide routing of individual 56 or 64 Kbps DSO channels to various remote locations The principal application for the T1 DSO and T1 FT1 Aggregate Interface Piggyback Cards is to offer a T1 interface that takes advantage of fractional T1 services Instead of paying for a full T1 line you pay only for the bandwidth needed by selecting the number N of DSO channels where 1 lt N lt 24 As bandwidth requirements change you can change the number of DSOs This is par ticularly useful at feeder nodes which typically have smaller bandwidth requirements The 1 080 Canada and T1 FT1 USA also provides an aggregate frame structure at 1 544 Mbps in accordance with ATT D4 or Extended SuperFrame ESF formats Refer to GDC 036R477 000 and 036R485 000 for complete information on these cards G 704 Aggregate Interface Piggyback Before mounting the G 704 Aggregate Interface Piggyback Card be certain all the options are configured The G 704 Aggregate Interface Card contains a 40 pin socket
305. t Maint Mode CFM Configure Ext Modem DIA Perform Diag MFP Modify I O Port Configuration AGR Set Agg Cfg amp Activation 3 Type VEQ and press Return The current configuration information is displayed 4 If any ofthe configuration information needs to be modified follow the procedures detailed in Chapter 4 Command Reference TMS Controller Interface Baud Rate The baud rate of the Controller Interface at the TMS node the node local to the controller and the PC Serial I O Port 0 baud rate must agree In the event of a direct connection to the TMS Con troller a rate of 9600 bps is recommended for 486 controllers When there is a modem link for dial backup use baud rates of 1200 bps or 2400 bps are recommended Refer to the MFP com mand later in this appendix for further details on setting baud rate Help Menu The following is a description of the Console Main Menu If you do not have loadable software or have experienced an unexpected memory loss follow the procedure Node Startup Procedures discussed earlier in this section After powering up the Console you see this screen HEL View Help VCH View Chan VEQ View Equipment VPT View Port Configuration MNT Re Set Maint Mode CFM Configure Ext Modem DIA Perform Diag MFP Modify I O Port Configuration AGR Set Agg Cfg amp Activation To select an item in the HELP menu type the command all upper case and press lt Return gt
306. t signal 10 DISABLE External disable line 11 12 V 12 V dc supply 12 SPARE Not used 13 GND Ground Table 8 16 CDA Module DB25 Output 25 Pin Connector Pin Assignments Pin Number Signal Name Description 1 Gnd Chassis Ground 2 XMT DATA A The A side of the transmit data pair 3 RCV DATA A The A side of the receive data pair 14 XMT DATA B The B side of the transmit data pair 16 RCV DATA B The B side of the receive data pair These pins are used when the second CDA module is connected as a non redundant pair in con junction with the special Y cable 18 RCV DATA B The B side of the receive data pair XMT DATA A The A side of the transmit data pair RCV DATA A The A side of the receive data pair 25 XMT DATA B The B side of the transmit data pair GDC 036R303 000 Connector Pin Assignments 8 9 Table 8 17 TID III Data Channel Module EIA RS 422 Interface Connector Pin Assign ments Channel Card Module Edge Connector EIA Connector P1 Pin Number Signal Description 1 1 Chassis Ground 7 32 Ground 17 27 Receive Clock A 10 52 Receive Clock B 3 28 Receive Data A 25 51 Receive Data B 24 56 Transmit Clock A 11 54 Transmit Clock B 2 55 Transmit Data A 22 50 Transmit Data B 5 25 External Clock A 24 External Clock B 20 26 Test Signal 6 23 Test Signal From TID Channel to User From User to TID Channel GDC 036R303 000 8
307. t the Configure Serial Ports routine found under the Controller Maintenance Menu and make sure that Port is enabled and the data rate is correct 2 Make sure that any network operations such as diagnostics or downloads have been com pleted Return the Network Access menu to the controller CRT screen Power must remain on in the Controller to operate the CRT Link 3 Log in through the operator terminal that is being used as the CRT Link by typing gts at the login prompt 4 When finished using the CRT Link interface make sure that any operations initiated from the CRT Link interface have been completed Then return to the Network Access menu and log out After you log out using the CRT link you have three minutes before control is lost and 1s taken over by the TMS Controller To cancel this three minute timer log into a network on the CRT link interface 5 Resume operations through the Controller interface The serial port becomes disabled when returning from the CRT Link to the Controller With the port disabled no further operations are initiated through the CRT Link Multiport I O Card When the Multiport I O card is installed in the Controller the I O Port Configuration screen con tains additional field selections that appear Port The number of the I O port being configured 00 for Serial Port 0 01 for Serial Port 1 With the I O card installed Ports 00 05 appear when using the Digiboard 4e and Ports 00 09 app
308. t type of common card module occupies the slot in this configuration If a number is entered here it indicates aggregate rate by code digit These code digits are defined in Table C 2 For example the number 64 entered in this column indicates that the Aggregate Control module in this slot is running at 2048K baud If the aggregate is configured for a special rate a valid rate code digit is not displayed Special channel rates that are entered on the TMS Controller appear as code digits 240 through 249 on the Console The following list shows the other common card modules that are represented on the console CIC Channel Interface Module CDA Combined Digital Aggregate Module CDA E Combined Digital Aggregate Module E1 Version IAC ISDN Aggregate Control Module ACM ADPCM Compression Module If UNDEF appears it indicates that this slot is undefined in the currently running configuration GDC 036R303 000 TMS 3000 Maintenance Console Table C 2 Aggregate Channel Rate Code Digits Rate Number to Enter Usage 0 62t CDA 75 1 Channel 100 2 Channel 150 3 Channel 200 4 Channel 300 5 Channel 400 6 Channel 600 7 Channel 800 8 Channel 900 9 Channel 1000 10 Channel 1200 11 Channel 1600 12 Channel 1800 13 Channel 2000 14 Channel 2400 15 Channel 3200 16 Channel 3600 17 Channel 4000 18 Channel 4800 19 Aggregate Channel 6400 20 Aggregate Channel 7200 21 Aggregate Channel 8000 22 Aggregate Channel 9600 23 Aggregate Channe
309. tandard bal anced interface set 81 3 S1 4 and in the 422 position To select an EIA RS 423 standard unbalanced interface set S1 3 51 4 and in the 423 position Program plug PP2 in the adapter card must also be positioned for an RS 422 or 423 in terface This is done by positioning the plug so that the notch on the plug is adja cent to the 422 or 423 silkscreen markings on the card The Data Channel module must also be set for an RS 422 or RS 423 interface NOTE The following interface sets Table 3 23 to Table 3 26 are available to change the interface type as required on existing Data II Data III Data IV UDC and G 703 modules GDC 036R303 000 Channel Card Installation Table 3 23 Interface Set RCV XMT EIA TIA 232 E 036M047 001 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Resistor Network RN8 331 002 006 Resistor Network RN7 331 001 006 Resistor Network 036C010 001 Table 3 24 Interface Set RCV XMT RS 422 036M047 002 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Resistor Network RN7 331 001 004 Resistor Network RN8 331 002 005 Table 3 25 Interface Set RCV XMT RS 423 036M047 003 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Resistor Network RN7 331 001 005 Resistor Network RN8 331 002 004 Table 3 26 Interface Set RCV XMT V 35 036M047 004 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No Resistor Network RN7 331 002 002 R
310. te Control module or the ad GDC 036R303 000 TMS 3000 Maintenance Console C 11 dress of the local node if the module is a System Control module For all other equipment types nothing is entered Status indicates the status of this slot Lnk down indicates that this aggregate link is currently down Out slot indicates that the module is not physically in the slot Out serv indicates that this link 1s totally out of service In alarm indicates that this link 1s currently in an alarm con dition If this field is blank it indicates that this link is currently healthy with no prevailing con ditions to affect it The Status column indicates the alarm condition of the corresponding Aggregate Control module or Channel Interface module An asterisk in the Status column indicates a major alarm If the Console is connected to a TMS Compact node selecting VEQ results in a screen similar to the following being displayed ooo ooo 6 Ee 4 Slot 4 Index 4 TxClk Ext Clk NTT Red Den Addr Status 01 62 Y Y Y 085 02 SET TO BACK UP 1 003 Out serv 03 64 E A N M N 003 04 CIC 05 Cre P scc In serv S scc Out serv Up to two aggregate trunks can be supported by a TMS Compact node Each trunk requires one Aggregate Control module in the TMS Compact shelf A third Aggregate Control module pro vides 1 of 2 redundant backup in a redundant system In the screen above Slots 1 and 3 contain the Agg
311. ted at the subordinate a message indicating the change has completed appears Before the master completes downloading the new network configuration to all nodes you are advised to not make any further changes on the master You should not login before the network change has completed at the subordinate Otherwise the changing process on the subordinate may become disrupted You may end up with several master controllers trying to control differ ent on line networks The process of on line network changing on the subordinate may or may not involve receiving a download from the master Downloading the new network to a subordinate takes place if such a network does not exist on the subordinate If the subordinate has three networks then the down loaded network replaces the one having the same network name or the current on line network if the previous conditions do not prevail Otherwise the downloaded network is added to the existing networks on the subordinate Upgrading Operating Software When upgrading operating software in the system all subordinate controllers should be discon nected from the network and upgraded off line Only after the network has been fully upgraded by the master controller should the subordinate controllers be reconnected into the network Con trollers using different operating software versions should never be simultaneously connected to the network In an on line network environment key features are distribut
312. the E Lead is used for signaling loss of TDM power X8 BUSY results in a BUSY E Lead X9 BUSY X7 IDLE When the E Lead is used for signaling loss of TDM power X8 IDLE results in an IDLE E Lead X9 IDLE NOTE The E Lead P1 54 is the inverted state of the E Lead P1 56 Voice IWASP Channel Module Options The following options can be selected for the Voice II ASP Channel Modules See Figure 3 16 for the location of each option selection device Input and Output Signal Levels Nominal levels may be selected for voice input and output as described in Table 3 43 Attenuation of the input level to compensate for cable losses or other irregularities may be selected as described in Table 3 44 E and M Signaling Interfaces By selecting various options the Voice II ASP Channel Module can be configured to support all E and M signaling types as depicted in Table 3 45 Figure 3 14 shown earlier in chapter depicts the M lead signaling interface circuits created by jumper plug positions E lead polarity selection and E lead responses to loss of power and service interruption can also be selected as described in Table 3 46 through Table 3 48 GDC 036R303 000 Channel Card Installation 3 39 Table 3 43 Voice Channel Option Selection Selection Switch S Jumper X Feature dBm Desig Position Application Nominal Input 0 51 1 OFF The nominal input level is determined by Level 16 1 1 ON the nominal outp
313. the Expansion Module is on Since each CIC can interface four shelves of channels there are four selections These are described in Common Card Installation Table 2 30 The location of this option is shown in Figure 2 21 Table 2 30 Expansion Module Options Switch S Jumpers X Feature Selection Desig Position Application Shelf 1 is selected if Expansion Mod Selection ule being addressed contains the first 16 channels interfaced by the CIC EXP2 X1 EXP2 EXP2 is selected if the Expansion Mod ule being addressed contains the 17th through 32nd channel interfaced by the CIC EXP3 EXP3 EXP3 is selected if Expansion Mod ule being addressed contains the 33rd through 48th channel interfaced by the CIC EXP4 X1 EXP4 EXP4 is selected if the Expansion Mod ule being addressed contains the 49th through 64th channel interfaced by the CIC GDC 036R303 000 Common Card Installation 2 45 Figure 2 21 Expansion Module Option Locations All channel modules at a TMS 3000 node reside in Expansion Shelves A single Expansion Shelf holds up to 16 channel modules An Expansion Module is required in each Expansion Shelf two required for redundant operation See Figure 2 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 S P Figure 2 22 TMS 3000 Expansion Shelf GDC 036R303 000 2 46 Common Card Installation Flex Cards A Flex Card is an act
314. tine The prompts solicit information required in the course of a routine node circuit or route names for example and enable you to save configuration changes before exiting a routine Line 23 called the alarm status line and normally highlighted in green or yellow reports network status information The on line network and active configuration are reported The number of Active alarms those alarm conditions which exist presently in the network are reported in three categories Major Minor and Warning GDC 036R303 000 4 8 Operation A Major Alarm indicates a failure which could disrupt the flow of network traffic usually dis rupts a group of channels or an aggregate trunk A Minor Alarm indicates a failure of a lesser extent usually disrupts only a single channel A Warning Alarm is for information about an event that has occurred in the system Line 23 also displays status messages from asynchronous processes occurring in the network For example a downloading operation in a complex network may take several minutes Com plete messages from the download appear in this status line This report facility frees the Controller to perform other tasks in the foreground while a time consuming process runs in the background The alarm status line is blue whenever a status message is present Up to forty status messages may be stored for display on the status line The function key F9 is used to step through each status mess
315. tion of the Setup Configuration Program menu reflects the specifications of your high capacity hard disk drive Continue with the procedure Starting XENIX From The Boot Floppy Set GDC 036R303 000 System Initialization 5 13 Zenith 486SX 25 MHz and 486DX 33 MHz Setup Procedures When loading software on a Zenith 486 be aware that these computers are equipped with IDE Intelligent Drive Electronics hard drives The drives are low level formatted at the factory by the manufacturer You don t have to perform a XENIX badtrack scan as the badtracks have already been identified and flagged at the factory To bypass this step type Q The Zenith 486 PCs have an EISA bus or an ISA bus To identify which you have look at the disks supplied with your 486 The Configuration Utilities Disk is marked as ISA or EISA There is no longer a setup screen available to configure the computer from the ALT CTRL INS key sequence To configure the computer you now must use the EISA or ISA configuration util ity disk that is supplied with the instruction manual Exception Zenith 486DX 66MHz Z Select 100 The following is a brief description of how to use this configuration utility This must be done before SCO XENIX is loaded on the hard drive 1 Turn PC off Insert the Configuration Utilities Disk into the boot drive 2 3 Turn PC on 4 Atthe EISA Screen press Enter to continue 9 Throughout this manual the designation E
316. tly active TMS configuration This indicates that the card is either operating or prepared to operate according to parameters entered for that channel in the active configuration Alarm Alarm LED Red LED lights when an alarm condition exists in the channel Control Alarm messages are described in GDC 036R603 Vnnn Data in Test Transmit data into the channel Test point is isolated through a Data In Point 1K ohm resistor Data Out Clockin Data Test Transmit data out of the channel Test point is isolated through a Clock Out Out Point 1K ohm resistor Clock Test The clock from the customer interface which is encoded and In Point transmitted to the remote end Test point is isolated through a 1K TID II ohm resistor CHANNEL Clock Test The regenerative receive clock based on timing from the remote Out Point channel Test point is isolated through a 1K ohm resistor Gnd Test Signal ground for all measurements Point Figure 4 17 TID III Data Channel Module Front Panel Switches and Indicators GDC 036R303 000 4 28 Operation Note that any Name Part Description reset condi tion causes all Init Status Red LED lights when the ACM is executing the boot program LEDs to light LED Jor about one Stand By Status Green LED lights during self diagnostic test If a failure occurs LED is de ac second LED tivated making ACM unavailable for automatic redundancy operation LED also indicate
317. to 9600 bps External modem async up to 4800 bps Derate operating temperature by 1 C 1000 ft above sea level GDC 036R303 000 B 2 Technical Characteristics Table B 1 Technical Characteristics Cont Item Specifications CDA Module Framing method Bit oriented proprietary or Byte oriented DSO Frame structure D4 or ESF CDA T1 CEPT G 732 or G 704 CDA E1 CDA module compatibility DACS Digital Access Cross connect D4 Devices and TMS 3000 w CDA Cross connection Meets DSX 12 interconnect specification CDA channel capacity 128 TMS 3000 channels Non redundant CDA pair 256 TMS 3000 channels Redundant CDA pair CDA line rate T1 1 544 Mbps E1 CEPT G 704 and G 732 2 048 Mbps PLL Jitter Tolerance Receiver Meets ATT Pub 62411 specification Stratum 4 Enhanced Input Output Ports Two DS1 ports support up to 48 DSO channels per CDA T1 module Two DS1 ports support up to 32 DSO channels per CDA E1 module CEPT G 704 G 732 Pulse Density Requirements B8ZS or Bit 7 stuffing suppression Data Channel Data Rates Synchronous From 75 bps to 1 152 Mbps Asynchronous From 0 to 19 2 Kbps Isochronous Anisochronous From 0 to 64 Kbps See Table 1 1 in Chapter 1 for listing of all standard channel rates Interfaces EIA TIA 232 E ITU T V 28 ITU T V 28 ITU T V 35 EIA RS 422 ITU T V 11 MIL STD 188 114 Balanced Data and Timing EIA RS 423 ITU T V 10
318. to continue or the interrupt key usually Con trol C or Delete to abort Press Enter The following message is displayed Informix serialization Enter your serial number and press Enter Enter your Informix serial number exactly as shown on your serialization card and press Enter Then you see the message Enter your activation key and press Enter Enter your Informix System activation key exactly as itis shown on your Serialization card and press Enter Next you see Installing filename messages When this process is finished the message Installation Complete appears signifying that Informix 1s loaded Carefully remove the diskette Proceed to the next topic Loading GTS Software GDC 036R303 000 System Initialization 5 33 Loading GTS Software Once Informix is installed you load GTS software You only need to follow this procedure when loading GTS for the first time For routine updates to software you may use the Load a Software Release routine in the Maintenance Utilities menu GTS software is provided on a set of fourteen diskettes The first disk is a setup disk which con tains the basic loading software which handles the rest of the loading operation this minimizes the number of XENIX commands required on your part After the setup disk are a kernel disk two ESCC disks and a set of disks labelled 1 10 When you enter XENIX commands be sure to include the spaces
319. ual pc board that replaces the ribbon cable assemblies previously used Figure 2 23 shows a typical Flex Card and how it is used to connect two expansion shelves The Flex Cards mount between each expansion shelf Two Flex Cards mount on the left side of each ex pansion shelf as viewed from the rear The Flex Cards come in several different lengths to accom modate the number of shelves being connected Each card has several 50 pin female connectors that provide electrical connections between each expansion shelf and a 50 pin male connector used to connect the Flex Card to a ribbon cable that goes to the main shelf assembly Several ferrite beads are mounted on one card to reduce the amount of reflection interference from the last shelf to the first Cutout slots on each card allow quick access to the business equipment connectors A redesigned rear cover mounts onto each expansion shelf to cover the flex cards and reduce radi ated noise 5 1 50 PIN P1 O E E E E E EeNNN CONNECTOR Ora TO UPPER Gea eh Se ah ah ea ead had Ce ads adh Gh eh ha EXPANSION SHELF O MAIN SHELF RIBBON CABLE ETETETT CONNECTOR soscsosssssssosssossssssssss m aQ QQ QQ Q Q G Q Q Q Q ON Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q EIA BUSINESS EQUIPMENT CONNECTOR SLOTS
320. ubject Type of Manual Transport Management System Product Portfolio 035R009 000 GPS 8B Power Supply Operating and Installation 036R302 A7 TMS Packet Processor TPP Addendum 036R304 000 TMS 3000 Technical Overview Technical Overview 036R603 Vnnn TMS 3000 Controller Operation 036R305 000 Quad Stat Mux Channel Installation and Operation 036R340 000 OCM 2000 Installation and Operation 036R342 000 OCM Packet Processor OPP Installation and Operation 036R452 000 Sync Status Module Instruction S 036R042 001 Sync Status Module with Enhancements Addendum 036R475 000 VLBRV Installation and Operation 036R477 000 T1 DSO Installation and Operation 036R478 000 Digital Bridging Card Installation and Operation 036R479 000 Turbo Data Channel Installation and Operation 036R480 000 CELP Channel Installation and Operation 036R483 000 Turbo Data Channel 2 5 Installation and Operation 036R485 000 TI FTI Operating and Installation 036R610 000 TMS 3000 Maintenance Console User Guide 036R611 000 OCM 2000 Maintenance Console User Guide GDC 036R303 000 Preface GDC publication numbers e g GDC 032R163 000 are used to track and order technical manuals Publication numbers use the following format GDC NNNRnnn 000 or GDC NNNRnnn Vnnn NNN identifies the product family e g UAS R denotes a tech
321. uipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No PCB Assembly Base Card 036P332 001 PCB Assembly Micro Piggyback 036P316 001 PCB Assembly I O Piggyback 036P310 001 PCB Assembly ADPCM SMT Plug In 036P333 001 Table 2 23 ITU T Module 036M335 001 Equipment Supplied Designation GDC Part No PCB Assembly Base Card 036P332 001 PCB Assembly Micro Piggyback 036P316 001 PCB Assembly I O Piggyback 036P282 001 PCB Assembly ADPCM SMT Plug In 036P333 002 A maximum of 12 ACMs 6 pairs can be installed in the TMS 3000 main shelf regardless of the type of power supply used Also keep the ACM away from the end slots in the main shelf where there is minimal airflow ACM Option Selections The ACM consists of four cards the base card one I O plug in card a microprocessor plug in card and an ADPCM SMT plug in card Available hardware options are located on the I O plug ins and base card An Input Output card is the interface between the ACM base card and the line It is aremovable module so that different interfaces can be easily installed The I O Plug in card allows for different interface parameters to be met The ACM connects to either of two DB 25 connectors on the backplane for link connections The top connector is designated as A the bottom connector is designated as B The top connectors are the odd numbered J designations the bottom connectors are even numbered An A
322. um current drawn in a NOTE TMS 3000 Consult General DataComm Service for information regarding the quantity of power supplies and backplane selects on TMS nodes containing more than two TPP cards or any number of TPP cards and more than three CDA ACM CIC or ACC cards Aggregate Interface Aggregate Interface Piggyback for Top Piggyback for Connector Bottom Connector Figure 2 4 Aggregate Interface Piggyback Placement for Diversity GDC 036R303 000 Common Card Installation 2 13 Table 2 10 Aggregate Connector Functions Connector Redundant Redundant Non redundant Non redundant Number Diverse Non diverse Diverse Non diverse Slot 1 2 Slot 1 2 Slot 1 or 2 Slot 1 Primary Aggregate Aggregate Primary Aggregate Aggregate J2 Slot 1 2 Not Used Slot 1 or 2 Slot 2 Secondary Aggregate Secondary Aggregate Aggregate J3 Slot3 4 Slot3 4 Slot 3 or 4 Slot 3 Primary Aggregate Aggregate Primary Aggregate Aggregate J4 Slot3 4 Not Used Slot 3 or 4 Slot 4 Secondary Aggregate Secondary Aggregate Aggregate J5 Slot 5 6 Slot 5 6 Slot 5 or 6 Slot 5 Primary Aggregate Aggregate Primary Aggregate Aggregate J6 Slot5 6 Not Used Slot 5 or 6 Slot 6 Secondary Aggregate Secondary Aggregate Aggregate J7 Slot 7 8 Slot 7 8 Slot 7 or 8 Slot 7 Primary Aggregate Aggregate Primary Aggregate Aggregate J8 Slot 7 8 Not Used Slot 7 or 8 Slot 8 Secondary Aggregate Seco
323. ur loca tion y n If summer time does not apply enter n Proceed to Step 9 If summer time does apply enter y You then see What is the summer abbreviation of your time zone Enter 1 9 characters or enter q to quit Enter the summer abbreviation of your time zone You see 1 Week of the year 1 52 2 Week of a specific month e g lst week of April 3 Day of the year ie Julian date 1 365 Select the method your time zone uses to convert from standard time to summer time daylight saving time or enter q to quit Select 1 2 or 3 You see At what time of day is the conversion made use 24 hour clock Enter hh mm ss or press Enter for default value of 2 am or enter q to quit Enter a number Depending upon which method your time zone uses you see the following prompt How many hours does your time zone adjust for summer time daylight savings time Enter hh mm ss or press Enter for the default value of 1 hour or enter q to quit Enter a number or press Enter Your time zone is now set You see the message Setting up system directories Next information about your file system s appears including the number of blocks cur rently used You also see another menu that gives you the option of stopping or continuing with the installation T Stop installation 2 Continue installation GDC 036R303 000 System Initialization 5 29 So far you have installed t
324. urements Figure 4 12 Universal Data Channel Module Front Panel GDC 036R303 000 Operation 4 23 In Svc eO In Svce Chan Alm VF In VF Out Gnd M 23 Signal LED Signal LED LED LED Test Point Test Point Test Point Description Amber LED lights when the E lead of the voice channel is busy Amber LED lights when the M lead of the voice channel is busy Green LED lights when the channel is entered in the currently active TMS con figuration This indicates that the card 1s either operating or prepared to operate according to the parameters entered for that channel in the active configura tion Red LED lights when an alarm condition exists in the channel4 arm descrip tions are in GDC 036R603 Vnnn Test point for bridged measurement of Voice Channel VF input level Test point isolated through a 10K ohm resistor Test point for bridged measurement of Voice Channel VF output level Test point isolated through a 10K ohm resistor Ground for VF input and VF output measurement Figure 4 13 Voice II CVSD Channel Module Front Panel GDC 036R303 000 4 24 Operation In SvceQ In Svce Chan Alm VF In VF Out Gnd Signal LED Signal LED LED LED Test Point Test Point Test Point Amber LED lights when the E lead of the voice channel is busy Amber LED lights when the M lead of the voice channel is busy Green
325. uring an electrical storm FCC Part 68 Compliance Connection of data communications equipment to the public telephone network is regulated by FCC Rules and Regulations This equipment complies with Part 68 of these regulations which require all of the following All connections to the telephone network must be made using standard plugs and telephone company provided jacks or equivalent Connection of this equipment to party lines and coin telephones is prohibited A label on the back of the front panel of data communications equipment and on the underside or rear panel of other equipment provides the FCC Registration number and the Ringer Equivalence Number REN for the unit If requested give this information to the telephone company If the unit causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily and if possible you will be notified in advance If advance notice is not practical you will be notified as soon as possible and will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC The telephone company may change its communication facilities equipment operations and procedures where reasonably required for operation If so the telephone company will notify you in writing You must notify the telephone company before disconnecting equipment from 1 544 Mbps digital service All repairs or modifications to the equipment must be performed by General DataComm Any other repair or modif
326. ut level of the telephone equipment connected to the channel If ac tual output levels of connected equipment vary from the nominal levels Switch S1 may be set to achieve some level of com pensation Nominal Output 0 S1 3 OFF The nominal output level for the ASP Level 7 S1 3 ON Channel is either 0 dBm or 7 dBm This selection depends on the nominal input lev el specified for the telephone equipment connected to the channel Adjustments to the actual measured output level of the voice channel may be made through the Controller by setting a degree of attenua tion or amplification The output selected by S1 3 may be varied from 1 5 dB above the nominal level to 6 dB below the level in 0 5 dB steps Refer to GDC 036R603 Vnnn for information on the output level x zr x2 pn mn Dost un X4 5 x7 X13 x9 xt X15 12345 x14 Figure 3 16 Voice II ASP Channel Module Option Locations GDC 036R303 000 3 40 Channel Card Installation Table 3 44 Voice II ASP Channel Input Level Adjustment Option Input 81 5 81 6 81 7 51 8 Compensation Application 1 dB 0 5 dB 2 dB 4 dB dB ON ON OFF OFF 1 5 Switches S1 5 through S1 8 select attenua ON OFF OFF OFF 11 0 tion or amplification for the voice input lev OFF ON OFF OFF 40 5 el This compensates for cable losses or improper out put
327. ve level signal is dropped X2 is CHSNCLK which allows enabling of an external clock for system phase locking Both options are shown in their normal option disabled position Figure 3 3 shows the option and program plug locations for the Data Sync Channel and Figure 3 4 shows the option and program plug locations for the UDC X 21 GDC 036R303 000 3 10 Channel Card Installation X2 EN DIS XPP1 00000000 PP1 xi 6 DIS EN DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1 TP5 1 Figure 3 2 Channel Module Option Locations G 703 Data Channel GDC 036P243 001 DS4 DS3 XPP1 XRN7 DS2 422 188 TERM DTE ON 2 3 4 a DS1 OPEN OPEN DCE X25 422 x21 NOR serat 292 NOR 422 XRN8 XPP2 XPP3 00000000 00000000 00000000 CTL 1 RTS X25 NORM no inversion X25 REV CTRL inversion Figure 3 3 Data Sync Channel Card Option Locations GDC 036P236 010 GDC 036R303 000 Channel Card Installation 3 11 X25 NORM no inversion X25 REV CTRL inversio
328. voice termination system supplied by General DataComm GDC 036R303 000 Channel Card Installation 3 27 Various standard cables supplied by GDC for voice channel connections are listed in Table 3 35 The options available for the Voice II CVSD Voice II PCM and Voice H ASP Channel modules are described in Table 3 36 through Table 3 48 Refer to Chapter 8 for channel connector pin assignments Voice Il CVSD Channel Module Options The following options may be selected for the Voice II CVSD Channel Module See Figure 3 13 for the location of each option selection device on the module Input and Output Signal Levels Nominal levels may be selected for voice input and output as described in Table 3 36 Attenuation or amplification of the input level to compensate for cable losses or other irregularities may be selected as described in Table 3 37 E and M Signaling Interfaces By selecting various options the Voice II CVSD Channel module can be configured to support all E and M signaling types as described in Table 3 38 Figure 3 14 depicts the M lead signaling interface circuits created by jumper plug positions E lead responses to loss of power and service interruption may also be selected as described in Table 3 39 and Table 3 40 Filter Clock The filter clock of the voice channel helps determine the bandwidth of the voice output Two sources may be selected for the filter clock a clock signal at four times the data rate
329. ween the two configurations it either down loads the differences or the entire on line network configuration including IAR data to the sub ordinate A subordinate controller can avoid lengthy downloads from the master if it starts up with a recent copy of the CCN At a subordinate you are not allowed to access the on line network menu system when the local controller is in the process of updating a configuration change from the master This is indicated by the message Controller RESET Initiated shown on the status line GDC 036R303 000 Redundant Controllers 6 3 Network Startup Procedure To simplify the process of starting up the network using multiple controllers both the network and controller configurations need to be populated That is the master controller is preassigned and contains a complete configuration data base of the on line network When you attach a sub ordinate controller to the network wait until the master finishes downloading the network before proceeding The start up procedure is described below 1 Disconnect all controllers from the network 2 Power on the master controller and logon to the system If you are not sure how to do this refer to Chapter 1 System Startup in GDC 036R603 Vnnn 3 Populate off line network configuration data using the Modify Configuration menu The master should have complete configuration data of the network which is intended for on line use 4 Connect the Master
330. with 1 5 ft extension reaching an additional shelf Cable 029H612 009 with 1 5 ft extension reaching an additional shelf Main Harness to Expansion Shelf length 9 ft Cable 029H613 009 with 1 5 ft extension reaching an additional shelf Cable 029H613 010 with 1 5 ft extension reaching an additional shelf Cable 029H613 011 with 1 5 ft extension reaching an additional shelf Cables Dressing to the Left Rear View 029H614 002 029H614 004 029H614 005 029H614 007 029H615 005 029H615 006 029H615 008 029H615 009 029H616 006 029H616 008 029H616 009 029H616 011 029H617 009 029H617 010 029H617 011 029H617 013 Main Harness to Expansion Shelf length 2 5 ft Cable 029H614 002 with 1 5 ft extension reaching an additional shelf Cable 029H614 004 with 1 5 ft extension reaching an additional shelf Cable 029H614 005 with 1 5 ft extension reaching an additional shelf Main Harness to Expansion Shelf length 5 ft Cable 029H615 005 with 1 5 ft extension reaching an additional shelf Cable 029H615 006 with 1 5 ft extension reaching an additional shelf Cable 029H615 008 with 1 5 ft extension reaching an additional shelf Main Harness to Expansion Shelf length 6 5 ft Cable 029H616 006 with 1 5 ft extension reaching an additional shelf Cable 029H616 008 with 1 5 ft extension reaching an additional shelf Cable 029H616 009 with 1 5 ft extension reaching an additional shelf Main Harness to Expansion Shelf length 9 ft Cable 029H617 009 with 1 5 ft extension
331. with V 35 Interface 036M079 004 3 3 Data IV Channel Module Front Panel 4 21 Data Rates 4 13 DB25 Backplane Connections For CDA Module 2 32 DB25 BP Connector For ACM Module 2 38 DBC 4 17 Delete 4 5 DIA C 12 Diagnostic Error Codes C 13 Dial Backup Connections 1 11 DigiBoard DigiChannel MC 8I IBM PS 2 1 DigiBoard DigiChannel PC 4E A 1 DigiBoard DigiChannel PC 8I 386 486 2 Digital Bridging Card 4 17 Digital Line Driver Adapter 3 8 E and M Signaling Interfaces 3 25 E and M Signaling Interfaces 3 36 E And M Signaling Option Selections EAM 1 Board 3 35 E And M Signaling Piggyback Card EAM 1 Option Locations 3 35 Echo Canceller Card Option Selections 3 46 Echo Canceller Card Option Switch Location 3 45 Interface Interface Inqex Echo Canceller Card Pin Assignments 8 8 Echo Canceller Card 3 45 8 1 Echo Canceller 3 40 Editing Keys 4 4 Delete 4 5 End 4 5 Home 4 5 Insert 4 4 Page Up 4 5 Effects of Module Removal and Replacement 7 2 EIA RS 422 423 Channel Interface Adapter Option Selection 3 7 EIA TIA 232 E Interface To Aggregate Line Transceiver 25 Pin Connector Pin Assignments 8 5 EIA TIA 232 E Pin Designations C 1 E Lead Service Interruption Options 3 44 End 4 5 Enter Key 4 6 Enterprise System Control Card Front Panel 4 14 Enterprise System Control Card 2 3 Entry Types 4 10 Cursor Position Entry 4 10 Limited Range Entry 4 11 String Entry 4 10 ESCC Installation
332. y pressing F3 brings you back to the TMS 3000 Main Menu You also may have to answer prompts to return there Use the other Function Keys and Editing Keys to accomplish specialized operating functions in the TMS 3000 system While most operations may be performed in the manner described above these keys enable you to operate the system more efficiently GDC 036R303 000 4 10 Operation Entry Types Three types of entries supply information to the TMS 3000 controller The entry types are Cursor Position Entry String Entry Limited Range Entry Cursor Position Entry This entry is made by moving the cursor using the cursor position or arrow keys to the desired field and pressing the Enter key Normally a cursor position entry selects an item from amenu The menu may occupy an entire screen or only a small section of a screen When you move the cursor to a desired field it becomes highlighted in white with black letters Making a cursor position entry usually results in the initiation of a new routine In some situa tions a function may be selected for the current display For example some configuration dis plays contain a Delete field within them You may select the Delete field by positioning the cursor at that field and pressing Ent er String Entry Any symbolic name password number or other sequence of characters that must be entered is a character string entry String entries perform several functio
333. yboard are not connected or the PC is logged off Serial Port 1 on the back of the PC is the leftmost I O Port Serial Port 0 is to the right of serial Port 1 See Figure 1 7 Synchronous GDC 027H328 connects the synchronous port of the Controller to connector J20 on the TMS 3000 backplane The synchronous port is provided by a Digiboard Digichannel PC 8i or MC 8i installed in the PC Refer to Appendix A of this manual for installation instructions GDC 036R303 000 Shelf Installation 1 11 SERIAL PORT 0 TMS TMs 3000 J20 NODE Connect the TMS Maintenance 028H305 XXX Console to the TMS 3000 using GDC Cable 028H305 XXX One end connects to J19 the other end connects to the Maintenance Console port labelled Modem or Comm TMS Maintenance Console Figure 1 6 Controller Hookup To TMS 3000 Node and Maintenance Console 028H303 xxx TMS 3000 SERIAL PORT 0 TME J20 NODE Controller Note that use of the NETCON Controller requires the PC monitor and keyboard to be disconnected External External Modem Modem Figure 1 7 Controller Hookup to TMS 3000 Node Using NETCON Controller NETCON Controller Dial Backup Connections To install Dial Backup using two external modems 1 Install cable 028H303 to the output port Port 1 on the Controller The DB 25 end of this cable connects to the input of an external auto dial modem The VF output of this external modem is connected into

TMS-3000 Controller

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents